Digitized by the Internet Archive 
In 2023 with funding from 
Columbia University Libraries 


https://archive.org/details/centralstationca0Opett 


CENTRAL STATION 
CATALOG 


SHOWING ONLY SUCH PRINCIPAL MATERIALS AS 
WOR ES BPA R VOU WARY fs Ul TA BIE 


FOR 
ORNAMENTAL STREET LIGHTING 
uN LINE CONSTRUCTION 


ALSO 
METERS, MOTORS, TRANSFORMERS 
AE PARA US ANDO as UP Piles 
TO Ga TE ee War El 
VALUABLE AND USEFUL TABLES 
AND DATA 


FULL INFORMATION GIVEN ON REQUEST FOR MATERIAL NOT SHOWN 


ALL PRICES QUOTED ON REQUEST 


PETTINGELL-ANDREWS COMPANY 


ON THE SITE OF THE BOSTON TEA PARTY 


GOIRINAM IR TW AIR by SIP AINSI) AIR IL ANI ILC AWTS G98 


BOSTON 


Palio taleNsG Re 1c - AN DsRv ESS oe G1 Onyl aa eNe ya 


f 
I 
: 
I 


PSB Reco eo Sn eR ES ee es OS ie e a ata a a 


MAIN STORE OF THE PETTINGELL-ANDREWS COMPANY 
PEARL ST., ATLANTIC AVE. AND PURCHASE ST. 
BOSTON 


AUTOMOBILE DIVISION 


100 BROOKLINE AVE. 
BOSTON 


Copyright 1920 
by 
Pettingell-Andrews Company 
Boston 


Cele NG ala Nees ely ee OeN CoA heA TE OrG 


Or 


“To Serve —and through the quality 
of Service— To Sell” 


CONSTANT, ever ready power 
supply is of vastly more 
importance to the con- 

sumer than a cheap power rate. 


In the majority of cases, the building 
of a transmission line is useless unless con- 
tinuity of service can be maintained. 


Unquestionably the largest percentage 
of station shut-downsare from line troubles, 
and the success of remotely situated devel- 
opments will depend upon the reliability 
of their transmission lines. 


With this thought ever in mind, the 
Pettingell-Andrews Company has endeav- 
ored to place before the Central Stations of 
New England a line of construction mate- 
rials, every one of which has been proven in 
actual service by the severest of all tests— 
the test of time. 


Each and every line of material shown 
in this catalog carries with it the guarantee 
of manufacturers who have been in business 
continuously for many years and who have 
built success upon the merit of their goods. 


DA 
OS 


EXEMPLAR 


It is significant that practically all man- 
ufacturers whose goods are shown are pio- 
neers 1n the manufacture of their type of 
product. As a result of the practical experi- 
ence gained during the long period of manu- 
facture, their products today are without 
questionin the highest state of development. 


It is logical that Pettingell- Andrews 
Company, being the oldest electrical jobbing 
house in New England, should have become 


associated as distributors with leading pio- 
neers. 


Through the excellence of both goods 
and service the Pettingell-Andrews Com- 
pany, who were established in 1886, are now 
the largest as well as the oldest electrical 
jobbers in New England. 


Pettingell-Andrews Company carry at 
all times in their warehouses the largest and 
most complete stock of construction mate- 
rials to be found anywhere in New England. 
This enables the most complete and prompt 
shipment of goods and is a service which 
Central Stations will find it profitable to 
rely upon. 


THE MARK THAT STANDS FOR 


THE 


HEIGHT OF EXCELLENCE 


IN ELECTRICAL GOODS 


AND SERVICE 


6 PURO TENG Ee Ls A ND Ren WwW S* GO svisPeAe Ney. 


aerate 
Pee camceenen © ear” 


err 


SECTION OF WIRE ROOM PIPE ROOM 
Over 1,250,000 feet of different kinds and sizes of wire always on band ready for Between 150,000 and 200,000 feet of pipe always in stock, including all sizes from 
quick shipment,—rubber-covered wire, armored conductor, flexible cord, %-inch to 4-inch, in black and galvanized, with elbows, couplings, condulets 
weather-proofs, slow-burning, bare, insulated, iron telephone wire, galvanized and other fittings for every size. Note method of storing all conduit on end 
strand, etc. to prevent accumulation of moisture and consequent rust. 


PART OF THE POLE LINE HARDWARE STOCK A CORNER OF ONE OF THE CROSS-ARM STOREROOMS 
Two to five carloads constantly on hand Three to ten carloads in stock at all times 


niQhd We 4 


4 ayes faa t 
“i yattet duly SooHees i las 3 Tits sted OP TARE Hae a He 
Mt WWE TY SHAR YF nitad 

‘Hd ‘Ti Score euiaY & 


This is a reproduction of the tablet marking the site of the Boston Tea Party, and is located 
on the PeTrinNGELL-ANDREWs Company building, corner Pearl St. and Atlantic Ave., Boston 


Cele N@Ighe Nee seh eA LaleOUN © AVE-A I O7G 


ORNAMENTAL 
Sue) Ube 1 IN G 


Realizing the importance of and the demand for ORNAMENTAL 
street lighting, the Pettingell-Andrews Company has endeavored 
to show a complete, dependable line of materials necessary for the 
proper installation of an ORNAMENTAL street lighting system. 


INDEX 


Page 
Brackets and Fixtures; GE Novalux.... 19-22 
BreakerseaG in Ole Cineuiteass oe eee 64-65 
Cables Okoniteenas tee ee icbosnocn QR 
Cirewuit) BrealcersexGE, Oils. 3-2 cs 64-65 
ConductorsHeb anemic asad ac kone 31 
Conductorss laswlatedin.-<cecer seen 1 31 
Conduit; Johns-Manville Fibre......... 32-34 
Cord; ‘‘Deltabeston’’ Heater .......... 88 
Cutouts; “D&W” Oil Fuse............ 36-37 
Cross-Arms; ‘“Exemplar’’............ . 46-47 
Fibre Conduit ; Johns-Manville......... 32-34 
Floodlighting; GE Projectors .......... 42-43 
Insulators; O-B Hi-Tension Porcelain.. 54-63 
ichtine Wits Gi Novalux......---.. 16-18 
Lightning Arresters; GE Compression 
C@hanabere Minltio apc psetetrcrt. 23 
Lightning Arresters; GE Telephone 
Line Insulating Transformers ..... 35 
MetersiaiG Wiltest are aac seme inate eee eee 75 
MetersenGHaWatthounseenriiccnece: seni 72-75 


Page 
MotorsemGibpotanonaryen ni. errr 76-84 
Pins; © Exemplar’? Locust.............. 17 
Pole Line Hardware; Hubbard........: 19-53 
Poless™Westerm Red: Cedar... o0..s2 4: 14-45 
lea menveleys Gren no eswne eodomeone hoes ook 38-41 
Protective; Telephone Equipment...... 35 
Regulators ; GE Induction Voltage...... 66-67 
Standards; Union Metal Ornamental... 9-15 
Street Fixtures; GE Novalux:....2-.-.. 19-22 
Switches; P-A Weatherproof Oil....... 18 
Swatches) rumibull’Satety..%..05-26 +. 84 
4 WGYO)] FSi do'n ceases ona aes Re ee 86-87 


Transformers ;GE Constant Current.... 
Transformers; GE Distribution......... 
Transformers; GE Type IL Series..... 
Voltage Regulators; GE Induction..... 
Winesm Milli sa Db aneemsenteassnts serie cir 
Wire; Phillips “‘O.K.’? Weatherproof 
Wires and Cables; ““OKONITER?’.......; 


Wiring Tables and Data 
Pages 89 to 107 


26-27 


66-67 
31 
30 


28-29 


8 P EeTerseNn 


Bete -vAO NOD UR EV Soa ei aaa: 


A FEW INSTALLATIONS OF UNION METAL STANDARDS 
IN NEW ENGLAND 


HOLYOKE, MASS. SEASIDE PARK, BRIDGEPORT, CONN. 


« STORE 


ome 


NEW HAVEN, CONN. BRIDGEPORT, CONN. FRANKLIN, N. H. 


CoRIN TD RAL 


be eae cOeN Cra Ic A Eb OrG 


Ko) 


UNION METAL STANDARDS 


FOR 


ORNAMENTAL 


STREET LIGHTING 


RNAMENTAL lighting standards manufac- 
tured by The Union Metal Manufacturing 
Company, for which the Pettingell-Andrews 
Company are exclusive New England Dis- 

tributors, possess the following points of superiority over 
those of any other type of manufacture. 


Points of Superiority 


i 


They are Handsome, Clean-Cut, Massive. 

2. They have great strength and durability. 

3. They are the “Safety First’? Standards. 

4. They insure against deaths and accidents. 

5. They have scientific sectional construction. 

6. They serve as shock absorbers to protect 

lamps and glassware. 

They have light weight, consequently low 

freight and low cost of erection. 

8. Sectional construction gives great flexibility 
in choice of design. 

9. They are the modern standards — vastly 
superior to cast iron or concrete. 

10. They are covered by a comprehensive 

twenty-year guarantee. 


= 


The 20- Year Guarantee and 
What It Means 


The Union Metal Manufacturing Company will re- 
place, at any time within twenty years from the date of 
erection, any Union Metal pressed steel shaft that fails 
from any cause whatever (except by willful, malicious 
damage) for the nominal sum of Three Dollars ($3.00) 
each, net, F.O.B. factory, Canton, Ohio. 

This insurance guarantee is printed on an envelope, 
one of which is attached to every steel shaft when it 
leaves the factory. It becomes effective and binding 
the day that the factory receives from the purchaser 
the enclosed card giving the serial number of the standard 
and the date installed. 

This Guarantee means that these standards are insured 
for twenty years at the small premium of 15 cents per 
standard per year, this premium never coming due unless 
the standard meets with an accident that requires its 
renewal. 


The ‘‘Safety First’? Feature 


Union Metal Shafts cannot break when bumped into 
by motor vehicles or from other traffic causes. 

All that can happen is to dent or bend the shaft because 
made of cold rolled copper bearing sheet steel, surfaces 
galvanized inside and out, they possess a sufficient degree 
of resiliency which is a vital factor of safety. And if the 
cast-iron base is broken the method of reinforcing with 
wrought-iron rods still holds the standard together. 

Any shock strong enough to bend the shaft would be 
sufficient to break either a cast-iron or concrete standard, 
with its attendant danger to passersby. 

Union Metal Standards obviate litigation and damage 
suits due to the infliction of death or personal injury to 
pedestrians when inferior make standards are used. 


Low Maintenance Cost 


Union Metal Standards are reduced to half the weight 
of cast iron without slightest loss of strength and with the 
added advantages of massive effect combined with great 
attractiveness plus their “safety first” resiliency. 

They are easily shipped and handled. 

Freight bills are cut in two. 

Erection charges are cut in two. 

Bases can be set when the concrete foundation is 
built. This saves a great deal of time and the base serves 
as a covering and protection to the fresh concrete. 


Union Metal Standards are shock and _ vibration 
absorbers. If hit a hard traffic blow which would com- 


pletely shatter cast iron or concrete, their resiliency saves 
the standard, lamps and glassware. 

The guarantee offers to replace the shaft at slight 
expense. 

The other savings of cost in lamps, glassware, stand- 
ards, freight, labor, and the defence of lawsuits, are quite 
obvious. 


Scientific Construction 


The leadership of The Union Metal Manufacturing 
Company in the production of ornamental street lighting 
standards can be attributed largely to the scientific 
manner in which their standards are made. 


10 


Poke DIN Gel AVN DER HAW e Soe C1 O2viel aie Ney 


An ornamental street lighting standard is made up of 
three elements: Base, shaft, and capital or head. In all 
standards other than Union Metal the base and shaft, 
that is, the bulk of the standard, is cast or molded in one 
piece. That necessitates a long, heavy cored casting 
made on its side, which frequently gives a non-uniformity 
of metal and always produces unsightly vertical seams 
extending from the base to top of standard. 

Union Metal Standards are always made with base, 
shaft and capital or head as separate units. The bases 
and capitals are made of the best grade of tough gray 
foundry pig iron (scrap iron never used). 

They are noted for relief work and sharp ornamental 
detail. 

Vertical seams are eliminated. Neither are there any 
sand or blow holes, scales, lumps, blisters, flaws, or other 
imperfections. 


Showing Broken Concrete Standard 


Showing Broken Cast Iron Standard 


A Point That Engineers 
Will Appreciate 


The center of gravity in a Union Metal Standard is 
much nearer the ground line than is possible in any other 
make of standard. 


Sectional View of Union Metal Construction 
shown with GE Form 9 Noyalux 


HIGHEST AWARD 


PANAMA-PACIFIC INTERNATIONAL 
EXPOSITION 


The absolute superiority of Union Metal Standards 
has been recognized by the Superior Jury of Awards of 
The Panama-Pacific International Exposition to the 
extent that they were given the Highest Award. 

Ask Pettingell-Andrews Company for a catalog show- 
ing the complete line of The Union Metal Manufacturing 
Company Standards for Ornamental Street Lighting. 


Cri Ne le RPAG eS ob ASt TON 2 GAT A oL OCG 


10 


Standard in Cleveland, Ohio, struck by heavy truck and knocked over; 


at an angle of 45 degrees without falling 


None of the glass panels nor the lamp 
was broken 


12 POR Dei N Geli bee At NeD aR anaes 


CAOEMEDEAyNGY 


Union Metal Standards in com- 
bination with General Electric 
Lighting Units give a lighting sys- 
tem in which each part is de- 
signed by engineers who have 
been pioneers in modern street 
lighting. 


Design No. 874 
with GE Form 8 
Novalux Unit 
as shown 


UNION METAL STANDARDS 


Design No. 1053 
with GE Form 8 
Novalux Units 
F Casing 


Union Metal Lamp Standards, 
with their fluted shafts, add to 
the natural attractiveness of a 
street all day long, and at night 
they flood it with soft, even light 
which signifies a well groomed 
city. 


In their work with over one 
thousand cities the Union Metal 
designing department has devel- 
oped a complete line of lighting 
standards which can be scientific- 
ally designed to meet any light- 
ing conditions. 


Design No. 856 
arranged to receive GE 
Form 8 Novalux Ornamental 
Unit as shown 


Cala Nee Acio es VL rAat EON CA TA E-O'G 13 


FOR ORNAMENTAL STREET LIGHTING 


Anything like ornamental 
street lighting which adds to the 
trafic on a given street must 
therefore add to the value of the 
property on that street. 


Design No. 792 
with GE Form 9 
Novalux Unit 
as shown 


Design No. 1082 
with GE Form 13 Novalux Unit 
J Casing 


An ornamental lighting system 
plays an important part in the 
popular movement for more 
beautiful cities. 


The use of Union Metal Lamp 
Standards will beautify all streets 
—residential as well as business. 


Lighting increases the value 
of residential streets by making 
them more desirable to live on. 

A well dressed street com- 
mands attention and respect. 


Design No. 877 
with GE Novalux or 
Luminous Arc 


14 PAR Teale NG Ga ele la) AGN Re Hav es 


COMPANY 


Merchants on a well lighted 
street derive a direct tangible 
profit from the increased number 
of people passing their windows, 
besides the great intangible value 
of the good will it creates. 


Design No. 1537 
with GE Form 12 
Noyvalux Unit 


UNION METAL STANDARDS 


Design No. 608 
Trolley Pole Casing used in ’conjunction 
with No. 607 


Compare the Looks of This with the 
Ordinary Trolley Pole 


Well lighted streets are natu- 
rally kept cleaner as a matter of 
course and will be less littered up 
and abused because people are 
proud of a good lighting system. 


An ornamental lighting instal- 
lation reflects credit upon the 
city, pleases the people, increases 
business, and begets a desire to 
improve the condition of the en- 
tire city. 


Design No. 842 
The “Euclid” 


Cele Ne en AG eS heat ILOON | © ACTIA L,O7G 15 
a er 


FOR ORNAMENTAL STREET LIGHTING 


City streets have become’ safe 
just in proportion to the extent 
that they have been well lighted. 
They are not only safer from 
traffic accidents but there is a 
great decrease in crime. 


Design No. 684 
Flower Bowl Standard 
with GE Form 9 
Novalux Unit 


Design No. 868 
Arranged to receive 3 GE Luminous Arcs 


May also be used as a 2-Light Unit 
The Largest and Handsomest Standard 
Ever Manufactured 


Ornamental street lighting is 
no longer a luxury, but a neces- 
sity, as a review of its various 
advantages will prove. 


Improvement by ornamental 
street lighting is within the reach 
of the*small town as well as the 
large city. 


Design No. 557 
Drinking Fountain Standard 
Design No. 827 
Base and Bowl Only 


° 


16 


Po Ee TeNS Ga AN DOR EH OWeS 2 aC Oe Be Ne 


NOVALUX UNITS 


FOR 


ORNAMENTAL 


STREET LIGHTING 


HE era of street lighting for strictly utilitarian 
purposes has passed. Street lighting, as a pro- 
tective measure, for mere “path-finding,” is 
no longer sufficient. Nowadays, the importance 

of the ornamental appearance of the installation is fully 
realized, as well as the possibilities for beautifying the 
streets and buildings. 

The first ornamental fixtures consisted of five low 
-andlepower incandescent lamps, each in a diffusing ball 
globe, mounted on ornamental standards ten to twelve 
feet high. With the advent of the Type C lamp, however, 
incandescent lamps of greater candlepower became avail- 
able, and large single light standards are supplanting 
the cluster lights. 


Summary of Advantages 


GE Novalux single light rather than cluster units are 
recommended for business districts because— 
1. They are better looking, more graceful and lend 
themselves to more artistic treatment. 
2. They save 10% in wattage, yield 20% more initial 
v /O tes) e ( 
candlepower and save a further 20% in the distri- 
bution of light. 
3. They light building fronts to a 50% higher intensity. 
4. The initial cost of globes, wiring and standardsislower. 
The maintenance saves 10% in wattage, 50% in 
labor and 25% in lamp renewal costs. 


Or 


6. They are adaptable to all conditions of light dis- 
tribution. 


FORM 8 


The Form 8 unit has been designed particularly for the 
straight series or multiple Mazda C lamps and for the high 
current series lamps operated from Type IL transformers. 

As this unit was not designed to contain an auto transformer, 
it has been possible to make it very small and compact. The 
casing is designed to be attached to the top of an ornamental 
pole having 4 in. top diameter. 


Construction of Form 8 


A special porcelain socket has been designed of such size and 
shape that it rests on two lugs on the inside of the casing and 
forms the support for the receptacle and the lamp. The con- 


struction of this unit has, therefore, been reduced to the simplest 
possible form consisting as it does of only the casing, sockets, 
receptacle, lamp, globe and top ornament. 

The globe seat is embodied in the cas- 
ing, the globe being held by three screws. 
The casing used on the Form 8 unit has 
a simple, ornate design which will har- 
monize with practically any style of pole. 
It is furnished in two types, having the 
same external appearance and differing 
only in the method of attachment to the 
pole top. The “F” 
top of the ornamental pole and is bolted 
in place. The ‘K” casing slips over the 


-asing rests upon the 


shaft and is fastened by set screws. 


Straight Series Type 
Cross-Section 
Showing Interior 


No. 39 Diffusing Globe 
with Metal Canopy 


Recommended for White Way lighting in small 
and villages or for supplementary ornamental lighting in large 
cities using the 400 or 600 c-p series or 200 and 300 watt multiple 
GE Edison lamps. 

The diffusing globes are of such density that the light is 
properly diffused and no glare results from the intrinsic brilliancy 
of the filament. 


towns 


They permit enough light to be directed 
upward to illuminate properly the build- 
ing facades. This gives an attractive day- 
time appearance to a street; a marked 
contrast to the old method of simply 
illuminating the streets and sidewalks 
and allowing the upper stories to re- 
main in semi-darkness with a resultant 
tunnel-like aspect. 

Inside of and at the top of the globe 
a reflector is placed, the function of 
which is to direct downward and make 
useful the rays of light which would 
otherwise be lost in the bottom of the 
ventilator. 

In this type the canopy or top orna- 
ment is made of aluminum, with a venti- 
lating screen between the bottom of the 
canopy and the top of the diffusing globe. Fig. 17 


CAL ONmit Amie sedeeAcds | OpNy 1 CcAy TAL Ts O7G 1 


<i 


No. 39 Diffusing Globe 
with Glass Canopy 


This combination differs only in 
that it has a glass canopy instead 
of a metal canopy. 

The glass canopy is an exclusive 
Novalux feature which adds greatly 
to the beauty of the units at night. 
The canopy and globe are both filled 
with light and the appearance is 
very pleasing. 


Fig. 17 
Form 8 Unit with 
Glass Canopy 


No. 109 Clear Rippled Globe 
and Dome Refractor 


This unit 
boulevards, parkways and beautiful residential districts. 


is recommended for ornamental lighting in 
Here 
the conditions are somewhat different than in the business 
districts. All upward light is either wasted or is a source of 
annoyance to residents along the street. 

The dome refractor eliminates all upward light. 

The rippled glass assists in the diffusion and gives a live 
sparkling effect. 

The ball globe has been used very extensively for such work 
but the combination of dome refractor and rippled globe gives 
100% more light on the street surface than the ball globe. 
Assuming a satisfactory intensity of light, only one-half the 
number of units is required. 

Rippled glass has minute _pro- 
tuberances and _ depressions on 
its outer surface and diffuses the 
light by breaking it up. It effect- 
ually prevents glare and has a very 
low absorption. It is more efficient 
than any other type of diffusing 
glassware. 

The appearance of such a unit is 
entirely different than the ordinary 
diffusing globe. The entire globe 
sparkles with light and there is a 
suggestion of life and animation 
which is entirely lacking in other 
diffusing globes. 


Fig. 20 
Form 8 Unit with Three-Section 
Globe (No. 95) and Dome 
Refractor 


FORM 9 


No. 37 
Diffusing Globe and 
Metal Canopy 


Recommended for White 
Way lighting using GE Edison 
Mazda series lamps of 600 and 
1000 c-p or 400 and 500 watt 
multiple. This unit is almost 
exactly similar to the Form 8, 
but somewhat larger. 


Fig. 18 


No. 37 Diffusing Globe 
and Glass Canopy 


This combination differs from 
the above only in that it has a glass 
canopy instead of a metal canopy. 

It is also recommended for 
White Way lighting. 


Ask Pettingell-Andrews Com- 
pany for a Catalog showing the 


complete line of NOVALUX Units. 


Fig. 18 
Form 9 Unit with 
Glass Canopy 


For the best lighting effects with 


these units use 


Edison Mazda 


Lamps 


18 


Poa ie NeGr ial eAGNED Ro Ba Wwes 


CLOIMSP CAGNRY. 


No. 109 


Clear Rippled Globe and 
Dome Refractor 


This unit may be used for im- 
portant boulevard or for secondary 
business streets where upward light 
is not required, but where an orna- 
mental unit is preferred. It is larger 
than the Form 8 and should be used 
with 600 or 1000 c-p lamps. The 
dome refractor eliminates all upward 
light. The rippled glass assists in the 
diffusion and gives a live sparkling 
effect. 


Fig. 22 
Porm 9 Unit with Three-Section Globe 
(No. 96) and Dome Refractor 


Eight Panel Diffusing Globe 


This unit is recommended for 
the largest GE Edison Mazda lamps 
750 and 1000 watt multiple or 1000 
or 1500 c-p for White Way lighting 
in large cities. The distribution of 
light provides an equal amount of 
illumination for building fronts and 
for the street surface. 

The globe frame and top orna- 
ment are of cast iron. The diffusing 
glass panels seat against felt pads 
attached to the ribs of the globe 
frame and are held in place by spring 
clips. A reflector is suspended above 
the lamp to prevent loss of light in 
the top ornament. 


Eight Panel 
Stippled Globe and 


Dome Refractor 


This unit is recommended for the 
largest Mazda lamps, 1000 or 1500 
e-p for White Way lighting in dis- 
tricts where it is desired to have an 
intense flood of light upon the streets 
and where the lighting of the build- 
ing fronts is of secondary import- 
ance. The unit is very impressive in 
appearance and is without question 
the highest grade ornamental unit in 
use. 


Ask Pettingell-Andrews Company 
for a catalog showing the complete 


line of NOVALUX Units. 


Fig. 13 
Form 9 Panel Diffusing Globe 
Showing Upper Reflector 


Fig. 14 
Form 9 Panel Stippled Globe 
Showing Dome Refractor with 
Upper and Lower Reflectors 


FORM 12 


The Form 12 unit is the very latest idea in decorative street 
lighting. 


Construction of Form 12 


The same internal parts are used in the Form 12 units as in 
the Forms 8 and 9. 

The casing has been designed for a slender pole having a 
5 in. top diameter. The lines and 
ornamentation graceful and 
artistic. 

The contour of the globes is the 
result of studious effort on the part 
of our designing engineers, to pro- 
duce a unit which would combine 
beauty with efficiency. 

The graceful lines produce a pleas- 
ing effect and the type of glass used 
gives as low absorption as is con- 
sistent with perfect diffusion. The 
upper part of the globe is a separate 
glass canopy in response to the un- 
questioned demand for an all glass 
unit. 


are 


The 97 globe has the same gen- 
eral lines as the eight panel unit and 
provides a unit which is slightly less 
decorative than the other Form 12 
types but which will find wide use 
in White Way lighting. 


Form 12 Novalux Unit with 
Form M Casing, No. 104 Globe and 
Glass Canopy No. 1104 


FORM 13 


The Form 13 unit carries the same graceful lines as the Form 
12. It is particularly adapted to White Way lighting in smaller 
towns and villages but it should also find wide application in 
secondary business districts of larger cities. It is recommended 
for use with 400 and 600 c-p series or 300 or 400 watt multiple 
GE Edison Mazda lamps. 


Construction of 
Form 13 


The same internal parts are used 
in the Form 13 unit as in the Form 8. 

The casing is very simple in con- 
struction but exceedingly effective. 
It is designed for an octagonal pole 
but may be used with other shapes. 
The pole should be slender and not 
too ornate with a 4 in. top diameter. 

The 92 globe has very small 
top and bottom openings. Practi- 
cally all the light flux produced is 
projected upon the glass and diffused 
with a minimum of absorption. No 
internal reflector is necessary. Either 


an aluminum or a_ glass canopy is 


aN ailable. Form 13 Novalux Unit with Octagonal 


Form J Cast Casing, No. 92 Globe 
and Metal Canopy 


Calan RaA CE eS 2loA TION = GCA T AVE OG 


19 


NOVALUX 
AND CENTER 


SPAN 


BRACKETS 
FIXTURES 


FOR MAZDA LAMPS 


@© 


Features: 


SAFETY.—AIl brackets and fixtures have been designed 
with a high safety factor so as to put safety first. 

INSULATION.—The main insulator in the fixture is one 
massive porcelain, which has great mechanical strength and 
which will withstand electrical strains of 25,000 volts. Highest 
grade dry process porcelain, uniformly and heavily glazed, 
formed under high pressure and carefully dried and fired insures 
a homogeneous non-porous insulator free from defects. 

BINDING POSTS.—Where provided, binding posts are 
heavy brass castings. Each post has two phosphor-bronze 
screws to prevent loose connections, open circuits or grounds. 

DURABILITY.— Durability depends upon materials and 
workmanship and these factors have been given special 
attention. 


MATERIALS.—Only the highest quality of materials is 
used and this together with 

WORKMANSHIP of a careful and exacting nature insures 
great durability and 

INTERCHANGEABILITY of all like parts in any given 
class of brackets, fixtures or their accessories. 

MAINTENANCE.—Breakage 
hence, maintenance is economical. 

BUG PROOF.—There is no diminution of light due to a 
collection of insects. 

APPEARANCE.—The simple lines with just sufficient 
ornamentation produce a most attractive appearance. 

SELECTION.—The variety of designs makes it possible 


to select a style which will harmonize with both thoroughfare 


is practically negligible; 


and surroundings. 


Selection of Reflectors or Refractors 


(The values given in table are for average mounting of 15 to 20 feet.) 


SERIES 


SERIES MULTIPLE 


MULTIPLE 
Shape of Recom- LAMPS LAMPS 
Bracket or Fixture Distribution mended \|— 
Equipped with Curve Spacing Nominal | Rated 
in Ft. C-p. | Watts 
50-200 40 40 
60 60 
80 
100 
Cat. No. 46219 es 
20-in. radial wave A~Series Lamp 
reflector B—Mulliple Lamp | 
75-200 40 100 
60 150 
80 200 
100 
250 
400 
Cat. No. 174270 is 
20-in. dome radial A—Series Lamp 
wave reflector B—Multiple Lamp 


Dimensions of Brackets 


—Light Center. to Pole ——————+ 


APPROX. DIMEN. 


IN IN. 
Brackets Light For 
Center Overall Illustration see 
to Pole Height Page 20 
Bisho pis Oro ke erate armies. ox 205% 31% i Leas tl 
DoubleiBend tet meme hire o reece os 4934 | 35% 2712 
Right Angle Bend. ..............., 48 247% eels 
| 
Right; Angle Jot (lone)e... a.¢ 4000s we os 48 25% 4,14 
Right Angle Joint (Short).............. 20 164% Dy 15) 
GOOSEUN GOK: iran ye ctiasiemcbe dere terete ie as ce usu. 5 48 19 54 6, 16 
Plain Goose Neck with Petticoat Insulator 48 28 asltf 
Telescoping . Rortcusins bya acter gene ce GaN oe 8, 18 


Shape of Recom- LAMPS LAMPS 
Bracket or Fixture Distribution mended — 
Equipped with Curve | Spacing Nominal Rated 
| in Ft. C-p. Watts 
—— ———— ——-— — —_ — - = =|| — 
| 
50-200 40 100 
60 
| 80 
100 
Cat. No. 174273 
6%-in. Holophane a Lae 
prismatic band refrac-| A-Series Lamp 
tor with holder | B—Multiple Lamp 
| SST 
LTT 
Se 
2 100-300 250 300 
Y din 400 400 
Ned 500 
ease | 
Cat. No. 174276 | 
8'4-in. Holophane A—Series Lamp | 
prismatic band refrac- 


tor with holder 


Dimensions of Fixtures 


B—Multiple Lamp 


A pprox. | 
Overall 


For 


Fixtures Height | iluetranon see 
in In. IS 
SERIES 
Bye Suspension with Cross Arm Insulator Hanger..... 14% 21 
Strain Insulator Center Span Suspension ............-. Six 22 
GSEOSEPAT IO RSUSD CNS ION wien teeter asta en reas eee eke Siig 23 
Cross Arm Suspension with Petticoat Insulator......... 131% 24 
Hy eiSuspension(saw ane cameo sens aon noses s/o, are Sea bo 25 
MULTIPLE 
Eye Suspension with Cross Arm Insulator Hanger. . eee 16 28 
CrossvATrmrSUSpPeNBlON ar career eae ha hese, ors ed 7% 29 
Cross Arm Suspension with Petticoat Insulator.......... 131% 30 
Eye Suspensions, sooner ee ae | 7% 31 


20 PET? TEN GB EL AUN TD, RUBRW SiC 20g ieee Ney) 


NOVALUX SERIES BRACKETS NOVALUX MULTIPLE BRACKETS 


vy 


Fig. 11 : 
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Bishop's Crook Fig. 12 
Bishop's Crook - Double Bend 11/4-In. Pipe Bracket ie Double Bend 
11/4-In. Pipe Bracket 1 1/4-In. Pipe Bracket Concealed Wiring p 1 1/4-In. Pipe Bracket 
External or Concealed Wiring External or Concealed Wiring Concealed Wiring 


Fig. 13 


Right Angle Bend 
Fig. 4 41/4-In. Pipe Bracket a Fig. 14 
3 : < Concealed Wiring ; F 
Right Angle Joum Right Angle Joint 
y Fig. 3 11/4-In. Pipe Bracket 3 1 1/4-In. Pipe Bracket 
Right Angle Bend 48-In. Extension 48-In. Extension 
11/4-In. Pipe Bracket External or Concealed Wiring > Concealed Wiring 


External or Concealed Wiring 


Fig. 15 

Right Angle Joint 
1 1/4-1n. Pipe Bracket 

Fic. 6 20-In. Extension 
Kig. 5 a BBS hs Concealed Wiring. Fig. 16 

; 300se Neck c ae 

Right Angle Joint 3/4-In. Pipe Bracket s/eue Bie ee k 
11/4-In. Pipe Bracket External Wiring Concealed Wi icket 
OLIN lextension g oncealed Wiring 
}external or Concealed Wiring ‘ 


Fig. 17 
Plain Goose Neck 
3/4-In. Pipe Bracket 

Re with Petticoat Insulator sess i . 

Fig. 7 Fig. 8 : External Wiring Fig. 18 
Plain Goose Neck Telescoping ‘ Telescoping 

3/4-In.. Pipe Bracket 3/4-and 1 1/4-In. Pipe Bracket 3/4-and 1 1/4-In. Pipe Bracket 
with Petticoat Insulator 4-1o 7-Ft. Extension : 4- to 7-Ft. Extension 

External Wiring External Wiring ; : External Wiring 


FOR Approx. FOR Approx. 
SERIES | Ship. Wt. MULTIPLE | Ship. Wt. 
Equipped With | LAMPS Fig. No. | Cat. No. | in Lb. Equipped With | LAMPS Fig. No. Cat. No. | in Lb. 
—— —| | per 20 —— = | | _per 20 
| C-P. | Brackets | Watts Brackets 
1 114979 795 ( ) | 11 161339 625 
| Q 103156 885 1 || 12 152822 800 
| 3 105691 815 13 161350 730 
40 | 
60 | 4 103157 855 4 40 14 161356 730 
80 | 5 111556 655 60 | 15 161362 530 
100 | | | | 
20-in. radial wave re- | | 6 | 114768 530 20-in, radial wave re-| | | 16 |, 152833 440 
Rector sacs Dares im Ui | 46213 565 flector ............-. | 17 | 125323 565 
| | Js 174311 935 18 | 174368 800 
1 | 174280 785 1 174337 615 
| | Q 174284 875 12 174341 785 
40 | 3 174288 805 13 174345 720 
60 | 
80} 4 174292 845 100 14 174349 720 
(| OCI 5 | 174300 645 | 4 1500s 15 174357 520 
| 250 | 200 | 
20-in. dome radial wave, | 400 6 | 174304 | 530 20-in. dome radial wave) 16 | 174365 430 
eoector aoe ee | 7 | 174308 | 555 refiector,.....-...... | 17 174361 555 
jet 8 | 174313 925 18 174370 | 790 
) 1 174281 770 | ul | 174338 | 595 
2 174285 860 12 174342 765 
| 3 174289 795 ; | 13 174346 695 
40 | | 
60 } 4 | 174293 830 PeetOOm 2 14 | 174350 700 
| 80 5 174301 «630 | | 15 || 174358 500 
| 100 | | | | | 
6%-in. Holophane pris-| | 6 | 174305 490 YG 5 sgt 16 | 174366 420 
matic band refractor 7 | 174309 545 Janta: Fed en eer 17 174362 545 
WANTON? sreseook: l a 8 174314 915 with holder ..,...... | 18 174371 720 
1 174282 845 ) 11 174239 695 
2 174286 935 12 174343 865 
$ 174290 870 13 174347 795 
Ne 25 Oma) 4 | 174294 | 905 | 300 14 174351 800 
hep 400. 1 5 || 174302 | 695 | 4 400 + | 15 174359 600 
500 | | | | 
84-in. Holophane cl | 2 174500 | a) 8!4-in. Holophane pris | ay | al | on 
Be Aor hannairetraCeGn | i 174310 | 645 TN ra 7 | 174363 645 
with holder «+... 8 174315 4980 Bi ler occa ee Leg tue 18 © ie 74377 ae 
Standard finish, black japan; galvanized iron finish can be furnished at an Standard finish, black japan; galvanized iron finish can be furnished at an 


increased price. increased price. 


NOVALUX SERIES FIXTURES 


Fig. 21 
Eye Suspension 
with Cross Ann 
Insulator Hanger 


Fig. 23 
Cross Arm Suspension 


” Pig. 25 
Eye Suspension 


3 Fig. 26 
Cross Arm Suspension 
with Petticoat Insulator 
Copper Hocd 
and Parabolic Deflector 


Fig. 22 
Strain Insulator 
Suspension 


Fig 24 
Cross Arm Suspension" 
with Petticoat 
Insulator 


. 


Fig. 27 
Cross Arm Suspension 
with Petticoat Insulator 
Galvanized Iron Hood 
and Parabolic Deflector 


NOVALUX 
ee 


4 


Cross Arm Suspension 


ee 


Fig. 32 
Cross Arm Suspension 
with Petticoat Insulator 
Copper Hood and 
Parabolic Deflector 


MULTIPLE FIXTURES 


Strain Insulator 
Suspension 
Multiple Fixture 
is not Made 


Ey 


Fig. 30 
Cross Arm Suspension 
with Petticoat 
* Insulator 


Fig. 31 
Eye Suspension 


Fig. 33 
Cross Arm Suspension 
with Petticoat Insulator 
Galvamzed Iron Hood 
and Parabolic Deflector 


FOR Approx. FOR Approx. _ 
SERIES Ship. Wt. MULTIPLE Ship Wt. 
Equipped With LAMPS Fig. No. Cat. No. in Lb. Equipped With LAMPS Fig. No. Cat. No. in Lb. 
a eS per 20 eS = per 20 
| C-P Fixtures Watts | Fixtures 
| | | 
ws) Z ein BY 28 *161383 560 
sel ag reopee rie ; 40 29 161389 440 
ee 23 Wg ee a | 60 30 125324 465 
100 24 49055 465 3] 161395 413 
20-in. radial wave re-| | 25 103159 400 20-in. radial wave re-| — ; 
flector ........... oe Hlectotaer ee ens | i} 
| 3A : iG y: al i aa \- m 
40) 21 *174317 500 ( | 
| 60 22 174321 415 | 100 | 28 *174374 550 
80 23 174325 420 150 29 174386 43( 
100 24 174329 455 200 30 174382 405: 
250 | Q5 174333 390 | 31 174378 405 
20-in. dome radial wave 400 || 20-in. dome radial wave} | J 
Me tlec ton enemas cyan: | | reflector apna) 
. | =| = ee pee = 
40 Q)1 *1743138 485 ( Bo *1743 3953 
60 QQ 174322 400 | 28 174375 535 
) 80 23 174326 405 100 } 29 174387 395 
1 100 | | 24 174330 440 | | 30 174383 420 
J | Q5 174334 375 Heal } aI 174379 390 
6%-in. Holophane pris-| ° | | 6!4-in, Holophane pris-| | 
matic band refractor) matic band refractor 
with holder......... with holder ........ 
eee 21 “174319 540 ( 300 ) 28 *174376 635 
} 250 | 22 174323 500 400 | | 29 174388 515 
ea 23 174327 485 ieersoomall 30 174384 540 
| | #4 174331 520 31 174380 490 
) 25 174335 475 


8%-in. Holophane pris- 
matic band refractor 
with holder 


* For omission of hanger, a reduction in price is made. 
Standard finish, black japan; galvanized iron finish can be furnished at an 


ncreased price. 


8%-in. Holophane pris- 
matic band refractor 
with holder (3.0... 


* For omission of hanger, a reduction in price is made. 


Standard finish, black japan; 
increased price. 


galvanized iron finish can be furnished at an 


22 


PoE eis NGG Ha APN DARA VyeS 


CZOUMERZAGNS 


Reflectors and Refractors 


CAT. NO. 46219—20-IN. 
RADIAL WAVE REFLECTOR 
For 40, 60, 80 and 100 e-p. Series 
and 40 and 60 Watt Multiple Lamps 

Ship. Wt. per 20—131 Lb. 


CAT. NO. 174270—20-IN. DOME 
RADIAL WAVE REFLECTOR 
For 40, 60, 80, 100, 250 and 
400 c-p. Series and 100, 150 and 200 
Watt Multiple Lamps 
Ship. Wt. per 20—145 Lb. 


Open Closed 


CAT. NO. 174273—614-IN. HOLOPHANE PRISMATIC BAND REFRACTOR WITH 
i NOPY AND HOLDER. For 40, 60, 80 and 100 e-p. Series and 100 Watt Multiple 
Lamps. 
Ship. Wt. per 10—65 Lb. 
Consists of: 
Cat. No. 174272 Holder and Cat. No. 174271 Refractor. 


Closed 
CAT. NO. 174276—8%-IN. HOLOPHANE PRISMATIC BAND REFRACTOR WITH 


Open 


CANOPY AND HOLDER. For 250 and 400 c-p. Series and 300, 400 and 500 Watt 


Multiple Lamps. 
Ship. Wt. per 10—80 Lb. 


Consists of: 
Cat. No. 174275 Holder and Cat. No. 174274 Refractor. 


RADIAL WAVE REFLECTOR (Cat. No. 46219) 
FINISH.—Heavily enameled on upper and lower surfaces 
with highly-glazed reflecting surface. 


DISTRIBUTION.—The waves serve to make the reflected 
light of uniform intensity on all sides of the lamp. The reflector 
gives a fair amount of light at the higher angles with more light 
toward the vertical. 


DOME RADIAL WAVE REFLECTOR (Cat. No. 174270) 
FINISH.—Same as for the Radial Wave Reflector. 
DISTRIBUTION.—The waves equalize the light on all 

sides of the lamp but the maximum light is reflected at a 

10-degree angle and thus promotes uniform intensities from 

lamp to lamp. 

CONSTRUCTION.—A large handhole enables the removal 
of both socket and lamp as a unit. The dome not only adds 
to appearance, byt serves to reflect the upward rays so that 
the only light lost is that cut off by the base of the lamp. The 
reflector has a rolled edge which prevents the splitting of the 
enamel or the rusting of the reflector. 

BAND REFRACTOR (Cat. Nos. 174273 and 174276) 
FINISH.—Clear glass, smooth on outer and inner surfaces. 
DISTRIBUTION.—The refracting prisms thoroughly 

diffuse the light and direct both upward and downward light 

to the 10-degree angle. The direct downward light is unob- 
structed and this affords ample illumination beneath the lamp. 

The refractor makes a beautiful appearance. 


CONSTRUCTION.—The refractor consists of two clear 
glass bands one of which fits snugly within the other in which 
position the joints are sealed. The outer surface of the inner 
band has horizontal prisms which direct the light to an angle 
of 10 degrees below the horizontal. The inner surface of the 
outer band has vertical prisms which spread the light trans- 
versely. Liberal hand room in the dome interior enables the 
removal of lamp and socket as a unit. By releasing the auto- 
matic spring latch, the refractor holder, which is hinged to the 
spun dome, can be lowered. Cleaning is thus facilitated. 
The small size and the shape of the canopy prevent the collection 
of snow and ice upon it and also make it a smaller mark for 
malicious breakage. 


Sockets and Receptacles 


& 3 / 
X o 


4 i 


Fig. 36 


Vig. 40 


Fig. 41 
eC Ship. 
ae Fig. No. | Descriptive Pe 
| per 100 
25708 ase | Porcelain series, socket and receptacle, complete, 
including iron yoke, Cat. No. 25714, for use with 
Mogul screw base lampS. ........-+.0-2 nesses 200 
25711 35 Porcelain series socket only, for Mogul screw base 
| lampsiis vents cree e gestae ie oceans ees 112 
177143 B6 | Porcelain receptacle with clips. .....-.......5555 100 
25720 37 Porcelain series socket only, for medium screw 
basedamps ) i, co.cc ibeeen oe Sete ne 46 
4156722 38 Skeleton multiple socket for Mogul screw base 
Chavet Ae gO A hr Sno nonin oo Soa 52 
129804 39 Porcelain multiple socket, for Mogul screw base 
PAIS fos Sielecg bonne oe oe OL aa am ee er eaesiae etn 112 
129803 40 Porcelain multiple socket, for medium serew base 
| JampS iio. 4 soln toes clerk iar mee grapatesetasiecipinaaln 112 
#159377 41 Porcelain multiple socket with 14-in. pipe tap, for 
Mogul screw base lamps with plunger spring 
CEenterzCOMvach i nam erent eeta Manlio anoReaan n= La 330 
+GEH427 42 - Porcelain multiple socket with yoke for 14-in. pipe, 
for medium screw base lamps.............-005 80 
25712 43 Porcelain receptacle with clip and iron yoke. This 
is Cat. No. 25708 less Cat. No. 25711.......... 103 
25713 Porcelain receptacle with clips only............-. 54 
25714 Iron yoke (7%-in.—18 thread) with two screws 
Cat. No. 10252. Used in Cat. No. 25712...... 50 
146627 44 Keyless receptacle... ....- ++. esse ese renee esas 30 
65951 he Aluminum disk film cutout. Tested for 110 volts; 
probable limit of breakdown 250 to 450 volts. ... ly 
§147969 Lead disk film cutout. Tested for 70 volts; prob- 
| able limit of breakdown, 70 to 250 volts........ Vy 


* Class B—Standard package 50. 

+ Class B—Standard package 100. 

{ Class B—Standard package 250. 

§ Designed for use with lamps operated from SL transformers. 


Nory.—With each shipment of 12 or less of the above series sockets, a package of 15 
disk film cutouts, Cat. No. 65951, is included. 


Gel NGI RYA E 


Selb eOONR Cea DOA VEO LG. 


23 


COMPRESSION CHAMBER 


MULTIGAP LIGHTNING ARRESTERS 
) 


OUTDOOR SERVICE—UP TO 15,000 VOLTS 


Every time light- 
ning damagesatrans- 
former or causes its 
fuses to blow, there- 
by interrupting ser- 
vice, there is being 
created that most de- 
structive of feelings, 
— ill-will — which 
eventually strikes 
your bank account. 

Nothing is more 
unprofitable than a 
dissatisfied public, 
and nothing more 
disturbing than con- 
stant complaints be- 
cause of poorservice. 

GE transformers 
provide transformer 
strength: GE lightning arresters furnish lightning protection. 

Fuse blowing can be greatly reduced and injury to trans- 
formers practically eliminated by installing efficient light- 
ning arresters on each transformer pole. The farther 
away the arrester is from the transformer the greater will 
be the potential strain on the transformer during lightning 
disturbances. With the lightning arrester located one 
pole away, the potential strain on the transformer under 


5 adAL 


IN34YN) ONILWNAA Ly 


OWHOs 


ONTINUITY of service is largely dependent upon strong 
mechanical and electrical transformer construction and 


adequate lightning protection. 


some conditions is double what it would be with the arrester 
installed on the same pole. 

Installation of arresters and transformers, at the same 
time on the same pole, results in economy in installation and 
maintenance. 
Features 

Efficuent—Because the multigap principle of light- 
ning arrester design is carried out to the highest scientific 
degree. Proved to be efficient by the experience of some 
of the largest operating companies. 

Light—Because the arrester has no wooden case, which 
not only requires entrance bushings but also has to be 
made larger than is required for the support of the ele- 
ments and their protection against the weather, on ac- 
count of the necessity of allowing proper clearance. 

Compact—Because the elements are tightly enclosed 
in porcelain, the amount and quality of which are care- 
fully judged so that no material is used in excess of that 
consistent with good operation. 

Weatherproof—Because the porcelain is impervious 
to water and the joints are sealed in such a way that water 
can by no possibility enter the arrester. 

Fireproof—Because nothing combustible is used in its 
construction. 

Require No Inspection after Installation—Because the 
arresters are weatherproof and _ fireproof, inspection is 
unnecessary. As long as the arrester is intact it is in 
operating condition. 


24 


P BOERNE Gate lL AGN DREW eo eC Os vie eAg Ney 


TYPE IL SERIES 


TRANSFORMERS 


FOR STREET LIGHTING SERVICE 


HE high efficiency of the 15- and 20-amp. 
Mazda series lamps has made them very 
popular for street illumination. Individual 
auto-transformers have been commonly em- 


ployed to operate them from standard 6.6- or 7.5-amp. 


constant current series circuits. Recently, 
however, due to a number of inherent ad- 
vantages, there has been a considerable 
demand for a small series transformer to 
operate a single lamp by stepping up the 
line current to the higher current required 
by the lamp. 

These transformers are divided into two 
general types, one being insulated for operation 
on secondary circuits up to a maximum of 
5500 volts and the other up to a maximum of 
10,500 volts. The high-voltage (10,500 volts) 
type has the casing filled with compound. The 
low-voltage (5500 volts) type is not filled with compound 
unless specially requested. 

The compound is an additional protection against moisture 
reaching the windings, and the transformers having this feature 
should be recommended when installed where excessive moisture 
conditions exist. When transformers that are not compound 
filled are used in places where moisture conditions are severe, 
extreme care should be taken in wiping the joints in order to 
insure a watertight joint between cable and transformer. To 
eliminate the necessity for wiped joints, we can furnish detach- 
able couplings for the primary leads. 

The subway type transformers are used for Mazda orna- 
mental street lighting. The subway type transformersare generally 
mounted in the base of ornamental posts, in a 
manhole or subway, or in any manner that local 
conditions may require. In fact, when con- 
venience demands, the insulation is so perfect 
and the construction so watertight and damp- 
proof that they may actually be buried in the 
ground. When this is done, however, it is 
recommended that they be embedded in tar. 
Figs. 6, 7, 8 and 9 show a few of the various 
methods of mounting. 

They are built in capacities that take care 
of the 400, 600 and 1000 c-p. series Mazda 
lamps. The standard primary windings are 
for 6.6 or 7.5 amperes, and the standard 
secondary winding is for 15 amperes ( 400 c-p.) 
or 20 amperes (600 and 1000 c-p.). Special 
primary windings for any commercial circuits 
can, however, be supplied. 


Construction 


These transformers are entirely enclosed 
in a steel casing and are absolutely waterproof. 


Fig. 1 
Subway Type 


All leads on the subway type transformers are brought out 
through galvanized iron wiping sleeves so that the lead sheath 
of the underground cable can be readily wiped on. For aerial 
use, the leads are brought out through porcelain bushings. 
Each primary lead is brought out separately and a space 
of approximately 21% inches is left between 
This makes the 


most convenient arrangement for connecting 


the primary wiping sleeves. 


on primary leads, where, in the majority of 
cases, a single conductor cable is employed. 

While the standard arrangement of leads 
is to have the two primary leads brought out 
at one end of the transformer and the second- 
ary leads at the other end, the internal arrange- 
ment is such that transformers can readily be 
built to meet any special requirement in the 
bringing out of leads. It is possible to furnish 
these transformers with the primary leads 
brought out at the two ends of the transformer and the second- 
ary leads brought out at whichever end is most convenient. 
This makes a very convenient arrangement when it is desired 
to place the transformer in the ground near the base of the pole, 
as has been suggested. The casing for these transformers is 
made of steel and has a black weatherproof finish. 

To eliminate the necessity for wiped joints we can furnish 
transformers equipped with detachable couplings for the pri- 


mary leads. To attach these couplings it is necessary only 


Fig. 4 
Detachable Couplings 


Fig. 3 
Wiped Joints 
Type IL Series Transformers—Subway Type 
to peel back the lead sheath and solder the bushing to the sheath. 
The resultant joint is easily made and is watertight. 
Electrically, these transformers are designed to meet the 
most exacting requirements of this class of service and they 


Cara Nel ROA eS hASE LON? CA TA L O°G 


will run continuously with the secondary open-circuited, thereby 
avoiding any possibility of trouble in case a lamp is broken 
or burns out. 


Regulation 
When lamp wattage varies between 8 per cent above and 
20 per cent below normal, secondary current will not vary more 
than 1.0 per cent with normal primary current and frequency. 


Protection 


Primary current can go 75 per cent above normal without 
increasing secondary current over 
45 per cent. 

All transformers 


ompound Filling 
Transformer 
Casing 


Tanstormer Lead 


insulated for 
10,500-volt circuits take an insula- 


an insulation test of 1500 volts from 
secondary windings to metal parts. 
The transformers insulated for 5500- 
volt circuits are given a test of 12,000 


yn 

Z 
Separabely Loch Washer i 
ae, 4 Springcomaitlip tion test of 22,000 volts for one 
ae "Y nsucdtinglinuig minute between primary and _ all 
real : parts. All transformers are given 
Pip g' Lnsubation 8 

/ 

q' 


,_-Lead Sheath 
-LeadWasher 


VA Brass Bushing 
KW Sweated to Sheath 


Re 


= SS 


Conductor 


Fig. 5 ; 
Sectional View of Detachable Coupling 
for Primary Lead 


volts for one minute between pri- 
mary and all parts. These tests are 
in accordance with the latest rulings 


of the A. IL. E. E. 


Methods of Mounting 


SSS SSS sss 


ss 
Ss 


S 


Fig. 7 
Series Transformer Mounted in Pole on Lugs Cast in Base (Side View) 


Advantages 


A few of the advantages of these individual-lamp series 
transformers are as follows: 

High efficiency series lamps can be used where high poten- 
tial is impracticable. 

No film cutout is required since each lamp is independent of 
the others in the circuit. In case of an accident to one or more, 
the remainder of the lamps on the circuit burn without inter- 
ruption. 

They protect the lamps from surges in the line. 

They are a valuable adjunct to “Safety First” in orna- 
mental street lighting, because they insulate the pole and lamp 
from the high tension series circuit and permit the use of high 
efficiency series lamps in business districts where ordinances 
prohibit high tension wires above the street surface. 

For use with pendant units, the transformers can be mounted 
on the cross-arms of the poles. 

They save the expense of high-voltage conductors, heavy 
insulation and high tension cutouts, a saving which materially 
assists in liquidating the difference between the first cost of 
auto-transformers and series transformers, the latter being 
naturally somewhat higher priced. 

Furthermore this low voltage eliminates the ‘75 per cent 
of all line troubles” which occur between the pole and the lamp. 


OP 


iG Da: 
OVO), Wik 
Loe 75 27: 
VIAN 


ZA 


ed jf Os. 


: Fig. 9 
Series Transformer Buried in Ground 


26 Pek WeENsG El GAT Ns D RaW Ss) 2 CaO ave eA Ney 


CONSTANT CURRENT TRANSFORMER 


TYPE RV 


Standard, 60 Cycles, 2300 Volts, Primary; 6.6 or 7.5 Amperes Secondary. 
Can be furnished for any Primary Voltage up to 5000 Volts. 
Any Frequency or any Secondary Current. 
For Primary Voltage over 5000 Volts, Specify Type RJ. 


Ball Bearings 
eliminate friction. 


Removable Sectors facilitate 
shipment. Parts removed when 
transformer is shipped. 


High-grade Flexible Steel Sup- 
porting Cable. 


Primary Connections, with 


Rugged Balancing Levers—For extra tap for light load operation. 


supporting coils and counter 
weights. 


Angle Iron Frame — Reduces 
weight, adds strength. 


Dashpot — Of ample size to 
prevent swinging. 


Special— Extra flexible leads to | 


moving coil—insures smooth op- 
eration. 


Accessible Balance Weights — 
Allow easy adjustment of current. 


Expanded Metal Casings—Per- 
mits inspection and prevents 
accidental contact with live parts. 
Type RV Constant Current Transformer Sa 


Sub-divided Windings—Light 
weight — Low internal voltages— 
Maximum ventilation. 


The Constant Current Transformer is a single piece of apparatus which: 


Insulates load circuit from supply circuit. Requires no skilled labor for operating or adjusting. 


Delivers the correct current to load circuit under a// conditions of supply and load 
without change of adjustment. 


Protects lamps against variations of supply voltage or frequency, and against 


changes of load due to grounds or short circuits. 

| | DIMENSIONS IN INCHES APPROX. WT. IN LB. 

Cat. No. | Kw. | Amps. ee. 
| A B Cc Net Ship. 
197089 5 6.60 th 34 17 23 300 500 
197091 10 6.6 37 20 25 475 650 
A 197093 15 6.6 40 23 28 650 850 
197095 | 20 6.6) > | mm 25 30 800 1000 
197097 25 6.6 18 7 34 1050 1450 
197099 30 6.6 53 28 38 1250 1600 


CEERNE EE ROAS fo LAS ON eC AE A LAO'G 


CONSTANT CURRENT TRANSFORMER 


RYE He) 


Standard, 60 Cycles, 2000/2300 Volts, Primary; 6.6 or 7.5 Amperes, Secondary 


Can be furnished for any Primary Voltage, Frequency or Secondary Current 


no 
~ 


Recess in hand_ hole 
cover fitted with gasket 
to exclude dirt and mois- 


ture. 


- 7 ny 

Hinged Door for Hand 
Hole — gives easy access for 
inspection and adjustment. 


Leads permanently 
fastened to and insulated 
from cover. 


Ball Bearings eliminate 
friction. eae EN 


, Simple, one-piece bal- | 
a 


ncing lever. 


Strong Cast Iron Cover 
Supports Mechanism. 


Adjusting weight is} 
only part not submerged 
in oil. 

—— 
=a 


Heavy Strap Iron Sup- 
ports bolted to cover makes 
possible the removal of 
transformer from tank with- 
out drawing off oil. 


Tempered steel spring }—— 


Rigid Coil Supports ——_ 
of Insulating material. | 


Point Support for mov- 
ing coil. 


Windings light weight 

and compact, sub-divided 

by cooling ducts allowing. | 
| free circulation of oil. 

fc = 5-kw. Type RO Transformer Without Tank 


Core-heavily insulated. } 


Will maintain constant current within 1 per cent. of normal from full load to short circuit. 

An outdoor weatherproof unit, oil cooled, designed for pole mounting, but may also be used in the 
central station or sub-station. 

Requires no attendant or control panel. 

Regulation entirely automatic and instantaneous—no taps or adjustments. 

The first and only outdoor transformer that automatically maintains constant current under all conditions. 


WEIGHTS—TYPE RO TRANSFORMERS 


APPROX. WT. IN LB, EFFICIENCIES 
| 
Cat.No.| Kw. | Amps.| Gals. | Wt. Net | Ship.| Full | % % Me 
Oil Oil EON SO Load | Load | Load | Load 
| 
197065 1 6.6 28 200 275 | 425 91.5 89.5 | 85.0 73.0 
197066 2 6.6 32 230 320 520 93.0 910 87.0 77.0 
197067 3 6.6 32 230 365 560 93.5 91.5 | 88.0 78.5 
197068 by} 6.6 40 290 420, 630 94.0 921 | 89.0 80.0 
197069 7.5 6.6 40 290 450 660 94.5 92.7 90.0 82.0 
197070 10 66 40 290 | 500 | 710 95.0 93.5 91.0 83.5 
219573 15 6.6 75 540 900 | 1300 94.5 93.0 90.0 81.0 
219575 20 6.6 85 610 1100) | 1500 94.6 93.1 90.0 81.0 


5-kw. Type RO Transformer Primary Power Factors: Full load 70, 34 load 51, 4% load 36, and 14 load 20, 20-kw. Type RO Transformer 


28 


POE ip Ne Gee ls NEN Dake beaVeS 


CO sMEPAAON TY 


“TRADE MARK 
REG. U.S. PATENT OFFICE. 


Over 40 Years the Standard for Rubber Insulation 
Manufactured by 


THE OKONITE COMPANY 


One Quality Only — The Best 


KONITE INSULATION contains never less 

than 30% by weight (over 60% by volume) 

of Wild Dry Up-River Fine Para Rubber, 

with no admixture of low-grade rubber, re- 
claimed rubber, or rubber substitutes. 


OKONITE is compounded with nothing but the highest 
grade materials and each step in the process of manu- 
facture is carefully checked so as to be absolutely certain 
that the finished insulated wire will be a uniform and 
perfect product. 

OKONITE compound is calendered to the exact thick- 
ness required and backed with sheet tin. 

The compound with its tin backing is cut into strips 
and folded around the tinned copper wire (sheet tin on 
the outside) and rigidly held in this mould during the 
This not only insures perfect 
centering of the conductor, 
but greatly adds to the density 
of the vulcanized product, in- 
creases the tensile strength, 
prolongs thelife,and greatly im- 
proves the electrical qualities. 


process of vulcanization. 


COPPER 
CONDUCTOR 


INSULATION 


JUTE 
poe Every foot of OKkoNITE 
ERA THING Insulated Wire or Cable is 
tested before the application 
of tapes, braid, or other cov- 
ering and after 48 hours im- 
mersion in water. 


JUTE 
CUSHION 


ae 

Oxonitp® Insulation has 
been made continuously since 

saturaTep /878 in one quality only. And 

JUTE has proven itself in actual ser- 
vice for the past 42 years to 
be the acme of rubber insu- 
lation and the standard by 
which all rubber insulations 
are judged. 


OKONITE 
Parkway Cable 


Oxonrre Insulation is elastic, tough and durable. It 
will withstand greater abuse than any other insulation 
on the market. It never fails to meet unconditionally 
the most searching specifications. 


Use Oxonire for safety. 


OKONITE Insulation has been proven by 42 years of 
service to be long lived. 


Use OKoniTeE for economy. 


How Can I Tell It? 


, . It Means the Best 
All genuine OKkoNITE insulated wires — Look for the Ridge 
bear the trade-mark, a single ridge on the 
rubber insulation (under the braid), run- 


ning parallel to the copper conductor. 


Reg. U.S. Pat. Office 


Oxon!Te Insulated Wires and Cables are made in any 
size from the smallest lamp cord to the largest practicable 
multiple conductor cable, for any 
service and any commercial voltage 
and can be furnished in any of the 
following finishes: 


Weatherproof, flameproof, as- 
bestos or steel wire braid. 

OKOLOOM. 

Lead Covered. 

Steel Tape Armored (Parkway 
Cable). 

Steel Wire Armored (Submarine 
Cable). 


Separately or in combination. 


OKONITE 
Lead Covered Power Cable 


CAtANGIE RA le ou Ae HOON <CoArT Atl, OG 29 
OKONITE SPLICING MATERIALS 
VARNISHED CAMBRIC M 7. 
Insulated Cables The oie ea ee 
ARNISHED Cambric Insulated Cables, when Vener Moor ieee hee 


properly made up of high-class materials, are 
reliable and long lived when installed under 
proper conditions. 

Due to the fact that the insulation is composed of 
cloth, hard-baked varnish, and filler, they are particularly 
well fitted for use in hot and oily places, such as gene- 
rator, transformer and oil switch leads. 
be used for fairly damp locations without a lead sheath, 
but are not as impervious to water as OKONITE insu- 
lated wires and cables. 

The same care is used in the inspection and test of raw 
materials and in the manufacture of Okonrre Varnished 
Cambric that characterizes all OkonirE products. All 
Varnished Cambric Cables are given both voltage and 
insulation resistance tests before shipment, braided cables 
being tested before application of the braid and while 
immersed in water. 

The OxonireE Company is particularly well equipped 
to manufacture both large and small, single and mul- 
tuple conductor varnished cambric power cables for any 
commercial voltage and with the following finishes: 

Weatherproof, flameproof, asbestos or steel wire braid. 

OKOLOOM. 

Lead Covered. 

Steel Tape Armored (Parkway Cable). 

Steel Wire Armored (Submarine Cable). 

Separately or in combination. 


They may safely 


Oxontre Varnished Cambric Submarine Power Cable 


filled cloth tape for protecting 
joints against mechanical injury. 
It is adhesive, does not unwrap 
does not copper 

Easily handled, economi- 
cal to use. Made in black or 


~ THIS - 
BOX CONTAINS 
D “fe INCH 


Bash 


and corrode 


wire. 


white. 

We carry in stock black tape 
only in widths of one-half and three-quarter inch, but are 
prepared to furnish any width desired. 

Put up in tin boxes containing one-half pound of tape 
each—full weight. 


Okonite Tape 


The Standard for Rubber Tape 


OKoNITE TAPE is a rubber in- 
sulating tape for making splices or 
joints. Joints properly made with 
OKxoNnITE TAPE are impervious 
to moisture and are as strong 
as or stronger electrically and 
mechanically than the insulated 
wire itself. Made in black only. 

We carry in stock widths of 
one-half and three-quarter inch 
only, but are prepared to furnish any width desired. 

* Put wp in cartons containing one-half pound of tape 
each—full weight. 


Okonite Cement 


The Standard for Rubber Cement 


OKONITE CEMENT is pure rubber 
in a suitable solvent, and contains 
nothing that corrode copper. 
Only a very small quantity is neces- 
sary In making a splice. 

It is packed in 2-oz., 8-oz., or 
16-0z. cans. 


will 


THE oxoxrre cows’ 
pi il 3 


PA 


Ask Pettingell-Andrews Company for a complete 
OKONITE catalog which contains extensive and extremely 
valuable cable and wire engineering data. 


30 DOE Te TENG Gebel =A NeD eRe RaW GSen eC O aN aia Ase Ney) 


Plant of Phillips Wire Company, Pawtucket, R. I. 


OR over thirty years ‘““O.K.’’ weatherproof wires have been the 

acknowledged standard with the electrical trade, their reputation 

having been earned by a durable insulation, desirable finish, and 
uniform weights. 


Coie NERA le Ael ICOON ss. CiA TA TL OC 31 


INSULATED CONDUCTORS 


“OQ. K.’? Weatherproof—Triple Braid Weatherproof Iron Wire 


Slowburning Wire 


Annunciator Wire Cross Section of 
One Pound Spools Concentric Strand 


Weatherproof Twisted Pairs 


Damp-proof Office Wire 
“Parac’’ Rubber Covered—Double Braid 


“Parac’”’ Rubber Covered—Single Braid ‘Parac’? Rubber Covered—Duplex 


«Parac’? Rubber Covered—Stranded “Parac’’ Telephone Wires 


BARE COPPER CONDUCTORS 


Round @ © 
Grooved b & 


Figure 
Eight 


if 
Y % % 4 


Cross Sections of Trolley Wires Hard Drawn Line Wires 


32 


Po Eyles NeGsie ly 1 APN DUR ERW pe CeO svar a AwNe 


JOHNS-MANVILLE FIBRE CONDUIT 


FOR UNDERGROUND SYSTEMS 


ROGRESSIVE public-utility corporations are con- 
tinually striving to increase the use of electricity 
by lowering rates and improving service to con- 
sumers. In working toward these ends, efficient 

production is a paramount consideration, and it becomes 
necessary for every department to study each detail with 
the idea of effecting the greatest possible economy con- 
sistent with good performance, so that a proper return 
on the investment may be secured. 

Particularly in the distribution department is it neces- 
sary to provide the best and most durable equipment 
in order to guard against interruptions to service and 
injuries to auxiliary apparatus. In this case the first 
cost of installation is often out of all proportion to the 
immediate returns, and purchases of equipment must, 
therefore, be made with a broad consideration of ultimate 


Johns-Manville Fibre Conduit, 350,000 Feet 
Installed by the Connecticut Co., 
Hartford, Conn. 


cost rather than of the existing market price. In other 
words, cost of installation, durability and service features 
must overbalance initial outlay. 

In constructing a distribution system, one of the first 
problems to be solved is whether it is to be underground 
or overhead. Underground construction, to be sure, is 
very expensive when compared with the cost of overhead 
lines. On the other hand, a conduit system is a perma- 
nent structure having little or no depreciation, and is im- 
mune from the effects of wind, rain and sleet storms, and 
the consequent service interruption. Furthermore, owing 
to the constantly increasing demand for electrical energy, 


the serious objections to the unsightly and ever-present 
hazards of overhead wires and poles, underground dis- 
tribution has become a necessity in many places where, 
under former conditions, this class of service would not 
have been deemed practicable or the expense warranted. 

The ultimate value of a conduit system, of course, does 
not depend upon its initial cost alone, but rather upon its 
ability to properly serve and protect the cables and other 
electrical equipment. On the other hand, the interest on 
the investment is a large factor in the cost of distribution. 


Johns-Manville Fibre Conduit — What It Is 
Its Uses and Its Advantages 


The largest field for the use of Johns-Manville Fibre 
Conduit is obviously in electric-service underground sys- 


tems. It has been satisfactorily applied, however, in 
many special fields, notably for use with powerhouse- 
cable systems, for leaders from aerial lines to underground 
ducts, in industrial plants, for conveying water, oil, brine, 
ammonia, dilute acids and various corrosive alkali solu- 
tions, for laboratory drainage systems and for carrying 
acid vapors from laboratory hoods. 


Cig Nr eAs ls SES choAGL TQ IN GAT AT. O'G 


33 


Johns-Manville Fibre Conduit is a hard, tough con- 
duit, cylindrical in section, and is made from specially 
treated fibre, or wood pulp, which is formed under pres- 
sure, producing a homogeneous mass, which when cut 
has the appearance of hard rubber. It is impregnated 
with a permanent bituminous compound which insulates 
it and renders it waterproof. 

Characteristics which have steadily brought Johns- 
Manville Fibre Conduit to the front are briefly enumer- 
ated on the following pages, under the important headings 
upon which the selection of the most satisfactory type is 
believed to depend. 


STRENGTH 


Johns-Manville Fibre Conduit possesses remarkable 
mechanical strength. Breakage in shipping, carting, and 
handling is negligible, whereas that of tile and stoneware 
conduit often amounts to 10% of a shipment. 


LENGTH 


Johns-Manville Fibre Conduit is supplied in 54-inch 
to 60-inch sections. Compared with the shorter lengths of 


200 feet of Johns-Manville Fibre Conduit 
on Hand Barrow 


tile, it saves time and expense in laying and reduces the 
number of possibly vulnerable joints. 


JOINT SIMPLICITY 


Johns-Manville Fibre Conduit is furnished with socket, 
sleeve, drive, or screw joints, as noted herein. The 
expense of burlap wrapping and special cement required 
for tile conduit is completely done away with, and joint- 
making delays reduced to a minimum—tt is only necessary 
to insert one length in another or in a sleeve, or give a few 
turns, to make up a joint. 


JOINT SMOOTHNESS 


The inside of a Johns-Manville Conduit is a con- 
tinuous smooth tube, and cable can be pulled through 
with a minimum of effort and without cutting or abrasion 
of lead sheaths; damage to cables during installation 


is, therefore, entirely eliminated. This is of prime impor- 
tance, as about 90% of all cable trouble in tile ducts is 
directly traceable to injuries to sheathing due to roughness 
of walls and to cement which has seeped through the butt- 
joints, hardened, and formed a cutting edge. 


JOINT TIGHTNESS 


The male or spigot end of Johns-Manville Fibre Con- 
duit is lightly tapered, making a perfect fit and providing 
a joint which can be made water and gas tight. 


APPROVED BY UNDERWRITERS 


After examination, under the provisions of the Na- 
tional Electrical Code, the Underwriters’ Laboratories, 
Inc., approved Johns-Manville Fibre Conduit, laid in 
concrete, for central station work. 


Style ‘‘M’’ Johns-Manville Fibre: Conduit 


Socket Joint 


Drive Joint 


Sleeve Joint 


Screw Joint 


34 


P EelyT-IeNeG Ee Do ASN DOR CE AW SiC. OR IRE ea Ne 


SERVICE FEATURES 


Laid in single ducts and at low cost, Johns-Manville 
Conduit permits greater flexibility of installation, and 
ducts may be spread, for instance, to enter manholes. 
Where necessitated by changes of street grades subsequent 
to laying, the conduit may be raised or lowered as a 
whole without destroying the duct. Repairs to cables can 


Johns-Manville Fibre Conduit Installation, 
Cumberland County Power & Light Co., Portland, Me. 


also readily be made by splitting the duct. Johns-Man- 
ville Conduit, furthermore, is an excellent non-conductor, 
preventing electrolysis by stray earth currents. 


ELECTRICAL TESTS 


After immersion in water for 200 hours, Johns-Man- 
ville Fibre Conduit with walls 44-inch thick indicates an 
average puncture test through the wall of 24,000 volts, 
and when dry an average of 32,000 volts. This is a strik- 
ing proof of its insulating efficiency. 

Johns-Manville Conduit is not inflammable. 
of an arc or flash the area immediately surrounding the 
are might char slightly, but fire would not spread. 


In case 


Portable Tool for Cutting Johns-Manville 
Fibre Conduit 


It is often necessary to cut a length of fibre con- 
duit for breaking joints or entering a manhole, in which 


‘ase this tool is very convenient for the purpose. Our 


customers can rent or purchase the machine. 


Cap 


Elbow 


Cross 


Junction Box 


Reducer 


INEXPENSIVE FITTINGS 


Curves or bends of any degree can be readily made 
from standard material, and tees, crosses, elbows, junc- 
tion boxes, ete., are supplied to meet the most complicated 
requirements. The saving effected here over special and 
often expensive tile fittings, particularly of the multiple- 
duct type, may be readily appreciated. 


3” Socket Bend, 90°—36” Radius 


3” Socket Bend, “S” Type 


S 


3” Screw Bend with Couplings, 90°—36” Radius 


90° Bend, 5’ Long, 18” Radius, 2” Socket 


OZER Nabe ac ee oe PAGO Ne CA TA 17 O'G 


35 


TELEPHONE PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT 


FOR POWER-TRANSMISSION TELEPHONE LINES 


Combined Double-Pole Fused Switch 
and Lightning Arrester 


HE purpose of this device is to provide means for 
manually disconnecting the telephone circuit so 
that the telephone apparatus can be handled 
without danger, and for automatically opening 

the telephone circuit (series fuse) in case the induced line cur- 
rent should reach such a magnitude as to endanger the telephone 
apparatus. The vacuum tube of the arrester is connected be- 
tween lines and hence tends to equalize potentials between 


Fig. 2 
Double-Pole Horn Gap 
Cat. No. 201112 


Fig. 1 
Combined 
Double-Pole Fused Switch 
and Lightning Arrester 
Cat. No. 201111 


lines. The adjustable air gaps of the arresters are connected be- 
tween lines and ground for discharging lightning disturbances, 
thus protecting the telephone equipment against lightning. 

The voltage of the telephone lines on which this device is 
used must not exceed 250 volts between wires. 


Double-Pole Horn Gap 


The purpose of this device is to protect the telephone appa- 
ratus, telephone line insulators, and lightning protective equip- 
ment against the power line voltage in the case of a cross between 
the power lines and the telephone line. The other telephone pro- 
tective equipment is designed to protect the telephone apparatus 
against lightning and similar transitory disturbances. In case 
of a cross the fuses on the combined switch and lightning arrester 
will at once blow, but the insulator on the line side of the fuses 
and the telephone line insulators will still be subject to the strain 
of the line voltage. The double-pole horn gap connected outside 
of the other apparatus provides a means for relieving this strain. 


Telephone Line Insulating Transformers 


The purposes of the telephone line insulating transformers are: 
Ist.—To safeguard the users of telephones from the dangers of high voltage 
due either to induction, or accidental contact between telephone and powerlines, 
where these lines are on the same pole, or upon a parallel adjacent line of poles, 


2nd.—To improve the telephone service by increasing the insulation of the 
telephone line as a whole through the insulating barrier it places between the 
interior wiring, instruments, batteries, etc., and the line. 

The combination of this transformer with other protective equipment 
recommended, affords the greatest safety to the telephone instrument and 


Fig. 3 
Telephone Line Insulating Transformer 
Cat. No. 221243 


user, even in the extreme cases of actual contact between the high potential 
and telephone lines. 

If the telephone line is sufficiently well insulated and the protective devices 
recommended are used, there is no reason why service should not be continued 
over the telephone line in spite of a ground on the high tension system. 


Specific Recommendations for Protection 


Crass A. Telephone circuits which parallel power lines, but are not on the 
same towers or poles and do not cross power lines. 

Disturbances: These circuits are subject to lightning disturbances, and 
electromagnetic and electrostatic induction. They are not subject 
to contact with the power lines. 

1. Insulating transformers at all telephone stations (Cat. No. 221243), 

2. Combined double-pole fused switch and lightning. arrester (Cat. No. 
201111) at all telephone stations on the line side of the insulating 
transformer. 


3. Drainage coils, preferably one at each end of line. 


Crass B. Telephone circuits which are carried on the towers or poles with the 
power lines. 

Disturbances: These circuits are subject to lightning disturbances, elec- 
trostatic and electromagnetic induction, and to crosses with the 
power lines. 

Recommendations: 

1. Insulating transformers at all telephone stations (Cat. No. 221243). 

2. Combined double-pole fused switch and lightning arrester (Cat. No. 
201111) at all telephone stations on the line side of the insulating 
transformer. 

3. Double-pole horn gap (Cat. No. 201112) across line at each station 
on line side of all other apparatus for protection of equipment on 
telephone circuit in case of a cross with the power lines after series 
fuses are blown. 

4. Drainage coils installed with fuses at each end of line; possibly an 
additional coil at the middle if the voltage to ground is not held 
to a safe value by two coils. 


36 POE Ter DN Gtr Dl APN DAR Ee seer O sa PeASN a). 


“D&W” OIL FUSE-CUTOUTS 


‘*Guardians of the Line’’ 


They Give Perfect Protection to the Lines Under the Most Exacting Conditions 
They Give Perfect Protection for the Lineman When Re-F using 


URING the past few years, public service 
corporations have spent large sums of money 
in the interest of the “Safety First’? movement. 
They have conducted campaigns exhorting 

employees and the public to exercise greater care. They 


of contacts under oil, as is effected in the Oil Fuse Cutout, 
the danger from such explosions is eliminated. 

In a word, the Oil Fuse Cutout gives complete protec- 
tion to the workman as well as the circuit. 

In protecting transformers, it is economy to install the 


Pole Type—50-200 Amperes, 2500 Volts 


have installed modern apparatus designed to lessen the 
accident rate among their workmen. Devices that are 
unsafe in operation or manipulation are in a large measure 
being eliminated or corrected. In this new order of things 


the “D&W” Oil Fuse Cutout is being most 
favorably received by numerous central 
stations. 

Their use with transformers, and for 
sectionalizing where the capacity involved 
is in excess of 15 or 20 amperes, is particu- 
larly valuable. The ever-present danger 
resultant from plugging in on a short cir- 
cuited line with the porcelain cutout or 
enclosed fuse is entirely avoided. The auto- 
matic safety feature of this cutout, wherein 
the carrier is locked against blowing out, 
permits of re-fusing with absolute security 
under all conditions. 

In underground service the frequent 
presence of gas in the manhole, which may 
be ignited during the operation of re-fusing 
cutouts having exposed contacts, introduces 
risks of no small moment. By the method 
of arranging for the making and breaking 


Subway Type 
50-200 Amperes, 2500 Volts 


Subway Type with Fuse Carrier Removed 


most reliable cutouts available, since a burned out trans- 
former, interrupted service for long periods, and a further 
possibility of injury to the lineman, may result in losses 
which no company can afford to chance. 


“D&W” Oil Fuse Cutouts will withstand 
a 5,000 k.w. short circuit without stress or 
injury, giving your line the protection re- 
quired. They operate quickly under all 
conditions — no gun-like explosions when 
the fuse burns out. 


Positive Protection to Men 
and Equipment 


No matter how heavy the overload or 
surge, whether underground or on overhead 
lines—no are can hold when the fuse blows 
in a “D&W” Oil Fuse Cutout — this pro- 
tects equipment. 

The fuse is easily and quickly replaced 
and even though there be a short circuit, 
no contact is made until the Fuse Carrier is 
locked—this protects men. 


Cole Ne ERA It 


palaces le Oe Note GA shea. © G 37 


What Large New England Central Stations Think 
of the ““D&W’”’ Oil Fuse Cutouts 


“The ‘D&W’ Oil Fuse Cutout is the only make on 
the market capable of operating satisfactorily on 30 am- 
peres or over. 

“Our original installation was made in 1913, and since 
then we have had no trouble whatever resulting from 
blowouts on the lines where they are in service. I can 
conscientiously recommend them to any central station 
superintendent whose requirements are for a cutout on 
circuits of 2500-volt potential.” 


“Previous to the installation of the ‘D&W’ Oil Fuse 
Cutouts we encountered considerable difficulty with other 
makes of fuses, especially in wet weather. 

“The ‘D&W? Oil Fuse Cutouts are doing service on the 
Company’s lines, carrying from 2500 to 4600 volts and have 
entirely eliminated the difficulties and interruption to ser- 
vice heretofore experienced. We are placing an additional 
order and will continue to use the ‘D&W’ Oil Fuse Cutouts, 
especially where extraordinary service is required.” 


Installation Showing Method of Venting 


Ask Pettingell-Andrews Company for a complete catalog showing “D&W”? Oil Fuse Cutouts 


38 


Re EPS ialeNe Geel AUN Deh a\yeS 


CrOe Vite eNey: 


G&W POTHEADS 


A System That Makes Dependable Service Positive 
Gives Greatest Known Flexibility to Distributing Circuits 
Helps to Quickly Locate and Correct Trouble 


ISCUSSION as to why potheads should be used 
is omitted because modern practice recognizes 
their use as the only “right way” to make up 
the end of a cable. On request, engineering 

information will be given in any required degree of detail. 

The G&W line of potheads meets the demand for a 
simple, dependable and inexpensive method of joining high 
voltage, lead-covered cables to overhead lines without 
jeopardizing the continuity of the service. Their con- 
venience, reliability, and time, labor and money-saving 
advantages have established them as a vital adjunct to 
central station line material. 


Dominant Quality 
at Low Cost 


Starting as pioneers, seventeen years’ experience in the 
and use of potheads has enabled 
to weed out defects which have 
and to perfect a simple, complete 


design, manufacture 
the G&W Company 
developed in service, 
pothead construction. 
The elimination of unnecessary parts, combined with 
highly specialized manufacturing methods, has resulted in 
the production of potheads of dominant quality and value. 
G&W Disconnecting Potheads cost no more than the 
average plain cable seals (which haven't the disconnect- 
ing feature), but they yield a substantially greater meas- 
ure of service where a device of this kind is indicated. 


J 


Installation of G&W Disconnecting Potheads (Type ““LS”’) 
on Series Lighting Cables 


Ease of Operation 


G&W Disconnecting Potheads offer a ready means of 
making joints secure from breakdown and yet afford the 
simplest possible means of disconnection in case of emer- 
gency. When this device is used, no disconnecting box 
or switch is required, nor is it necessary to cut the over- 
head line or unscrew any nuts. The G&W Disconnecting 
Pothead is disconnected and reconnected instantly, with- 
out the use of tools. The lineman simply lifts it from one 
position and places it in another. 

Supplied with choice of cable entrances, it may be 
installed by linemen of average intelligence. It is there- 
fore especially adaptable where cable jointers are not 
available. 

Being of porcelain, its insulating qualities are of the 
best. 

It is made for four groups of voltages, 0 to 6600—6600 
to 10,000—10,000 to 15,000, and 15,000 to 35,000 volts. 


In Asking for Information or Prices or 
For Ordering, the Following Information 
Is Essential: 


Number of conductors in your cable. 
Operating voltage. 
Without both of these we can do nothing. 


Desirable 


Indoor or outdoor use. 

Size of conductor. 

Diameter of lead sheath. 

Size of conduit. 

Type of joint where fiber conduit is used. 

Diameter of armor on armored cable. 

Shape wanted. 

Supporting brackets are furnished on all 
potheads. 

Filling compound is not furnished unless 
specified on your order. 


CAbrNG TTR GAS Ie ys AST OeNe EECCA TT AcLO-G 39 


Disconnecting Potheads are Furnished with 
Choice of Three Styles of Cable Entrance 


Disconnecting Single Conductor 


Non-Disconnecting Types can be furnished if desired 


1. Illustrating construction 


of 100 amp. and 175 amp. dis- 


connecting contacts. 


Catalog Nos. 
10, 13 or 30, 


6,600 volts: 


Catalog Nos. 
L215 or 32) 
10,000 volts. 


Single-conductor 
Pothead equipped 
with Style ‘‘WS” 
wipingsleevecable 
entrance. This 
style of cable en- 
trance isfurnished 
on any single con- 
ductor pothead 
when specified. 


disconnecting contacts. 


Dummy Cap and 
Dummy Tube 


Catalog Nos. 
L6l07onoas 
15,000 volts. 


2. Illustrating con- 
struction of heavy duty 


Single-conductor 
Pothead equipped 
with Style “SB” 
stuffing box cable 
entrance. This 
style of cable en- 
trance is furnished 
on any single con- 
ductor pothead 
when specified. 


Catalog Nos. 
120 and 121, 
30,000 volts. 


Plain Style of Cable 
Entrance, for Single 
Conductor Pothead 


Plain Style of Cable 
Entrance, for Mul- 
tiple Conductor 
Pothead. 


Wiping-sleeve Style of 
Cable Entrance 


LEAD SHEATH BELLED OUT 
AND CLAMPED BETWEEN METAL 


< : 4, RINGS CONNECTED TO POTHEAD, 
"74 PROVIDING PROTECTION FROM 
| an PUNCTURE OF INSULATION BY 


STATIC DISCHARGE AND ALSO 
SUPPORTING LEAD SHEATH. 


EFFICIENT SEAL.1$°OF 
COMPOUND ALONG LEAD SHEATH, 


PACKING. MAKING COMPOUND=- 
TIGHT JOIN). 


Combination Stuffing Box and 
Clamping-ring Style of Cable 
ISntrance, Assembled and in 
Place, Showing How Cable is 
Elevated in Compound to a 
Distance of 1% inches. 


Parts of Stuffing Box and Clamping-ring 
style of cable entrance ready to be as- 
sembled upon cable. Note the Stand- 
ards that hold the Clamping-ring up in 
the Compound, and thus allow com- 
pound .to get 1% inches below the 
stripped cable. 


General Instructions for Installation 


Train cable into position and cut off end at a point which 
brings the ends of the conductors to approximately the desired 
height. Allowance should be made for fanning out the con- 
ductors and for training them inside the pothead properly. 

Next, slip the pothead, after removing the lid, over the 
cable and mark bottom point of pothead on the sheath. Trim 
lead sheath back, leaving enough of it above marked point 
so that cable entrance can be made up. Make up the cable 
entrance. Mount the pot on the entrance. Fan out the indi- 
vidual conductors, so that they train out of their proper outlets. 

Place the lid in position and mark the conductors for cut- 
ting off. Cut off conductors to length which brings their con- 
nector in proper position in the outlet. 

Disassemble connectors and sweat in conductors. The lugs 
of all connectors are an individual piece; see that other parts 
are removed so that temper will not be drawn. Now fill the 
pot with compound, bolt the lid in position and partially fill 
the outlet bushings with compound, closing the vent holes in 
the lid as soon as compound shows there. The insulation on the 
conductor should end under compound. 

Next assemble caps and connector on line wires and close 
the connections. Where the conductor joint is inside the pot- 
head or outlet bushings on non-disconnecting potheads, the 
porcelain caps and the lid of the pothead must be shoved back 
up on the line wires before the joints are sweated. 

In taking the line wire into the cap of a pothead, rubber 
tape should replace the braid for a few inches above the cap as 
old braid will sometimes have a wick action. Stranded con- 
ductors should be tinned solid for the same reason. 


40 PBR Tee N Geri AT NED Re Wee COR via Nee): 


Key to the Shapes Furnished 


a nO) ee) 09] Cer Com 


Multiple Conductor Potheads—F or 
Outside Use 


Form “L”’—Volts 0-6600 
Maximum size of Conductor, 300,000 c.m. 
Types -LO;% Ls) Ls 
and 
Form ‘“‘M’”’— Volts 0-30,000 
Maximum size of Conductor, 1,000,000 c.m. 
Types. “MO,2 Ms. MIS” 


The principles of design are identical in both forms. 
Form “L” is a small, more compact pothead used on vol- 
tages up to 6,600 where space is limited. 


Catalog No. 71 non- 
disconnecting or 81 dis- 
connecting 6,600 volt, 


©_]z 


Potheads for outside use are designed with watersheds, 
etc., for their protection in severe weather conditions. They 
are entirely suitable for inside use in every way. 

All outside use potheads can be used inside, but inside use 
potheads are not suitable for use outside. 

There is no difference in appearance, shape or dimension 
between disconnecting and non-disconnecting potheads. 

The difference lies in the form of connector used. 

Form “L” and Form “M” potheads are furnished with 
either a combination clamping ring and stuffing box cable 
entrance or with sleeves for a wiped joint. The no-wiped 
joint type of entrance is ordinarily furnished where no choice is 
indicated. 

High-grade filling compound furnished when specified. 


THE “MAXIMUM” POTHEAD 
Not Built for Price but 
for a Purpose 
Essential for all voltages above 13,000. 


Made in all voltages, single and multiple conductor, up to 
and including 35,000 volts. 


2-conductor, without 
cable entrance. Any 
multiple conductor 
pothead can be sup- 
plied with any one of 
three types of cable 
entrance. 


Form “M” is larger and gives more room inside the pot- 
head for opening up the cable, jointing work, etc. It is also 
desirable where installers are inexperienced, as its roominess 
gives a wider limit of adjustment of the cable conductors than 


Catalog No. 73 non- 
disconnecting or 83 dis- 
connecting Shape ‘‘B,” 
6,600 volt, 3 conductor 


does a small pothead. 


Catalog No. 42 discon- 
necting or 62 non-dis- 
connecting Shape “EB,” 
6,600 volt, 3 conductor 


Catalog No. 43 discon- 
necting or 63 non-dis- 
connecting Shape “C,” 
10,000 volt, 3 conductor 


Catalog No. 738 non- 
disconnecting or 83 dis- 
connecting Shape “D,” 
6,600 volts, 3 conductor 


Catalog No, 493 discon- 
necting or 693 non-dis- 
connecting Shape “F,” 
15,000 volt, 3 conductor 


Type SS” or “OO,” 
30,000 volts, Illustrat- 
ing the rugged con- 
struction and ample 
porcelain. 


RSs 


£7 abawarasnrns 


Ee 


was as aw maw oA 


iL S 


ye: 


“COPPER PLUG 


COPPER SOCKET 


DeAcker 


a eect 


COMBINED CLAMPING RING 
© STUFFING BOX 


Cele Neen ea IS - 2 AML ie OoN 


GEA IPA Ti O.G 4] 


Multiple Conductor Potheads— 
For Inside Use 


Form “N” Roar IR” Form “Q” 

Forms “N,” “P” and “Q” are non-disconnecting potheads 
especially designed for inside use. 

Any pothead for outside use can be used inside, but inside 


potheads are not designed for outside weather conditions. 


Form ‘‘N,” Shape ‘‘C”’ 
6,600 volts 


Form “‘N,” Shape “U” 
6,600 volts 


Form ‘‘N,”’ Shape “‘Z” 
13,500 volts 


Form “N,” Shape “D” 
6,600 volts 


Form “‘N,” Shape “Ww” 
6,600 volts 


Form ‘‘N ” Shape “Kk” 
13,500 volts 


Why You Get More for Your Money 
in G&W Potheads 


1. Brass ring mechanically supporting and bonding cable 
without crushing strain on cable sheath. 


2. End of lead sheath mechanically belled out at least one 
and one-half inches in compound. This elevation of complete 
cable into the compound provides absolute protection against 
moisture. 


3. Soft packing to prevent leakage of compound, compressed 
by screwed gland. 


4. Sizes of openings standardized and all types of cable 
entrances (clamped ring, wiping sleeve or plain plug) universal. 

5. Universal nut when conduit coupling is desired. All 
sizes of conduit couplings interchangeable. 

6. No leakage of compound into conduit or coupling. No 
packing of coupling required. 

7. Bracket slotted for convenience in installing. 

8. Rubber gasket seated upon ground surface with bolted 


cover makes joint compound tight, allowing outlet tubes to be 
filled with compound. 


9. Substantial metal lids. To obviate heating on large 
sizes, non-magnetic metal is used. 


10. Outlet bushings cemented to eliminate moisture or dirt 
inside pothead. 


11. Proper thickness and quality of porcelain. 


12. Large leakage surface for rated voltage. 


Standardized construction with universal fittings enables 
quick shipments of any shape or size of pothead for upright, 
horizontal or inverted use. Any pothead can be supplied with 
bolted cable entrance if turning of bell must be avoided. The 
most complete standardized line. Built for dependability. 


42 


Pee Tee INaG aie ee eee Ne Ve 


GrOs VIG Ge Na. 


FLOODLIGHTING PROJECTORS 


For Spectacular, Commercial, Industrial, and 
Protective Lighting 


LOODLIGHTING, or illumination by projection, 

first received world-wide prominence at the 

Panama Pacific International Exposition. The 

spectacular effects produced by floodlighting 

the buildings and beautiful works of art created a demand 
for similar results all over the country. 

To meet this 
demand the Gen- 
eral Electric Com- 
pany developed 
and placed on the 
market acomplete 
line of floodlight- 
ing projectors 
which meet the 
requirements for 
spectacular, com- 
mercial, industri- 
al, and protective 
lighting. 

The spectacular 
effects produced 
by — floodlighting 
are well known, 
but the commer- 
cial value and 
effectiveness of 
floodlighting signs painted on water towers and chimneys, 
as well as billboards mounted on the tops of buildings or 
on the sides of railway tracks and highways, are now 
being more and more appreciated. 

For industrial purposes floodlighting projectors are 
used to facilitate night work in shipyards, quarries, docks, 
ete., and also to illuminate the yards of industrial plants 
and railways so that transportation can proceed at night 
with daylight efficiency. Well-lighted 
the probability of accidents. 


yards also lessen 

The protection afforded by floodlighting bridges, docks, 
arsenals, fences, and yards of industrial plants and various 
other strategic points has been so essential that this form 
of lighting is now of the greatest importance in protect- 
ing property. 

On the following pages a line of standard floodlighting 
projectors is described, and sufficient data are given for 
selecting the proper projectors for various kinds of work. 

Our Iluminating Engineering Department will pre- 
pare specifications and recommendations on any lighting 
proposition. This is another P-A feature. 

Send your lighting problems to Pettingell-Andrews Co. 


Floodlighting of Lynn, Mass., Library 


Glass Reflectors and Lenses 


A properly designed and constructed silvered glass reflector 
is the most durable and efficient device for light projection. 
The General Electric Company has worked for several years in 
perfecting this product, and the result of this research work is 
the copper-backed glass reflectors now standardized for GE 
floodlight projector. 

Glass reflectors 
of variousforms and 
shapes, depending 
upon the class of 
work for which the 
projectors are used, 
are silvered on the 
back. Owing to the 
silver being more or 
less sensitive to at- 
mospheric condi- 
tions, a coating of 
copper is applied by 
special process over 
the silver. This 
copper backing her- 
metically seals the 
silvering, protects 
the glass, and also 
assists in radiating 
the heat. Silver- 
plated and copper- 
backed glass reflectors, therefore, have a permanent reflecting 
surface and a protection for the silvering from mechanical injury 
and deterioration by the elements. 

Glass lenses are constructed to redirect light from a flood- 
lighting projector so that beams of various shapes and spreads 
can be obtained. 

In connection with floodlighting there are a few special 
cases where desired results can be better obtained when the 
projector is equipped with a special type of lens, and to meet 
such cases, the Pettingell-Andrews Company can supply 
diffusing and prismatic types of lenses for their floodhghting 
projectors. 

A diffusing lens greatly increases the spread of a beam, and 
if such a lens is placed in a projector having a beam divergence 
of 10 degrees, the resulting beam will have a spread of 50 
degrees or more depending on the type used. A beam of this 
character is well adapted for floodlighting large objects or sur- 
faces at close range. 

Some prismatic types of lenses produce a rectangular shaped 
beam which is very long and narrow. Such lenses placed 
across a beam of 10 degrees divergence will spread the beam to 
approximately 50 to 90 degrees in the horizontal plane; the 
divergence remaining 10 degrees in the vertical plane. A beam 


etme ena eo Asn OENe BCAA TVA TiO G 4i 


of this formation is recommended for floodlighting a long and 
narrow sign or large areas. 


Form L-11 Projector 


In addition to the various types of lenses, the Pettingell- The Form L-11 Projector meets the demand for a small 
Andrews Company is in a position to furnish a metal shield  floodlighting unit that can be mounted close to the object to 
which will eliminate any objectionable stray light be illuminated. 


from their floodlighting projectors. 

These shields will prevent the stray light from 
illuminating the property or guard that should be in 
darkness. 


Form L-12 Projector 


This projector has recently been designed to 
take care of large area lighting such as shipyards, 
railway centers and construction work, as it has a 
beam divergence of 20-30 degrees. 

The reflector is made of heavy heat-resisting 


Form L-1 Projector 


This projector is particularly recommended to 
illuminate a surface or object located 150 feet or 
more from the projector, as the beam divergence is 
from 8 to 14 degrees. 


Medium Angle Form L-1 Projector 


This projector is recommended to illuminate ob- 
jects located from 75 to 200 feet distance as the 
beam has a divergence 
of 12-20 degrees. 

The construction of 
this projector is along 
the lines of the Form 
L-1 previously describ- 
ed, except that the 
aluminum reflector is of 
special design to give 
the required beam di- 
vergence. 


glass 15} in. diameter, silvered and coppered on 
the back and composed of three reflecting surfaces 
which utilize 60 per cent. of the light from the 
lamp, or a total of 85 per 
cent. when taking into 
consideration the amount 
of direct light which en- 
ters the beam. The glass 
is so constructed that a 
slightly diffused and even 
beam is projected. 

On the top of the re- 
flector and protected by 
a ventilating cowl is a 
focusing mechanism, and 
on the bottom an opening 
is provided so that cool 
air can enter the reflec- 
tor, circulate around the 
lamp, and leave by the top ventilator. Both 


Form L-3 Projector 


Where it is necessary to mount the projector 
within 75 ft. or less from the object to be illum- 
inated, the Form L-3 projector should be used as it 
has a beam divergence of approximately 50 degrees. 


openings are fitted with screens to prevent insect 
nuisance. The regular type 110- or 220-volt, 300- 
to 1000-watt lamps can be used. 

This projector is supplied with either the swivel 


and trunnion base or the swivel and pipe stand base. 


: : : 6 : D 5 Illustrations 
This projector is supplied with either the hinged ghow Types of Mounting 


base, the swivel and trunnion base, or the swivel and 
pipe stand base. The best results are obtained with the 500- The Form L-15 Floodlighting Projector is similar to the 
watt floodlighting lamp, although the 250-watt floodlighting Form L-12 except that the glass reflector is placed inside of a 
lamp with a Cat. No. GE 070 
adapter can be used. 


Form L-15 Projector 


sheet metal casing. The casing 
is equipped with a sheet metal 
door which is hinged on the 
side and provided with a suit- 
able latch. 


Form L-9 Projector 


For the illumination of ob- On the bottom of the casing is a 


jects located at a distance of 
150 feet or more, it is recom- 
mended to use the Form L-9 
projector as it has a beam 
divergence of 10-16 degrees. 

Except for the special sil- 
vered and copper-backed, heat- 
resisting glass reflector, this 
projector is similar in construc- 
tion to the Form L-1. 

This projector is supplied 
with either the swivel and 
trunnion base, or the swivel 
and pipe stand base. 


Floodlighting Used in Construction Work 


baffle air intake, which permits cool 
air to enter the casing, circulate 
around the lamp and reflector, and 
leave by the ventilating cowl located 
on the top of the casing. A suitable 
handle for manipulating the projector 
is attached to its back. 

A focusing mechanism is located 
inside of the ventilating cowl so that 
maximum and minimum beam di- 
vergence can be obtained. 

Regulator type 110- or 220-volt 
multiple Jamps from 300- to LO00- 
watt sizes can be used. 

This projector can be furnished 
with either the swivel and trunnion 
base or the swivel and pipestand base. 


44 


Pee Te lOoNeGe ier AN Dane hay 


C7OSMARS APNE: 


WESTERN RED CEDAR POLES 


Strong, Straight, and Sightly —Together With Longest Life 
The Lowest Cost per Year of Service 


HE New England supply of chestnut and cedar 
rapidly becoming extinct, the Pettingell-Andrews 
Company have arranged to act as exclusive 
New England distributors for the Valentine- 
Clark Co. of Spokane, Washington, who are one of the 
largest producers of 
Western Red Cedar 


Poles in the country. 


75,000 to 150,000 
Poles on Hand 


The Valentine- 
Clark Co. maintain 
the largest concen- 
trating yard in the 
east (situated on the 
lines of three trans- 
continental rail- 
roads), where they 
carry at all times a 
complete stock of 
Western Red Cedar 
Poles in all specifica- 
tions, thus enabling promptshipment and ExemplarService. 

Wherever the facts are known about Western Red 
Cedar Poles, whether at home in the mountains where they 
are grown or 3500 miles away on the Atlantic sea border, 
they are used by progressive utility companies. 


Strength Combined with Light Weight 
and Elasticity 


Western Red Ce- 
dar has practically 
the same strength as 
chestnut with about 
one-half the weight. 

Western Red Ce- 
dar has greater elas- 
ticity than any other 
pole in use. 

Because of their 
strength and exceed- 
ing long life, they 
give the greatest 
guarantee of conti- 
nuity of service. 


Northern White Cedar—Wood’s Run. Note comparison with Western Red Cedar 


Western Red Cedar—Wood’s Run. Note uniform straightness and minimum butt rot 
Smooth surfaces, straight grain, and absence of blemish 


Western Red Cedar Poles will outlast any other pole 
in its natural state. 


Sightly Appearance 


Western Red Cedar Poles are uniformly straight 
in appearance and 
are free from large 
knots. They have 
rapidly become the 
favored pole for 
city use. 


Low Maintenance 
Cost | 


Western Red Ce- 
dar Poles cost less 
to handle and erect 
because of their uni- 
formity of shape, 
smoothness, and ex- 
treme light weight, 
showing a saying in 
time of framing and 
erecting. These features, coupled with their great strength 
and long life, guarantee a continuous service of from 
sixteen to twenty-five years. 

Figured on an annual maintenance basis a Western 
Red Cedar Pole is lowest in cost per year of service. 


Length of Poles 


Range in length from 25 ft. to 85 ft., with top diameter 
up to 10 inches. 


Butt Treated 
Poles 


Western Red Ce- 
dar Poles can be fur- 
nished butt treated 
according to stand- 
ard specification. 


Full information 
furnished by Pettin- 
gell-Andrews Com- 
pany on application. 


as to butt rot and general appearance of pole 


Cala NeIGn TAT. @SsleAcr 4°O°N 


CATALOG 


Because of the straight, fine appearance of Western 
Red Cedar Poles they have rapidly become the favored 
pole for city use. 


The Valentine-Clark Co. Butt Treating Plant 
Tank contains 145 B-50s, 16 B-60s, 36 B-65s Western Red Cedar Poles 


ag oe : rs. 
Over the Continental Divide 


Western Red Cedar Poles carry the high power lines 
of the Chicago, Milwaukee Railway Electrification over 
the Continental Divide. In fact, Western Red Cedar 
Poles were selected to carry this, the greatest piece of elec- 
trical construction in the world, from start to finish, as 
well as others. 

The poles shown here are at Pipestone Pass Tunnel, 
16.8 miles east of Butte, on the Continental Divide. 

The pole in the foreground supports 1060 pounds 
weight, as represented in three No. 00 6-strand hemp core, 
copper cables, 134 in. Siemens-Martin 7-strand steel cable, 
over a span of 815 feet, in addition to the cross-arms and 
necessary hardware. 


<a a 5 ai 
S- 44 ee 


Exposure to mountain winds under such tremendous 
loads soon proves the quality of a pole. Western Red 
Cedar has stood the test. When the long life and sightly 
qualities are added, you will find there is nothing that fills 
the requirements at so reasonable a cost for these heavy 
lines as Western Red Cedar Poles. 


46 


POR Te TINGE lp AGN DSR OBE" COnNitaAn Nae 


“EXEMPLAR” CROSS-ARMS 


Long-Leaf Yellow Pine (Pinus Palustris) — 80% to 100% Heart 
Guaranteed 75% Heart at 4NY Cross-Section 


These Arms can be furnished Unpinned and Unpainted 
Or— Pinned and Painted 


The following sizes are carried in stock. The 314x 
41-inch bored for 5-inch through bolt and two brace 
holes for 3<-inch carriage bolts. The 334x434-inch bored 
for 34-inch through bolts and two brace holes for 3g-inch 
carriage bolts. 


Size Finished, 314 x 414 Inches 


ieneth No. of Res Pin Spacina, INCHES 
of Arm Pins Inches End Center Side 
3 ft. 2 14 A 28 _ 
4 ft. 4 ie 4 16 12 
5 ft. 6 in. 4 1% 4 30 14 
6 ft. 6 A 4 16 12 
8 ft. 6 (ee en 30 14 
8 ft. 8 tie 4 16 12 
10 ft. 10 18 A 16 12 
Size Finished, 334 x 434 Inches 
SS iitt, @ wt, 4 1% 4 30 14 
7 ft. 10 in. 6 1% 4 30 14 
10%ht, Zan. 8 1% 4 30 14 


We are prepared to furnish “Exemplar” Cross-Arms 
in all sizes from our Southern mill. 


Cross-Arm Materials 


For outside construction we are confined to the Coni- 
fers, on account of the liability of the Hardwoods to warp. 

The Conifers vary in strength about in proportion to 
their weights. Forest Service breaking tests on cross- 
arms 314x414 inches by 6 feet yielded the following re- 
sults in lb. per square inch, from which it is evident that 
the same strength may be obtained by substituting a 
smaller Long-Leaf arm for that of any of the other conifers, 
making its weight the same, but reducing its footage and 
cost, this reduced footage and cost being represented by 
percentages in the second column: 


Strength in lb. Reduced 
per square inch Footage 
Long-leaf Yellow Pine 10,900 
Loblolly Pine 10,100 


Shortleaf Yellow Pine 

White Pine . eee 

Red Cypress v2 an ate 
Shortleaf Pine, Creosoted . 
Douglas ‘Fira y=. eee 
White Cedar (Juniper) . . . 


9,260 84.95% 
7,900 72.48% 
7,900 72.48% 
7,650 70.18% 
7,590 69.68% 
5,200 47.70% 


Accurate figures for comparative Resistance to Decay are 
not obtainable, and would of course vary with the climate. 


This cross-arm was installed for service in 1890, and was removed from the pole in 1911, because of line changes. It was sent to us by a Central Station in New England 
as an example of the long life of genuine Long-Leaf Yellow Pine Cross-Arms. This arm has been in the Pettingell-Andrews Company warehouse 
ever since, and today, after twenty-one years’ service ona pole line, and nine years in our warehouse, is as strong and solid as new timber 
and the only sign of decay is about one-half of one inch of sapwood in one corner. Otherwise the arm is perfect. 


CaP hago. aA el TOON CoAT AULO:G 


AT 


LONG-LEAF YELLOW PINE has been for many 
years the standard for outside construction, and its great 
durability has always been recognized. One central 
station has on exhibition Long-Leaf cross-arms taken 
from the poles after 23 years of service. The sap wood 
has disappeared but the heart wood is as sound as ever. 
Another central station reports that Long-Leaf arms, 
placed on its poles in 1896, are giving good service today. 
We have been making Long-Leaf cross-arms for fourteen 
years, and as far as we know every arm we have ever sold 
is now giving good service. 


SHORTLEAF and LOBLOLLY PINE usually decay 


in this climate in from three to five years. 


CREOSOTED SHORTLEAF PINE resists decay as 
well as, but not better than, Long-Leaf. 


RED CYPRESS, “The Wood Eternal,” is believed 


to resist decay better than any other wood. 


WHITE CEDAR, marketed in cross-arms as ‘‘Juni- 


per,” is believed to resist decay quite well. 


DOUGLAS FIR has been exploited as the coming 
structural timber to take the place of Long-Leaf when the 
supply of the latter is exhausted. It is in no way equal 
to Long-Leaf. It is stiffer, more brittle, and splinters 
more readily, besides being inferior in strength. Great 
claims have been made for its durability, but its use in 
this climate is too recent to confirm them. What was 
claimed to be the best proof of its durability was a case 
of the preservation of fir arms on the poles for 49 years 
at a point in Nevada, but investigation showed this point 
to be practically rainless. 


We operate in LONG-LEAF therefore simply be- 
cause, with the rigid inspection we have learned how to 
practice, we are sure it will give the greatest service, and 
expect to do so until its increasing scarcity makes its price 
prohibitive. 


RED CYPRESS is probably the next best cross-arm 
material, having the greatest durability together with a 
fair strength. It can never come into general use for 
cross-arms because even now its scarcity makes the price 
almost prohibitive. We are able to obtain a limited 
supply at present, and can supply those who require it. 


DOUGLAS FIR is the next choice, and the stands 
are so great that a supply should be obtainable at reason- 
able prices for a great many years to come. We therefore 
contemplate using fir when Long-Leaf is no longer ob- 
tainable. For some years to come, however, we expect 
to be able to obtain the genuine virgin Long-Leaf Yellow 
Pine, which has earned its great reputation for durability 
and strength; and our complete plant operating from tree 
to the finished cross-arm enables us to supply it with the 
most rigid inspection, at the lowest possible cost. 


“EXEMPLAR” 
LOCUST PINS 


Made of Thoroughly Seasoned 


Young, Second Growth, Straight-grained 


Locust 


As a result of a multitude of ex- 
periences, many of them unfortunate 
and exacting tests extending over a 
considerable period of time, it has 
become a universally recognized fact 
that the only material which satisfac- 
torily meets the requirements of insu- 
lator pins is locust wood. 

Locust wood permits the manu- 
facture of a pin that presents a hard, 
smooth surface to the elements. Only 
locust has the strength sufficient to 
withstand so great a strain on so small 
a piece of wood. Only locust has the 
durability to resist decay—the most 
important factor in decreasing the ex- 
pense of line repairs and renewals. 

But merely ‘‘locust’’ is not enough. 
Even genuine locust pins found in the 
market, bear traces of the far-reaching 
ravages of the ‘‘bore’’ beetle and the 
“‘doze’’ fungus. To meet the demand 
for a perfect pin, ‘‘Exemplar’’ Locust 
Pinsare made only from sound, straight- 
grained portions of buttlogs, which 
usually represent not more than one- 
fifth of the entire butt. The result is 
a sound, well-made pin, straight- 
grained, free from knots, ‘‘doze’’ and 
“‘bore’’—unquestionably the best pin 
that can be made. 


Free from Splits and Knots 


or Checks 


Every Pin is Stamped ‘‘Exemplar’’ 


Guaranteed Perfect 


48 


PoE aleNe Ga ie  -eAeNGD ERA VV 


CeOeMaRaAGNaY 


WEATHERPROOF OIL SWITCHES 


HE weatherproof oil switches listed here were 

placed on the market several years ago and have 

been installed under all conditions by a large 

number of the central station companies 

throughout the country, and have given, and are giving, 
entire satisfaction to their users. 

The virtues of oil break switches are well known, and 

the design, as embodied in our switches, meets all reason- 

able requirements demanded in weatherproof oil switches. 


DP 


They have a large field, and among the many uses to 
which they may be put, might be mentioned the follow- 
ing: disconnecting switches for constant current trans- 
formers and reactive coils, banks of transformers, build- 
ing entrances, synchronous and induction motors, insu- 
lating feeders and mains at junction of overhead and 
underground wires, and when properly waterproofed, 
in manholes. 


The manhole switch is subject to special quotations 
upon receipt of specifications. 

These switches are easily installed on poles or hung in 
manholes, but in view of the various requirements, 
hangers are not furnished except on order with specifica- 
tions. Leakage of oil, due to capillarity, is guarded 
against in the design. Care should be exercised when 
filling switches with oil, to settle properly into all spaces 
before putting on cover. 


One inspection per year of the oil depth is recommended 
as is usual in the case of transformers. 

Renewal of oil should depend upon the frequency of 
operation of switch, following the general practice usual 
in the case of switchboard switches. 

We guarantee their performance within their rated 
capacity, and at any power factor. 

We do not provide oil, as practically all central stations 
have it in stock for transformers. 


GE Wiring Devices 

American, Galvanite, Greenfield 
duct (rigid conduit) 

Sprague Genuine BX Cables 

Sprague Boxes 


Ralco Specialties 


Hemco Plugs 


V. V. Fittings 

Paiste Taplets 

Edison Mazda Lamps 
Miniature Lamps 

Eveready Daylos 

Columbia Batteries and Carbon 


Brushes 
Panel Boards 


GE Fans 
Shelton Vibrators 


In addition to material listed in this catalog, Pettingell-Andrews Company 
carry a complete stock of Electric Lighting Supplies, Appliances and Fixtures, 
among which are the following best known makes:— 


Hubbell Specialties 


Faraday Gongs and Bells 
Couch Telephones 


Appliances 


Thor Washers, Ironers and 
Vacuum Cleaners 

Edison—Hotpoint— Hughes 
ing machines, bake ovens, 
ranges, appliances 


Kent Heavy Duty Vacuum Cleaners 
Utility Floor Machines 

Standard Electric Cookers 
Hamilton- Beach Specialties 
Violetta- Violet Ray Outfits 


Fixtures 


Wireduct Pyrene Fire Extinguishers 
Wiremold Palmer Safety Switches 
D&W Cutouts and Fuses 

Condulets 


National X-Ray Direct Reflectors 
and Indirect Fixtures 

Four-In-One Units 

Celestialite Glassware 

Ivanhoe-Regent Shades and 
Reflectors 

Duplexalites 

Mohrlites 

Eye Shield Diffuser 


sew- 


COUWNEIGR Abe esl ACE FOON © CA Ti AL O°G 


49 


HUBBARD 


POLE LINE 


A 


HARDWARE 


PEIRCE CONSTRUCTION 
SPECIALTIES 


ADE exclusively from Open Hearth Steel 
having a tensile strength of 55,000 to 65,000 
pounds per square inch. 
Hot galvanized and double dipped. Meets 
All specifications of the A. T. & T. Company. 


“If It Isn’t Satisfactory, 
Return It for Credit’’ 


This guarantee applying to Hubbard Pole Line Hard- 
ware and Peirce Construction Specialties has been in 
force since their introduction. It is still in force, and it is 
being constantly strengthened by an ever increasing 
rigidity of inspection both of raw materials and of finished 
product. 

Back of this guarantee is the largest manufacturer of 
Pole Line Hardware and Construction Specialties in the 
world and the largest distributors of Pole Line Hardware 
in New England. 

The use of this standard material is the safest insur- 
ance against line breakdown. 


Please Note 


While only a few of Hubbard and Peirce specialties 
are shown here, Pettingell-Andrews Company carry at all 
times their complete line, as well as a complete and exten- 
sive stock of all materials used in line construction. 

Ask Pettingell-Andrews Company for a catalog show- 
ing the complete line of Hubbard Pole Line Hardware 
and Peirce Construction Specialties. 


Peirce Presteel Pin 


There has been a strong tendency on the part of Distribu- 
tion Engineers to adopt metal pins for primaries as well as 
high tension lines, but there has been no satisfactory pin meet- 
ing all conditions of this service, particularly on voltages from 
2200 to 13,000. 

Wood pins digest and disintegrate from the constant 
leakage. 

This new Presteel Pin meets all objections. 

It has the requisite strength when new and it retains this 
strength throughout its life. 


It fits on either wood or steel arms, on arms bored for 
any size of pin, and on any size of arm. 
SS 


It is fastened to the arm with either a %”’ or 5¢”" standard 


Presteel Pin with 
Short Bolt 


through bolt. The nut fits within the 
body of the pin and is heldfrom turning. 

It is guaranteed to break a No. 6 
hard-drawn Copper Conductor with the 
strain applied in any direction. 

Made for both round and flat top 
arms and for 1” and 13” insulator 
bores. 


Presteel Pin with 
Long Bolt 


Peirce Forged Steel Pins with 
Separable Thimbles 


These pins are made in three series of strengths: a 1,500-lb. 
series, a 3,000-lb. series and a 4,500-lb. series, each developing 
its rated strength on a dead end pull exerted at the pin top, 
with a deflection of less than 10 degrees. Each of these series 
is made in heights ranging from 4 to 16 inches above the arm, 
so that the correct pin for any style of insulator made by the 
insulator manufacturers can be selected. The taper of the 
shank of the pin is so designed that a 1,500-lb. series, 16-inch 
pin will, in spite of its greater lever arm, withstand a strain of 
1,500 pounds just as a 4-inch pin in the same series will. 

We guarantee the new Peirce Forged Steel Pin in any type or 
size to stand the application at the pin top of a dead end strain 
equal to its rated strength, with a deflection of less than 10 degrees 
and without danger to the insulator. 

Each of the series is made in two distinct types: The long 
bolt pin for wood arms, and the short bolt pin for steel arms. 
The pin is a solid forging from a single block of steel, and has 


50 


P EV EENeG? EL APN DERGEMWeseC Orie Nay, 


neither welds nor joints. Its strength is uniform in all direc- 
tions. There are no flanges or webs which must be placed in line 
with the strain. There are no projections to concentrate electro- 
static stresses. 

The thimble is drawn seamless from sheet steel, and the 
threads are pressed; the threads on the interior engaging with 
the threads on the pin top, and those on the exterior engaging 
the cement. 

The practice of having the thimble cemented into the 
insulator at the insulator factory where, because of the better 
facilities, a better job can be done at lower cost, is today almost 
universal and the light weight of this drawn steel thimble is, 
therefore, of importance. The average weight 
of a malleable or cast iron thimble used on other 
types of pins runs between 34 and 1 pound 
each. The weight of the drawn steel thimble is 
less than 2 ounces, so the saving in freight in 
delivering the thimble to the insulator factory 
and in delivering the finished insulators with 
thimbles to the job is an important item. 

An extremely important feature is the pre- 
vention of the expansive force of the pin and 
thimble affecting the insulator. Recent investi- 
gations have proved that electrical fatigue of 
porcelain is really of mechanical origin. The 
constant mechanical stresses set up in an in- 
sulator by the alternate expansion and contrac- 
tion of the pin or thimble, while insufficient 
to rupture the insulator, do in time change 
and its insulating 


al 


Note this Illustration 
carefully 


It shows how the 
fullstrengthofthe jts 
pin is brought up ‘ 
to the top of the 
thimble. 


structure, 
qualities therefore deteriorate. 

This expansive action is completely elimi- 
nated in the Peirce Drawn Steel Thimble. The expansive force 
is very small because of its thinness. It creates no strain in the 
insulator. If it is screwed tightly upon the solid steel pin, the 
expansion of the pin would be communicated to the thimble, but 
provision is made to prevent this. In the top of the thimble is a 
cork disk. The threads of the thimble loosely fit the threads of 
the pin. As the pin expands, its threads ride farther up on the 
thimble threads and the cork disk compresses and takes up the 


molecular 


strain. 


Assembly for Steel 
Arm 


Assembly for Round 


Assembly for Flat 
Top Wood Arm 


‘op Wood Arm 


Peirce Clamp Pins for Low Voltage Circuits 
on Wood Cross-Arms 


With Peirce Clamp Pins you use all of the timber you pay 
for. There are no pin holes and therefore no roof is necessary. 
You can use a smaller sized arm, thereby saving considerable 
expense, and still get greater original strength. And instead of 
helping the natural checking and splitting of 
the arm, Peirce Clamp Pins prevent it abso- 
lutely. Observe sketch C. Note how the fibers 
of the arm are clamped together with a solid 
band of steel. These drop forged open hearth 
steel cross-arm straps are so flexible that, as 
the nuts are tightened, the straps are brought 
into solid bearing against all sides of the arm, 
preventing checking in any direction. 

Your cross-arm manufacturer will guarantee 
a life of twenty years for unbored arms with 
Peirce Clamp Pins against an average of not 


Sketch C 


over six years for bored arms with wood pins, so the cost of 
three arms with wood pins and the cost of replacing 
them, together with the constant hazard to life 
and property and the expensive interruptions of 
service, should be balanced against the cost of one 
smaller arm with Peirce Clamp Pins, which shows 
a big credit balance in favor of the Clamp Pins. 


No. 4300 


Cross-Arm Straps Also made 
with 
Hot Galvanized drawn 
steel 
Peirce Cross-Arm Straps are drop BeDatabie 


0 thimble 
forged from round steel and have a broad 


flat bearing on the arm, which helps to 
hold the pins firmly upright, By drop 
forging from round stock, freedom from 
flaws is assured, and the threads are 
always uniform in size. 


; Dimensions in Inches Per 100 
Stock : Size Strap Weight 
No. Size Arm Flat Round Pounds 
1001 314x444 Vox ll Vy 91 
1002 34%x4% Y%x lle VY 102 
1003 334 x 434 i X 1% % 113 
1004 4 x > dey X 1% 7) 126 


No. 4910 Pin 
with Strap for 
Wood Cross-Arm 


Cera Ne hearin ts: Daa OPN Craw A LO7G 51 


Hubbard Wood Top Pins with Steel Bolts Peirce Presteel Pole Top 


Bolts Hot Galvanized or Plain Brackets 
Hubbard Wood Top Pins are 


composed of seasoned locust tops, 
thoroughly impregnated with 
paraffin and stiff steel fin bolts. 
They are made in a variety of 
heights with short and long 
shanks for wood, angle or channel 
steel arms, and for two sizes of 


When wood or straight 
steel arms are used for 
a high tension line, the 
top wire of the triangle 
may be strung on a 
Peirce Forged Steel Pin 
mounted at the top of 


Fi 


J 


Neeeor : : yole on this Pole Top 
No.8 insulator pin holes, 1 and 138 No. 3085 : on 
inches in diameter. No. 8070 Pole Top Bracket ests 
Size of Wood Top, In. Length of Per 100 
ae piem: ee r ' Size of Bolt, In. Bolt below Weight 
oO. op ottom ength Diam. Length Top, In. Lbs. E 
aie ie ante. VV eae Ts Z Hubbard Steel Angle and Channel 
8071 1 Qy 51, «4 6% 1% 60 
ROIgeIe Biz aig oe 5 90 Cross-Arms — For Heavy Duty 
8073 13% Q\y Big a 3% 614 Vel Wales 
8074 1 1% AD ees 914 5 72 
8075 1 24 54% OM 1014 5480 
8076 iy a4 gv. | AV; 11% 64% 88 
8077 13% Quy 44% 5% 914 5 135 
8078 13% Q14 41% 3% 101% 6 160 
8079 13% Q\y bee 1014 5, 165 
8080 134 Q14 6% % 121% 6 190 
8081 13% Q4 8 5g 14 6 225 
8082 134 234 9 56 16 7 250 
Peirce 
B&K : A 
; For dead ends, corners, and any situation or place where 
Forged Steel ; ; : 
Pin extra strength is required. 
ee These arms can be furnished in any dimension and for any 
with impregnated . : 
wood top spacing. 
No. 1040 Hubbard Angle Cross-Arm Braces 


Presteel Pins 


The strength, light weight and low cost of the 


Presteel Pins have brought about their use on all but 
the heaviest of high tension construction. ‘They are 
pressed from sheet steel, which gives the maximum 
strength for a given weight, and are fur- 
nished with Peirce Spring Threads, which 
screw into insulators with 1 and 1%%-inch 
pin holes, and with Peirce drawn steel sep- 
arable thimbles for cementing into insulators 
of these two sizes. 


In the construction of heavy pole lines, particularly for high 
voltage circuits, a one-piece cross-arm brace made of angle steel 
is in general use. The Angle, or Drop Brace, as it is sometimes 


Dimensions in Inches 


Soascre called, gives greater strength and rigidity to the arm than can 


Net cast Stele of Daph! We vibe, be secured with standard flat braces. It is fastened to the arm 
3040 10 18 8 1” Spring Thread 227 by a carriage bolt at each end, and to the pole by a lag screw. 
3041 10 18 8 1 %” Spring Thread 230 
3042 10 18 8 %%" Thimble 227 
3043 10 18 8 1%” Thimble 230 
3045 1 le Gy ake Spring Thread 303 
3046 10 24 8 1 3%” Spring Thread 305 
3047 10 24 8 %%" Thimble 303 
83048 10 Q4 8 1%" Thimble 305 


Braces of any desired dimensions can be furnished, and in 
ordering special sizes, please give the dimensions A, B and C, 
as indicated in the illustration, and state size of holes and size 
No. 3040 No. 3048 of angle desired. 


54 


P Bene NeGshele LS ASN ean aa 


CeO MIS UAAPNGY 


Bo-Arrow Arms 
HIGH TENSION 


Ad a a S 


SINGLE ARM DOUBLE OR CORNER ARM 


Single Bo-Arrow Arms 


A Bo-Arrow Arm consists of one Bow, one Arrow and one 
34 x 14-inch machine bolt for fastening the Bow and Arrow 


\ 


together. 

Stock Number Dimensions in Inches Weight, Lbs. 
Type A Type B Wire Spacing Size Angle Each 
6024 6124 24 QWox2loxl4 21 
6030 6130 30 QWoxox4 25 
6036 6136 36 SES Omexed. 39 
6052 6152 52 Bi SG} 2d 52 
6072 6172 72° 3 3G) agA 69 


Bo-Arrow Double Arming Sets 


These Sets are adjustable by means of the slots in the cross 
pieces for poles of from 7 to 11 inches in top diameter, and con- 
sist of a right- and a left-hand Bow, a right- and a left-hand 
straight Arrow, three cross-pieces of angle or channel steel, 
depending on whether forged steel or clamp pins are used, two 
bolts for fastening Bows and Arrows together and six bolts 
for clamping the cross-pieces to the arms. These cross-pieces 
are necessary to give sufficient clearance between the two large 
high voltage insulators required in each line wire, but are not 
needed on the 24- and 30-inch arms, in which cases two Bows, 
two straight Arrows and a double arming or spreader bolt for 
fastening the four parts together are furnished. 

Weight, Lbs. 


Stock Number Dimensions in Inches 


Type A Type B Wire Spacing Size Angle Per Set 
6224 6324 Q4 QWoxQloxl4 43 
6230 6330 30 WMexQhoxl4 51 
6236 6336 36 B 63 54h 113 
6252 6352 52 Saxon xe 4 139 
6272 6372 G2 Sxse xy 173 


Through Bolts are not included with Bo-Arrow Arms and 
Bayonets on account of the great variation in the lengths re- 
quired for the different classes of poles used. Three bolts are 
needed for a Single or Double Arming Set and two for a Corner 
Bayonet, the proper size being about 2 inches longer than the 
top diameter of the pole. When bayonets are used with single 
arms, two washers are required per arm; without bayonets, 
three washers. No washers are needed with double arming 
sets or corner bayonets. 


Determination of Wire Spacing 


The proper wire spacing for a given voltage depends on 
so many local conditions that it is impossible to determine it 
properly without detail information. Roughly, 24-inch is the 
usual spacing for 6,600 volt lines, 36-inch for voltages of 11,000, 
22,000 and 33,000, 52-inch for 44,000 and 72-inch for 66,000 
volts. There is a very marked tendency toward the use of a 
liberal wire spacing and many companies are now using much 
larger spacings than they formerly considered adequate, es- 
pecially for 11,000 and 22,000 volt lines. 


Peirce Presteel Racks for 
Vertical Secondaries 


oO 
oO 
oe 
a 
e 
< 
oO 
QD 
> 
x 
uy 
° 
a 
=e 


No. 258 


Racks with 8-inch 
spacing between 
line wires. 


No, 358 


Vertical arrangement of the wires of 
Secondary Mains as provided by Peirce 
Secondary Racks attached to poles in 
place of Secondary Cross-Arms has won 
its way by sheer merit. 

Fully 50% of secondary construction 
during 1919 employed this method. 

It is cheaper in first cost. 

It can be maintained at !4 the cost of cross-arm construction. 

Wood arms are at their highest efficiency the day they are 
put up. From that day they rapidly decline. The PEIRCE 
SECONDARY RACK will last a lifetime. 

It reduces hazard. It eliminates inductive drop. 

By its use cut-ins and cut-outs may be made at a mmimum 


No.2 250 


Standard Racks 
with 4-inch spac- 
ing between line 
wires, 


of time and expense. 


Latest Method of Low Tension Distribution 


Gai Ne hee ee eae TOON. GALT A LOG 53 


Peirce Wireholders 


A typical application of 
Peirce Secondary 


Racks 


Peirce Presteel Horizontal 
House Brackets 


Peirce Wireholders come completely assembled with insula- 
tors; packed in wooden boxes with insulators protected by 


corrugated fiber sleeves. They get to the job with minimum 
Some engineers prefer a horizontal to a vertical house labor and absolutely no breakage. 


No. 343 


bracket. They have the same strength as the No. 253 Vertical Their first cost is less than that of any other form of wall 
Bracket, which six years’ experience has shown is strong enough bracket. 
for all but the heaviest service wires. Peirce Wireholders, being universal in their application, 


require a smaller stock in your storeroom. 

They largely eliminate tie wires, thus saving both labor and 
material. 

You can’t afford not to take advantage of these savings. 


No. 243 


The Peirce One- Ninety Wireholder 


Fits the Hand Like a Screwdriver 


No Tools 

ae Required. 
i) Avabe 

A Few Turns 
and It’s In! 


WI)h/ since, 
ij y ff! Wy, ws 
Ws yp! Y 
Z_ 


For most work, no tie Or line wire may be run Or line wire may be 

ce eae wires are required. through hole in insula- placed in outer groove 

No. 353 The line is simply run tor and tie wire placed and tie wire run 

SY ‘ ‘ through the hole in the in outer groove. through the hole —de- 

These brackets are more than twice as strong as the ordi- insulator. sirable when long runs 
ar ; 


nary malleableiron brackets under any kind of loading— vertical, 

horizontal or side stress. They are suitable for service wires 

up to and including No. 6 in any reasonable length span. Ask Pettingell-Andrews Company for a catalog showing 
For larger sizes of conductor and exceptional span, these the complete line of Hubbard Pole Line Hardware and Peirce 

brackets can be furnished in a heavier type. Construction Specialties. 


ot 


POR leNe Grell AUNG Da Reeve 


C2Oe IRE ZAGN <Y. 


O-B HIE-TENSION 
PORCELAIN INSULATORS 


HE economic importance of the insulator on a 
transmission line is too often overlooked until 
after the system is put in operation. Although 
the cost of the insulators is only a small portion 

of the total investment, a single failure may interrupt 
service and affect the earnings of the entire system. 
There are many systems where the loss from a few inter- 
ruptions only will amount to more than the cost of the insulat- 
ors on the entire line. 
Most transmission companies recognize this, and The Ohio 
Brass Company has spent much time and money investigat- 


O-B Hi-Tension Insulator Factory at Barberton, Ohio 
(Main Office at Mansfield, Ohio) 


ing operating conditions, so that improvements could be made in 
the insulators to give the best possible returns for the cost. 
Not only have designs been improved, but also manufacturing 
methods; while at the same time a most careful inspection and 
means of testing have been adopted with a view of eliminating 
line trouble just as far as possible. Inspection is carried on at the 
various stages by a corps of carefully trained men, the inspection 
being particularly rigid on the ware as it comes from the kilns. 

After the ware has been inspected on delivery from the kilns 
it undergoes the electrical tests. On all pin type designs, the 
tests are so run, that the parts and the assembled insulator 
receive a super-spark stress. This test is carried on for at least 
two minutes, and weeds out material that a test at just below 
flashing voltage could never get. This test will in no way 
damage good material, but if manufacturing conditions are not 
properly developed, will result in prohibitive losses. 

The electrical characteristics of the apparatus are such as to 
combine to a large extent the advantages of normal frequency, 
oscillator and the impact method. This effect is obtained by 
properly balanced characteristics in the testing apparatus. 

In the case of many O-B designs, including all types of sus- 
pension insulators, additional routine electrical tests are pro- 
vided to measure and eliminate any pieces having the least 
possible leakage through the material. The greater part of 
the slightly porous material can not be detected or eliminated 
by a normal or high frequency test, but may be detected and 
eliminated by these additional tests. Systematic work in the 
insulators which show 


manufacturing produces 


exceedingly small losses on O-B electrical tests, although they 


processes 


are the most severe in practice. 


Cementing 
In general, the assembly of multipart insulators has not been 


given the attention it deserves. This, as well as the design, is 


of the utmost importance, for if not properly carried out, many 
of the insulators are sure to crack after several years’ service, 
necessitating a reinsulation of the system. 

Line trouble which has been attributed to electrical dis- 
turbances is in many cases actually due to insulators which have 
cracked. Trouble from this source has even been greater than 
that from porous material. This cracking is due largely to 
stresses set up through uneven temperature in the insulator, 
aggravated in some instances by stress due to cement expansion 
or by the internal stress in the material itself, caused by improper 
cooling. Much can be done to eliminate this through a good 
body composition and proper cooling in the kilns, but it is 
recognized that the maximum stress developed when the 
insulator is suddenly cooled, as in a rain shower, may be sufficient 
to destroy an otherwise perfect part. 

Under operating conditions, the porcelain in aninsulator, even 
in cases where there is no metal or cement present, is likely to work 
under a very narrow margin of safety for the maximum stress set 
up where one side of the insulator is hot and the other side cool. 

The larger the insulator the more difficult it becomes to 
keep the stress down and there are many cases in practice where 
large heavy insulators have failed from cracking in much less 


time than smaller lighter insulators. It is a fairly easy matter 


° : 7 iP ENTS | 
: S 7, 
: Rime 
| : 1 
\ = 
\ BEN rm 
8 
| 
| 
| | 
i | 


to relieve stress in the insulator, providing mechanical reliability 
is sacrificed. This, however, is not possible in a modern line 
as the hazard is entirely too great. 

Fortunately, a method has been developed which not only 
provides an elastic joint and thereby keeps down a dangerous 
stress, but furthermore this joint is such that the mechanical 
reliability is greatly increased. To secure this result, a coated 
sanded surface is provided on the porcelain, the bearing coming 
on the tips of the sand grains. These sand grains, having a 
very much reduced area as compared to the porcelain body to 
which they are attached, take up practically all of the dis- 
tortion, thereby removing the main body from serious stress. 


Cele NTIG RATE aes ATL TOON 


Cea SAS Ore 


DO, 


This improvement is the most important of any which has 
been applied to insulators within recent years, and is worth 
all the time and expense required for its development, as it 
greatly increases the life or reliability of the insulator. 

Up to the present time, this has been the only practical way 
developed of reducing the stresses which tend to crack an 
insulator under operating conditions and at the same time 
which does not sacrifice the very essential mechanical reliability. 


Suspension Insulators 


Suspension insulators are assembled by The Ohio Brass 
Company under conditions of temperature and humidity such 
that the hydration of the cement is very complete. The bond- 
ing of the metal to the porcelain being accomplished at a high 
temperature tends to prevent undue stress in the porcelain on 
hot days, as the difference between the operating temperature 
and the assembly temperature is very small compared to what 
it would be if the assembly had been carried on at normal or 
low temperature. 

Owing to the greater expansion rate of the metal over the 
porcelain, the assembly at higher temperature tends to place the 
porcelain in compression at normal working temperatures. 
This condition is particularly favorable, as porcelain is many 
times stronger in compression than in tension or shear. 

To assemble properly at high temperature requires a very 
complete equipment, otherwise the results are doubtful and 
likely to be unsatisfactory. 


Rating 


When requesting recommendations for insulator service, 
give accurate information regarding maximum working voltage, 
climatic conditions, geographic location, length of line, size of 
conductor, and amount of power on the system. 

An insulator which might be entirely suitable for one locality 
may be entirely too small for another locality, as fogs, salt 
deposits, prevalence of heavy rains or thunder storms might 
cause too many interruptions to service through the spilling 
of the insulator. 


Commercial Insulator Tests 


In Fig. 1 is shown the method of testing an assembled 
insulator, Fig. 2, that of testing a part and Fig. 3, that of test- 


TRANSFORMER: 


Figure 2 


Transformer 


Figure 1 


ing a wall bushing. There are, of course, many pieces which 
do not come directly under these classes, but the tests are so 
applied as to be effective in weeding out material which might 
break down under service conditions. 

With but very few exceptions, all pieces are tested to at 
least a flashover stress for two minutes. The O-B testing 


equipment is very complete, including transformers which will 
give 400 K. V. to ground, oscillators and high voltage leakage 
or megger equipment. 

A spark gap, with needle points whose distance apart is 
accurately adjustable, is kept on the high voltage leads of our 
testing set as a continual check on the accuracy of the measure- 
ments as made with the volt-meter on the primary circuit. 


Leakage Distance 


The leakage distance, as given in the list for each insulator, 
is obtained by measuring the insulator or drawing as indicated 
by the line D shown in Fig. 5. 

As the surface resistance varies directly as the length of the 
path and inversely as the width, it is evident that the length of 
leakage path alone does not represent the surface resistance of 


Figure 4 
an insulator, for the width of the path varies with the diameter, 
and is only uniform throughout the length in the case of a tube 
or cylinder. 

An insulator which has apparently a very small length of 
leakage path may be much more effective in preventing surface 
leakage than one having a much greater length of leakage path, 
if the design is such as to properly distribute the material, so 
as to keep surface stress down to a minimum. 

As the distribution of material is very important in giving 
an insulator a high surface resistance, O-B methods of manu- 
facture are developed along lines which insure proper shape in 
the parts. 


Arcing Distances of Insulators 


The voltage value necessary to cause an insulator to are 
from the tie wire to the pin can be closely approximated by 
measuring the insulator or a drawing as indicated in Figs. 4 
or 5 and referring to the A. I. E. E. Standard Spark Gap table. 
Actual tests will give slightly different results according to 
conditions, but by following out this scheme fairly conservative 
estimates may be made upon the arcing voltage. 

In Fig. 4 the sum of distances (A or D) +B +C gives the 
dry arcing distance, A or D being used depending upon which 
gives the shortest distance between the conductor and the 
lower edge of the top shell. In Fig. 5 the sum of A+B +C gives 
the arcing distance wet with the precipitation at 45 degrees 
with the vertical. 


Standard Insulator Threads 


The standard threading for both pins and pin holes is four 
threads per inch. 

Standard diameters for pin holes are 1 inch and 13 inches. 
These dimensions are the extreme diameters at top of pin and 
at small end of pin hole. 

Standard taper for pins and pin holes is 1-16 inch increase 
in diameter per inch of length. 


Glazes 


Brown glaze has been adopted as standard. 
can be furnished on special order, 


Other colors 


56 


- 


PoE TD Ne Geb lie sAwN DAs Bey a 


C70 Me PeAyN7 Y 


No. 9400 


No. 9404—6600 Volts 


O-B Pin Type Porcelain Insulators 


No. 10565 


No. 10387—4000 Volts 


Nos. 9890-11913—11,000 Volts 


Nos. 12849-12850—17,000 Volts 


No. 9403—6600 Volts 


No. 10044—13,000 Volts 


Nos. 1285 


1-12852—23,000 Volts 


Number 9400 | 10565 10387 94038 | 9404 9890 | 11913 10044 12849 12850 12851 2852 
*Generaluatings.\) liste ewes aes | 4,000 6,600 6,600 11,000 | 11,000. 13,000 17,000 17,000 | 23,000 23,000 
Heightainches mene eae ere ays Qe | 33% 3 3 3 4\%4 4°46 34) 4 4 41% 46 
Diameter overall, inches..............- 2 He, 25% 34 334| 3% 4M | 434 45% | 5% 519 W i 
Size pin hole) inches! seca eva ten 1 Ike S) 1 1 | 1 13% 1 1 1 13% 1 13% 
Mest: Voltawe serine rene eee oe ap err: | / 40,000 | 40.000 | 50,000 | 60,000 | 60,000 60,000 | 60,000 
Leakage Surface, inches..............-.. 31% 51 5 414) 414} 8 | 9Y4 914 1134 1134 
Arcing Distance, Wet, inches............ 34 1) 14 114) 1% 154) QYy QYy| Qik Qe 
Minimum Length Pin, inches............ 4 de | 4 4 4 5 5 
Approximate Net Weight per 100, Ibs. ..... 56 | 81 86 125 111 28 Qi 213 338 See 500 500 
Approximate Weight Packed per 100, !bs...| 63 92 100 142 128 S20 s20 244 373 367 600 600 
Approximate Number in Package ....... 550 355 300 230 230 | 100 | 100 125 75 75 40 40 


*See “Rating” on page 55 


CALANG ISR Ae lie woe WeAt Te vOrN CATT ATL. O G 


x 


O-B Pin Type Porcelain Insulators 


No. 12546—27,000 Volts No. 11622—35,000 Volts 


N 


0. 12855—55,000 Volts 


No. 11623—45,000 Volts 


No. 12552—66,000 Volts 


Number | 12546 11622 11623 12855 12552 
aGencraleRating Volts mean er) a tenes tie, oe een ee | 27,000 35,000 45,000 | 55,000 66,000 
letehitmin ches seer ey irs i Seis ons a Ne ee 54 614 i 9 11 
Winmeteroverallyinchesmay yin: oo ney penance 76 9 10% 12 13 
SIZeRD Ugo le winches ie erry hak ht dae of ee NNN ns ae | 134 13 134 13% 13¢ 
Test Molla cene wn winner vette i) Steet cli es tain toe Maia il 100,000 125,000 145,000 175,000 190,000 
ie kaos SUTtACe NIG Chest ena iy emit. ie tee ee nua 11% 17 Q14 2534 34.14 
mucins Distances Wet, mches!.) 69.5.4 0.0.00.....548.) 434 534 7 8l4 914 
enim Lengthy Pinessnchess sn ee ee ke ee 6 6 74 9 11% 
Approximate Net Weight per 100. lbs. ....................... | 620 925 1140 1600 3200 
Approximate Weight Packed per 100, Ibs...................... 876 1350 1700 3000 4070 
Approximate Number in Package.........:.................. | 6 6 6 3 3 


*See “Rating” on Page 55 


58 


PoKe DT IeNe Geel AL NT Dee have 


CLO MISE AASN GY 


O-B Suspension Porcelain Insulators 
(Patented) 


The O-B Suspension Insulator contains many refinements 
not found in other insulators of this type. It consists of a one- 
piece porcelain disc with concentric circular ribs or petticoats 
on the under surface, a galvanized cap casting which is securely 
cemented to the projecting head of the porcelain disc, and a 
galvanized steel center pin cemented in a pin hole which extends 
well into the head of the porcelain disc. 

In this design, as in all O-B high-efficiency design Insulators, 


the electrical and mechanical characteristics are properly 
balanced. There is maximum insulation, reliability and 


mechanical strength for the length and weight of the Insulator. 

The Insulator may consist of one or of several Units, the 
number depending upon line voltage, local conditions, and the 
If, when the 
line is erected, a future increase in voltage is contemplated, it 


factor of safety or reliability desired by the user. 


is particularly advantageous to install Suspension Insulators 
as additional Units can be added at any time. 

On Type B Insulators, an efficient and convenient connection 
between Units is made by the patented ball and socket joint. 
Each Insulator Unit is an exact duplicate of the others. 

Type D Insulators have the clevis connection between units. 
All dimensions are in accordance with the standards adopted 
by the insulator manufacturers. 

Diameters of all insulators shown below, 10 inches. 


All 


metal parts are galvanized. 


Type B, Form 1—Patented 


Two Units No. 25620 connected; 
lower unit partly sectioned 


Type B, Form 2—Patented 


Two Units No. 25622 connected; 
lower unit partly sectioned 


Type D, Form 3—Patented 


Two Units No. 25623 connec 


ted; 
lower unit partly sectioned 


Number Length Weight Weight Number Length Weight | Weight Number Length | Weight Weight 
of Complete Complete Complete of Complete Complete | Complete of Complete Complete Complete 
Units | Inches Lbs. | Packed, lbs. Units Inches Lbs. Packed, lbs. Units Inches ibs. Packed, lbs. 
| a= = = 
1 5 10 18 1 434 9 18 1 538 9 18 
g 10 20 28 g 91% 18 26 Q 1034 18 26 
3 15 30 38 3 1444 Q7 36 3 | 1614 il 36 
4 20 40 48 4 19 36 45 4 21% 36 45 
5 Q5 50 59 5 2334 46 55 5 267% 46 55 
6 30 59 69 6 281% 55 65 6 3214 55 65 
Ve 35 69 80 a 334% | 64 74 a $754 | 64 74 
8 40 79 90 8 38 | 73 84 t 43 73 84 
9 45 s9 | 99 9 403, | 82 4 9 483% | g2 | 94 
10 50 99 110 10 471% 91 103 10 5334 91 103 


CaleNgliene Asin Sock AL LOIN CAT A LOG 59 


O-B Porcelain Strain Insulators 


Multi-Fin—6600 Volts Link—11,000 Volts 


No. 25314 
A sturdy design particularly suited to heavy work. 
Ultimate strength is in excess of 20,000 pounds. See data below. 


, ; : on ‘iew—No. 11940 3ack View—No. 11° 
yee Patent Applied! fora 1500! Volts Front View o. 1194! Back View—No. 11940 


Used for insulating spans or dead-ending. Strand wire can 
easily be threaded as holes are practically straight. 
It is provided with a ball-edge which increases its ruggedness. 


Lest Violttacemearieers Str trac 0G lena an) eee ela 70,000 
Masamauiiae Working Woad...4 46)... tees ee 2,500 lbs. 
Wltimate Stren oiling 20. oh coc. Sat. . Soy aoe 8,000 Ibs. 


Drameterzoislnculatoceeeee eee 734inches 
{ 


See other data below. 


No. 25009 

A rugged Insulator for guy wires and dead ends. Has long 
leakage path and is made of high tension porcelain (wet-ware). es ee ees 

Rounded corners permit rough handling without breakage. 

Strands are interlocked so they cannot become separated 
should Insulator be broken. 

Holes for strand are straight, making installation easy. 

Ultimate strength (tested with high strength steel strand) 
over 15,000 pounds. See data below. 


Type X—Patented—1500, 3000, 6600 Volts 


Nos. 12841—12843—12845 
For installing any of the strain insulators on this page except Nos. 25314 and 11630 


Use of fittings, with single Insulator or with several in 
series, gives a positive connection and permits easy renewal of 
damaged Insulators. 

Bolts are provided with lead sleeve for bearing on porcelain. 

Ultimate strength for the 5-16 inch bolts is 8,000 pounds; for 
the 34-inch bolt, 11,000 pounds. Larger bolts can be furnished 
to meet special conditions. 


Strength of castings is greater than that of bolts. 
Marerorced eteel = castinzetuiallcable iron alllcherarcies 
NS eae ae Te 60 4650 Bolts ure forged steel; c isting mal eable iron all shet geeGee 
° : ‘ ; : Opening in clevis is 13-16 inch; diameter clevis bolt, ’2 inch. 
se ° sé oO OUWV wires ¢ ad- oO as long = 6 2 5 

. sed se sage ae W ae and dead me Has ee Eye in Nos. 12843 and 12844 is 114 x 114 inch. 
eakage path and is made of high tension porcelain having high ce ee 

es ! ; : . 2 ! y : Seoess} 12841—End Bolt % inch Diameter, with Clevis 
mechanical strength. 12842—End Bolt 3¢ inch Diameter, with Clevis 

a : ORAS > AR TTA. ae re 

Strands are interlocked so that they cannot become separa- 12843—End Bolt >ig inch Diameter, with Ey« 


5 12844—End Bolt %¢ inch Diameter, with Eye 
ted should insulator be broken. 12845—Intermediate Bolt, % inch Diameter, with Casting 


Holes for strand are straight, making installation easy. 12846—Intermediate Bolt, ?g inch Diameter, with Casting 
See data below: Sockets can be furnished for any size cable. 
Number 25314 25009 | 12458 13431 11629 | 11630 | 11940 
“GCeaeall Neonates MOMS a c,ors og Oa same meee es Osean scenes ane 6600 1500 1500 1500 3000 | 6600 11000 
Diameter, ITI CHES Mane cRNRR Rete RL coke Laney a 27 een me ah 4g 35% | 31% 35% 436 534 | 734 
eno thieinChesty practtee te eer ey ok crt | Ae, 7 4 | 316 4 5 6% sO 
Diameter strand hole, inches)... 04. 4..ac5 106... eee: 34 We | 5% 1 58 5% We 
Approximate Net Weight per 100. lbs.................... 450 175 | 113 138 200 335 400 
Approximate Weight Packed per 100, lbs................. 490 185 123 178 250 410 | 565 
Approximate Number in Package.................--.... 70 240 260 260 100 50 30 


*See “Rating” Page 55 


60 PLE IV Ne G Leb ANE DER Ea Sc 0 ovine Noa 


O-B Porcelain Wall Insulator O-B Low Voltage Outlet Bushing 


Type B, Form 1 — 30,000-60,000 Volts 2300-6600 Volts 


Especially adapted for primary meter house outlets, ete. 
Bushing is furnished complete with flange as shown. 
Can be furnished in special lengths, either end or both. 


O-B Porcelain Wall or Roof Insulators 


This insulator consists of a corrugated porcelain disc cement- 
ed on a heavy corrugated porcelain tube. May be cemented 
in the wall or in a small housing built on the side of the wall. 
In any case the corrugated surface of flange should face towards 


the outside. 
Similar designs with flanges up to 30 in. diameter may be 


furnished on special order. 
No. 10649—11,000 Volts 
30}% inches long, 11 inches maximum diameter 


| | at : 
| *General Leakage Net Weight | Maximum Length 


No. Rating Surface Each Diameter Overall 
10048 | 30000. | 19 in. 22 lbs. 12 in. 14 in. 
10049 50000 | ~~ Qh in. Q4\lbs. | 14 in. 14 in. 
10050 | 60000 | 30 in. 29 lbs. 14 in. | Q0 in. 


* See “Rating” page 55. 


Special O-B Porcelains 


METAL FLANGE 


The photograph below conveys some idea of the capacity 
of the O-B factory for producing special shapes. 
If you encounter special conditions take your problem up 


No. 10651—22,000 to 33,000 Volts 
301% inches long. Diameter flange, 12 inches 


; iM ‘ a : The above insulators are typical O-B Wall or Roof Insulators. There are various 
with O-B Engineers. They can help you to a solution. standard designs to take care of voltages up to 100,000. 


- 


Ce a ee 


149.14 40 40 40.05.49:49. 4g AG.td Mata g ty ng tata tanar gad 


Ca eNe WER eAr eS ole ATT i OeN 


CATALOG 


Regularly furnished white glazed. 


The actual working voltage, thickness of wall, floor, etc., 
and whether for indoor or outdoor service, should be specified 


on all orders or inquiries. 
High Tension, Form 1 


O-B Porcelain Bushings and Tubes 


High Tension, Form 2 


Dimensions in Inches 


Test 


Dimensions in Inches Test 
Number Voltage 
A B Cc D E 
10880 3% | 4 4 3 i 30,000 
10881 316 2 4 3 5 30,000 
10882 4g 14 5 3 5 30.000 
10883 44 2 5 3 5 30,000 
10884 % | wo 54% 3 5 30,000 
10885 5 1 WBZ 54% 3 5 30,000 
10886 5 | 2 5% 3 5 30,000 
10887 38% | 1% 4 4 6 40,000 
10888 3% | 2 4 4 6 40,000 
10889 44yy | 1% 5 4 6 40,000 
10890 44 ope 5 4 6 40,000 
10891 5 t 88 54% 4 6 40,000 
10892 5 14 51% 4 6 40,000 
10893 is 2 54% 4 6 40,000 
10894 314 14 4 6 8 55,000 
10895 384% | 2 4 6 8 | 55,000 
10896 4lyy | 1% 5 6 8 | 55,000 
10897 ERA 2 5 6 8 55,000 
10898 5 3 54% 6 8 55,000 
10899 5 14 5% 6 8 | 55,000 
10900 5 2 54% 6 8 55,000 
10901 3% 14 4 8 10 70,000 
10902 414 14 5 8 10 70,000 
10903 4ly 2 5 8 10 70,000 
10904 5 } 14 5 8 10 | 70,000 
10905 5 2 54% 8 10 70,000 
10906 5 3 514% 8 10 70,000 
10907 4g 14 5 10 12 85,000 
10908 5 14 54% 10 12 85,000 
10909 5 P 54% 10 12 85,000 
10910 5 3 54% 10 12 | 85,000 
10911 414 4 5 12 14 100,000 
10912 5) 14 54% 12 14 100,000 
10913 5 Q 5% 12 14 100,000 
High Tension, Form 3 
a 
rl 
aC B 
ab 
Dimensions in Inches Test 
Number Voltage 
A B xe | D 
12880 3 Q | 1 234 20,000 
12881 3 Qe 14% | 34 20,000 
12882 3 3 | Q | 334 20,000 
12883 5 g | 1 | 234 30,000 
12884 5 Ql 4 | 1 1 2 | 314 30,000 
12885 5 38 | Q 334 30,000 
12886 i Q 1 234 40,000 
12887 7 Ql6 14% 314 40,000 
12888 7 3 xf 2 334 40,000 
12889 9 Q 1 Q34 50,000 
12890 9 Qe 1% 314 50,000 
12891 9 3 4 334 50,000 
12892 11 Q 1 Q34 55,000 
12893 11 Q6 1% 34 55,000 
12894 11 3 | Q 334 55,000 
12895 13 2 a al | BA | 60,000 
12896 13 Q6 1% 34 60,000 
12897 13 3 2 334 60,000 


Number Voltage 
See | G D E 
10914 34% 1, =| 4 3 5 30,000 
10915 31% Q 4 3 5 30,000 
10916 4ly WA es | 3 5 30,000 
10917 414 Q 5 3 | 5 30,000 
10918 5 3 516 3 5 30,000 
10919 5 ye | 5% 3 5 30,000 
10920 5 2 54% 3 5 30,000 
10921 34% 14 4 4 6 40,000 
10922 314 Q 4 4 6 40,000 
10923 44 1\% 5 4 6 40,000 
10924 Aly Q 5 4 6 40,000 
10925 5 3 5% 4 6 40,000 
10926 5 14 5% 4 6 40,000 
10927 5 Q 51% 4 6 40,000 
10928 3% 14 4 | 6 8 55,000 
10929 3% Q 4 6 8 55,000 
10930 414 Wy | 5 6 8 55,000 
10931 414 2 | 6 6 8 55,000 
10932 5 3 51% 6 8 55,000 
10933 5 14 54% 6 8 55,000 
10934 5 Q 5% 6 | 8 55,000 
10935 8% | 1% 4 Sn ee U0) 70,000 
10936 Ave | 114 5 8 | 10 70,000 
10937 4yz | 5 Se 70,000 
10938 5 | 14% 5% 8 10 70,000 
10939 5 2 5% 8 10 70,000 
10940 5 3 5% See 70,000 
10941 AMG 1K 5 LOMMae 1 85,000 
10942 5 14 5% 10 | 12 85,000 
10943 5 Q 5% 10 12 85,000 
10944. 5 | 3 5% 10 12 85,000 
10945 4y%e| 1% 5 12 14 100,000 
10946 5 1\% 5 12 14 100,000 
10947 5 Q 54 | 12 | 14 100,000 
High Tension, Form 4 
Dimensions in Inches Test 
Number Voltage 
A B C D 
12898 3 2 1 | @6 10,000 
12899 3 Qe 1% | 8 10,000 
12900 5 2 1 Qe 20,000 
12901 5 Qls 1% 3 20,000 
12902 5 3 ) 314 20,000 
12903 7 Q 1 Qe 30,000 
12904. 7 Q4 1144 3 30,000 
12905 7 3 | 2 314 30,000 
12906 9 2 f~ “at Ql 40,000 
12907 9 Qe 144 3 40,000 
12908 9 3 2 314 40,000 
12909 11 Q 1 Qe 50,000 
12910 11 Qe 1% 3 50,000 
12911 11 3 Q 3% 50,000 
12912 13 Q 1 | 24 55,000 
12913 13 Ql4 1% | 383 55,000 
12914. 13 3 Q 3% 55,000 
12915 15 2 1 Q6 60,000 
12916 15 Qe 1% 3 60,000 
12917 15 3] Q 314 60,000 
12918 17 2 1 Qe 70,000 
12919 17 QW 14 3 70,000 
12920 17 3 | @Q 344 70,000 
12921 19 Q 1 Ql 75,000 
12922 19 Qe 1% 3 75,000 
12923 19 3 Q 314 75,000 


62 PEP TUN Geel =A N DIRE WV SC Os IRR aa Ney 


O-B Suspension and Strain Wire Clamps Suspension Eyes 


Furnished with or without discharge horns. Discharge 
horns are desirable under certain conditions, as they cut down 
the time lag for excessive surges and increase the factor of 
safety of the insulators. Castings are malleable iron, galvanized. 


No. 13499 


Type B, Form 1—Suspension Wire Clamp—Patented 


Swivel connection between body of clamp and socket pre- 
vents severe bending strains on center pin of insulator which 


would otherwise be caused should the transmission wire break. 
For use with Type B Suspension Insulators. 


aoa 13(44.mm) 
With Discharge Horns I 
= = TDCi Caawer Cable Ses 
Number — - — - Weight Packed No. 11547 No. 12939 
Minimum Maximum per 100 
auie = Peas 3 Used for attaching Type B Suspension Insulators to towers. 
{ - co} e 
11549 | 34 in. 4% in. 504 Ibs. ; ‘i 2 : 3 
11551 3% in. 1% in. 607 Ibs. Made of drop forged steel, galvanized. 
11644 2% in. Wie 840 Ibs. 
Without Discharge Horns é 
SS eee ae ee ee Suspension Hooks 
11538 346 In. 6 in. 417 Ibs. 
11540 4 In. 14 in. 524 Ibs. 


; No. 11546—For Type B Suspension Insulator—Malleable Iron 
No. 11542—Suspension Strain Wire Clamp—Patented No. 13394—For Type B Suspension Insulator—Forged Steel 


No loose parts need be handled in installing, as hook bolts 
‘an be turned back out of the way while wire is being seated in 


groove. 
Without Discharge Horn 
hes vi *Diameter Copper Cable Insulators Weight Packed 
Minimum Maximum Used With Per 100 
11541 346 In. Vg in. Type B 646 
10755 346 In. V6 in. Type D 540 
11542 946 In. | 146 in. Type B 697 
11040 4% in. 4 in. Type D 591 
11543 3 in. 34 in. Type B 859 
11328 34 in. 34 in. Type D | 753 
With Discharge Horn 
11946 34 In. Yo in. Type B 786 
11947 34 in. 1 in. Type D 680 No. 13393—For Type D Suspension Insulator—Malleable Iron 
11949 4 in. 116 in. Type B 837 
tees 746 in. "6 in. Tye p | ee This hook is used for attaching Suspension Insulators to 
95% “gs \n. | v4, \N. ype | IIe : : . 
11953 Sa | earn ope D 893 towers. The opening of the hook is closed by the insulator 


‘ap, thus preventing unhooking after installation. Galvanized 
* When aluminum cable is used, an aluminum protecting sleeve about ‘4% in. thick eee J 
should encircle cable in clamp and diameter should be measured over sleeve. finish. 


Cae Nees eee lel i OuNe CTA TAL TOG 63 


Ball Socket Eye Insulator Strain Yokes 


Form 1—Patented 


No. 11544 
For attaching Type B Suspension Insulators to Type E 
Strain Clamps or other clamps having a clevis. Weight, packed, 
111 pounds per 100. 9-16 in. hole. Malleable iron, galvanized. 


Ball Socket Clevis 


No. 11686—Upper Yoke No. 12931—Upper Yoke 
No. 11688—Lower Yoke No. 11688—Lower Yoke 


For particularly heavy strains at dead ends, ete., or for 
double construction at railway crossings, two strings of Type B 
Suspension Insulators may be connected in multiple by means 
of these yokes which are provided with discharge horns. Upper 


No. 11545—with 5 in. Bolt 
For attaching clamp having an eye to the ball center pin of 
Type B Suspension Insulators. Weight, packed, 145 pounds 
per 100. Malleable iron, galvanized. 


Suspension Clevis 


yokes furnished with clevis fitting at top, if desired. 
Castings malleable iron, galvanized. 


Tlorm 2—Patented 


No. 12937 
For attaching Type B Suspension Insulators to towers. 
Weight, packed, 115 pounds per 100. Cast steel, galvanized. 


Strain Links 


No. 12933—Upper Yoke 
No. 12935—Lower Yoke 


Suspension Eyes are used on Upper Yoke while Ball Socket 
No. 13230—Straight No. 13231—Twisted Eyes are used on Lower Yoke for attaching insulators. These 
Used for attaching Suspension Insulators to towers, strain connections give greater flexibility than the Form 1 Yokes. 
yokes, etc. Made in one piece of drop forged steel, galvanized. Castings are malleable iron, galvanized. 


64 


P EerebIoNe Gebel = AGN DRG aes ce Os Vighe Ae Ne 


TYPE FP-7 OIL CIRCUIT BREAKER 


Fig. 1. 


Triple-Pole, Single-Throw, 4500-Volt, 100-Ampere Oil Circuit Breaker 


HE Type FP-7 oil circuit breaker is for outdoor 
service and is especially adapted for pole top 
mounting. It is for use on alternating current, 
for sectionalizing feeder systems, cutting out 
transformers, and all classes of service requiring a reliable 
outdoor breaker to be operated under load within the 
limits of its rating. In many instances the use of a Type 
FP-7 oil circuit breaker in connection with a transformer 


will obviate the necessity of bringing high tension lines 
into the building. 

Breakers listed are all non-automatic. They are 
manually operated and the open or closed positions of 
the breaker are indicated by raised letters on the frame. 
Throwing the handle over to “‘on’’ closes, and to “‘oft” 
opens the breaker. These breakers are rated at 4500 volts, 
100 amperes, and either 7500 or 15,000 volts, 200 amperes. 


CoHONe Deh aes AS tl ON CoA TA LOG 


TYPE FK-20 OIL CIRCUIT BREAKERS 


For Industrial Service up to 300 Amperes and 2500 Volts 


YPE FK-20 oil circuit breakers are intended 
primarily for use with induction motors in 
industrial applications. They possess features 
which render them particularly well suited for 

such service. Under proper supervision they are suc- 
cessfully used in some of the more dangerous branches of 
industrial service, such as textile and flour mills, gas 
works, coal mines, in the pumping and refining of oil, 
ete., where inflammable dust or gases are present. 


Fig. 1 
Type F K-20 Oil Circuit Breaker with Series Trip Coils and Under Voltage Device 


Automatic breakers may be effectively used as branch 
feeder cutouts in the place of enclosed fuses, especially 
on 2500-volt work in textile mills and similar installations. 

While Type FK-20 oil circuit breakers are totally 
enclosed for the purpose of rendering them dustproof, 
they are not waterproof and should not be used out of 
doors unless protected by shelter or housing. 

Type FK-20 oil circuit breakers are not recommended 
for use out of doors, or indoors when directly connected 
to incoming lines where they will be subjected to surges 
or other voltage disturbances, unless they are protected by 
lightning arresters or other surge protective devices. 
Breakers so used require a greater safety factor of insula- 
tion than breakers normally used indoors in industrial] 
applications. 


Features 


Safe—All live parts 
entirely enclosed. 

Reliable — Excellent 
electrical and mechan- 
ical design, not requir- 
ing operation by skilled 
labor. 

Durable — Strong 
construction, insuring 
long life of all parts. 

Flexible — Combina- 
tions to meet wide 
range of conditions. 

Compact—Few oper- 
ating parts and these 
arranged in systematic 
manner. 

Simple — All parts 


supported by frame, 
making installation 
easy. 


Fig. 2 
Type FK-20 Oil Circuit Breaker with Series Trip Coils and 
Under Voltage Device with Auto Transformer. 
(For use on 220-, 440— and 550—volt circuits) 


Mounting 


The breaker can be mounted on a wall, post, or other 
flat surface, or on a machine by the use of brackets or 
suitable supports. 


Higeeo! 
Type FK-20 Oil Circuit Breaker with Series Trip Coils and Under Voltage Device with 
Voltage Transformer. 
(For use on 2500-volt circuits) 


Capacity 


Type FK-20 oil circuit breakers are built in three capa- 
cities, non-automatic and automatic, for use on two-,* 
three-, and four-wire systems up to 2500 volts, as follows: 


Amperes Poles = pe. Throw 
60 Triple and Four Single 
200 Triple and Four Single 
300 — Triple Single 


*For use on two-wire circuits a triple-pole breaker is recommended and connections 
to middle pole omitted. 


66 


Pobre ONaGe hi De ASN Den ehay Ves 


CEOTME ra Ae Nes 


INDUCTION VOLTAGE REGULATORS 


HE economic generation and distribution of 

electric power requiring the use of large generat- 

ing units, the establishment of generating 

stations of great capacities, the transmission 

of power at high voltages to step-down transformer sub- 

stations, and the distribution of this power to the con- 

sumers at relatively low voltages, will result in general in 

unsatisfactory voltage variations, due to the variations 

in the load of the various feeders, unless means 
provided for its adjustment. 

The voltage of a generator, or of a number of generators 


are 


in the same station, 
may automatically 
be maintained con- 


Secondary 
Large Coll 


Bushing Board 


; 7 


ee 


j 
stant, regardless of 


the load, at the 
station bus or at 
any point on the 


transmission 
tem, by means of 
a generator voltage 
regulator, but this 
arrangement is not 


SVs- 


Clamping 


Widdlé Coil 


 Syna//Col/ 
Large Col} 


Short Gircult Wins 


on separate, circular, concentric sheet iron cores, one of 
which is stationary, and the other arranged so that it 
may be partially rotated within the former. The series 
or secondary winding is arranged in slots on the inside cir- 
cumference of the stationary core,and the shunt or primary 
winding in similar slots on the outside circumference of 
the movable core, and the variation in the feeder voltage 
produced by the regulator is entirely due to the change 
in the angular positions of these cores. 

This construction is shown in Fig. 1, which is a view 
of a partially disassembled single-phase induction regulator. 
The windings on 
both stationary and 
movable cores are 
in effect polar wind- 
ings. With a given 
pole of the primary 
opposite a similar 
pole of the second- 
ary, the regulator 
will boost the line 
voltage, but 
lower it if opposite 


Pinion OperatingMotor 


Caor__ 
Guard 


Gear 


~Bottom 
Primary 


Nameplate 


| Holder 
Motor Support 
Worm 

Limit Switch 


will 


Ley! Segment 


* Screws —Frimar Cable Pace 
satisfactory for the a a dissimilar pole; 
control of individ- Fig. 1. Disassembled View of a 2300-Volt Single-phase Induction Regulator for Distributing Circuit and the change 
ual feeders. One from “boost” to 


feeder may serve a business district, while another from 


the same generator may serve a residence district, and 
since the amount of compensation required depends on 
the load, and since the peak of the load occurs at different 
times in different feeders, the regulation of the individual 
feeder is essential if good regulation is to be obtained on 
the entire system. ; 

In order to meet different requirements and satisfy 
varying conditions, the General Electric Company has 
designed and developed the Induction Voltage Regulator. 


All induction regulators are variable ratio transform- 


ers, or rather compensators, having two separate and 
distinct windings, primary and _ secondary, connected 


respectively across, and.in series with the feeder to be 
controlled. The product of the volts and amperes on 
the generator or busbar side is always equal to the product 
of the volts and amperes on the feeder side, less the small 
loss in the régulator itself. 

Induction regulators are built single-phase or poly- 
phase, and are designated by the type letters IRS for 
the single-phase, IRQ for the quarter-phase, IRT for the 
three-phase. Although used principally for the control 
of lighting circuits, they are equally well adapted to 
power circuits, either single-phase or polyphase. 

In all induction regulators manufactured by the 
General Electric Company, two windings are arranged 


“lower” is gradual as a given primary pole is rotated 
through the angle between a similar and a dissimilar pole 
of the secondary. 

Induction regulators may be designed for installation 
in the station as shown in Figs. 2 and 3 or may be modi- 
fied for outdoor installation as shown in Fig. 5. Station 
type regulators may be designed for hand operating, remote 
control motor operation or for automatic operation, the 
last method being the most used. Regulators for outdoor 
installation are furnished for automatic operation. 

A special regulator has also been developed for the 
control of small feeders. This regulator is designated as 
the Type PIRS regulator and is shown in Fig. 4 

This type of regulator is built in the single-phase 
design only. It is entirely self-contained, 1. e., the regu- 
lator itself together with all of the control and operating 
mechanism is assembled in a cast iron tank. This regu- 
lator is operated and controlled without any current- 
making or -breaking contacts or devices. The operating 
motor is running continuously and the operation of the 
voltage relay is entirely mechanical. The regulator is 
simple in design, the various parts are of substantial and 
rigid construction, ample facilities are provided for lubri- 
cation andit will, therefore, require a minimum of attention. 

Ask Pettingell-Andrews Company for a catalog show- 
ing the complete line of Induction Voltage Regulators, 


Cala Ne Ulva yon LeAnn IZOUN@ GAr TT) API O-G 


Fig. 2. 


Tig. 4. Single-phase Automatic 2300-volt 


Single-phase Automatic Induction Regulator Fig. 3. Three-phase Automatic Self-cooled 
with Auxiliaries Mounted on Panel Induction Regulator 


Pole-type Regulator 


Fig. 5. Single-phase Automatic Regulator Arranged 
for Outdoor Installation 


68 


Polo 18 NeGahelte by APNG Dahle es 


ClOsVRE ew NY 


DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 


The Standard of Quality 


INGLE-PHASE and_ three-phase transformers 
of sizes 200 ky-a. and smaller, of any voltage 
rating, are designated as ‘Distribution ‘Trans- 
formers.” This deals with single-phase and three- 

phase distribution transformers for 25- and 60-cycle 
circuits, and for operation on standard high voltages of 
460 to 34,500 volts inclusive, and low voltages for stand- 
ard lighting, power and secondary distribution voltages. 

As no single form of construction can be ideal for this 
wide range in sizes and voltage ratings, several forms of con- 
struction have been developed and standardized for GE 
Distribution Transformers. Each of these constructions is 
particularly adapted to the zone wherein it is standard. 

The constructions selected for single-phase transformers 
utilize the two-,three- or four-part distributed core. (See Fig. 2.) 


Fig. 1, Type H Distributed Core Distribution Transformer, 
25-KV-A., for 2300-115 Volts 


Various coil constructions have been developed to meet the 
particular requirements of designs depending upon unit size 
and voltage rating. In the larger sizes, circular coils of either 
disk or cylindrical form are used on account of their greatly 


Fig. 2, Various Kinds of Cores 


Fig. 2A. 


Two-Part Distributed Core 


Partially Assembled Fig. 2B. Three-Part Distributed Core 


superior mechanical qualities, and the facilities they give for 
rigid mechanical support. 

GE Three-phase Distribution Transformers utilize three- 
legged cores with one phase of the winding assembled on each leg. 
The windings are cylindrical or approximately cylindrical in form. 


Vig. 2C. Four-Part Distributed Core 


Four-Part Distributed Core 
Partially Assembled 


Fig. 2D. 


Single-Phase Transformers 
INSULATION 


It may truthfully be said that a transformer is no better 
than its insulation, for upon this material depends not only the 
safety and reliability of the apparatus alone, but the life and 
property of the user of electrical appliances. The selection 
of insulating material for GE Distribution Transformers has 
been made after years of scientific research and careful study 
of the service performance of the thousands of GE Distribu- 
tion Transformers in operation. Only material best fitted for 
the particular requirements is used. Each piece of insulation is 
subject to thorough electrical and mechanical tests and rigid in- 
spection before it enters into the construction of the transformer. 

All wire used in Type H transformers is insulated in our own 
factories by skilled workmen, thereby insuring the dependa- 
bility of its insulation. 

A prominent feature in GE Distribution Transformers in 
smaller sizes is the special mica insulating pad between low 
tension and high tension circuits. This composite insulation 
has the necessary qualities for standing up under all electrical 
conditions, and is subjected to a high potential test many 
times greater than the voltage of the transformer. A similar 
pad is used between ends of the high-voltage coils and the core. 
In these transformers, therefore, the high-voltage winding is 
practically surrounded by fireproof insulation. 

In transformers using form-wound coils the insulation 
between the high-voltage and low-voltage windings, and be- 
tween the high-voltage winding and core, depends upon the 
voltage and type of winding. 

For transformers using disk high-voltage and cylindrical 
low-voltage coils, the insulation between the high-voltage and 
low-voltage windings is composed of oil ducts and a cylinder 
of “573 compound” which, in addition to its high insulating 
properties, possesses great mechanical strength. The insula- 


CARNE Neale bee) TOONe, CUA TALE O'G 


69 


tion between the high-voltage winding and the core consists 
of specially treated fiber barriers and oil ducts. 

For transformers using disk high-voltage and disk low- 
voltage coils assembled interleaved, the insulation between 
the high-voltage and the low-voltage windings is composed of 
fiber barriers and oil ducts—the number of barriers and dimen- 
sions of the ducts varying with the voltage. The insulation 
between the high-voltage winding and the core is composed of 
oil ducts and a cylinder of “573 compound.” As sections of the 
low-voltage windings are placed at both ends of the coil stack 
next to the core, the ends of the high-voltage winding are well 
insulated from the core. 

The insulation between the low-voltage winding and the 
core in all core-wound transformers is made up from a specially 


Fig. 4 
Partially assembled Type H Transformer showing 


Mica Pad. Experience has shown the necessity of 
Fireproof Insulation in Smaller Sizes in order to in- 
sure protection of the Low Voltage Circuit in case 
of burnout from abnormal operating conditions. 


treated fiber which possesses suitable insulat- 
ing properties and is not injured by the 


mechanical stress incident to the winding 
process. 


WINDINGS 


Transformer windings are of two general 
types, those wound directly on the core, 
and those wound on forms, and _ later as- 
sembled on the core. Windings made 
directly on the core have the advantage 
of rigid support, the insulations being 
placed in final fixed positions by the 
winder and not disturbed or distorted by 
any assembly process. These advantages 
are especially desirable in the small units, as 


Tig. 5 
Diagrammatic sketch of 
high-voltage leads pro- 
jected into one plane 
showing improved way 
of bringing out the leads 
and electrically con- 
necting the coils. This 
exclusive feature of GE 
Transformers means 
greatly increased pro- 
tection against high volt- 
ages breaking through 
to the low-voltage cir- 
cuit. This arrangement 
gives maximum distance 
between high-voltage 
leads and low-voltage 
winding and also inter- 
poses the impedance of 
one-half the high-volt- 
age winding toa voltage 
disturbance entering 
from the high-voltage 
line. 


here the clearances required by economical design are smallest. 
The coils of the three-part distributed core transformers are 


wound on the core. 


usually wound directly over the core insulation. 


Fig. 3A Coil Structures 


One-half of the low-voltage coils are 


The high- 


Ba) Low vorcage 


oi Oucts 


towvoxage 


nign.olage 


Lowvoltage 


NighVoltege 


voltage coils and outer low-voltage coils are in turn wound over 
the inher low-voltage coils, with an insulating pad between all 
coils (Fig. 5). The windings are provided with suitable oil 
ducts for uniform cooling—the number and location of the 
ducts varying with the size of the transformer. 

The coils of the four-part distributed-core transformers 
may be either core-wound or form-wound, depending upon the 
size and voltage of the transformer. Those wound on the 
core are wound in the same manner as those of the three-part 
distributed core transformers described. Form-wound coils 
are described in succeeding paragraphs. 

In the interleaved-disk type of winding (Fig. 3A) both high- 


High 
Voltage 
Winding 


Low. 
Voltage 
Winding 


Fig. 3B Coil Structures 

and low-voltage coils are wound in the form of disks assembled 
with the high-voltage and low-voltage coils interleaved. These 
coils are wound on a form and assembled over a cylinder of 
“573 compound,” this cylinder furnishing the foundation for 
the winding. This is later assembled over the core and also 
serves as an insulation between the windings and the core. 
The coils are separated from each other by means of specially 
treated fiber spaces, furnishing generous oil ducts between coils 
for cooling purposes. Between high- and low-voltage windings 
and where required between coils of either winding, one or 
more fiber collars are inserted, with oil ducts between. 

In the disk-cylinder type of winding (Fig. 3B) the low- 
voltage coils are cylindrical in shape and are wound on a cylin- 
der of “573 compound.” The high-voltage coils are disk coils 
assembled over another cylinder of the same material, which 
is in turn assembled over the low-voltage winding with an oil 
duct between the low-voltage winding and the outer cylinder. 

In the cylindrical construction both high- and low-voltage 
coils are cylinders wound on forms and assembled concentrically, 
with generous oil ducts between coils. 

On the coils of all GE Distribution Transformers where 
experience has shown the necessity of extra insulating the end 
turns, this insulation is applied in the form of extra insulation 
on the conductor, with the addition in some cases of extra layer 
insulation. 


CORES 


The two-part distributed cores are assembled from straight 
laminations so that the center leg is of cruciform section and 
the two outer legs of rectangular section. The end laminations 
are inserted after the windings have been assembled. These 
cores are strongly clamped by means of structural steel parts 
which are also utilized in securing the core and coils in the tank. 

The three- and four-part cores are built up using “‘L” shaped 
laminations assembled in such a manner as to secure a compara- 
tively large center section, with magnetic circuits radiating at 


Be ais leNe Gate ie Le AING Daisy Ves 


CZOUMEL CAR NT, 


Core and Coils of Type H 
Single-Phase, 60-Cycle, 
2300-Volt Transformer, 
Using Three-Part Dis- 
tributed Core 


Core and Coils of Type H Single- 
Phase, 60-Cyele, 2300-Volt Trans- 
former Using Four-Part 
Distributed Core 


120 degrees or 90 degrees, respectively. These laminations 


are interlocked in the center section. The use of “L” shaped 
punchings materially improves the designs by reducing the 
number of joints in the magnetic circuit to two, and thus 
materially lowers the exciting current. The three-part core is 
so assembled that a nine-sided center leg is produced which 
gives practically a circular form on which the coils are wound. 
In the four-part core a center leg having four sides with well- 
rounded corners is secured so that the winding makes no sharp 
bends, either nearly circular 
depending on the details of design of the core. The outer lamina- 
tions closing the magnetic circuits are assembled after the 
winding operation is completed. The three-part core is clamped 
by means of metal plates at either end of the core, these plates 
being held together by a bolt passing through the center of the 
core. In the four-part core, metal straps around the outer 
legs serve to hold these clamping plates together. 


and is circular or in form 


These 
clamping plates in addition serve as a means of clamping the 
core and coils in the tank. 


DRYING AND FILLING 
The windings of GE Distribution Transformers are care- 
fully dried under vacuum, and filled under pressure with an 


insulating compound. This process not only removes all 


Type H Subway Transformer 
in Cast-Iron Tank 


Large High-Voltage Type H, orm L, Transformer 


moisture from the insulation and 
seals the windings against the en- 
trance of moisture, but also makes 
the winding a solid mass, thus giving 
it greater mechanical strength and 
In the 


wound transformers this treatment 


heat conductivity. core- 


is applied to the complete unit, 
consisting of core and coils. In the 


form-wound transformers the com- 
plete winding is treated as a unit 


before assembly on the core. 


TANKS 


Tanks for GE Distribution Transform- 
ers are all of strong weatherproof construc- 


tion. The smaller units are assembled in 
smooth cast-iron tanks. As the size of the 


Large High Voltage Type H Dis- 
tributed Core Transformer 
in Corrugated Steel Tank 


transformer increases more radiating sur- 
face is required, This increase in radiating 
surface is obtained by means of corruga- 
tions in the sides of the tanks. In the large: 
sizes of distribution transformers, the tanks 
are made up of corrugated sheet steel sides, 
cast-welded into the cast-iron base and top 
rim. These tanks are all provided with cast- 
iron covers having overhanging lips and 
with a gasket between the tank and cover 
preventing the entrance of dust and moist- 
ure. Sizes which are suitable for pole- 
mounting are provided with lugs for attach- 
ing hanging hooks. All tanks are provided 
with lugs for lifting the complete trans- 


former. 


Transformers having voltages below 
19.250 volts have the leads brought 
through bushings located in the overhang- 
ing pockets. The leads for transformers of 
higher voltages than this are brought out 


through non-puncture bushings located in 
The joint 
between the bushing and cover is made 


the cover of the transformer. Large Tope Bl Diateouted Core 
Transformer in Corru- 

; : gated Steel Tank 

weatherproof by means of suitable gaskets. : 


Type H Subway Transformer in 
Corrugated Steel Tank 


Calm Ne lohan laws vt AS ONE CVArT: Avis. O°G 71 


Three-Phase Transformers 


The insulation, drying and filling process, tanks and bush- 
ings are in general the same for three-phase transformers as 
for single-phase transformers. 

WINDINGS 

Windings for three-phase distribution transformers follow 

the same general practice as for single-phase. 
CORES 

The cores of the three-phase transformers are made up of 

laminations assembled to give three vertical legs, one phase 


winding being assembled on each vertical leg. The cross- 


cle ds a che he 
os aoe WY) Rey 
eon 


i¢ 
‘ i 


Core and Coils of Type HT Transformer 


section of these legs is rectangular for the lower voltages and cru- 
ciform for the higher voltages. The core is clamped by struct- 
ural steel parts which, in addition to serving as core clamps, 


serve as a means of fastening the core and coils in the tank. 


Type HT Transformer in Corrugated Steel Tank 


Oils 
The registered trade name TRANSIL when applied to 
transformer oil sold by the General Electric Company indicates 
that such oil has characteristics that make it suitable for use 
in transformers manufactured by the Company and for which 
it is recommended. It further indicates that the high quality 


is uniformly maintained as verified by means of periodic tests 
on samples of oil as shipped. 

Because of this fact, and as the quality of oil used in 
transformers has such a direct influence on the life and success- 
ful operation of same, it is obviously impossible for the General 
Electric Company to recommend any oil other than TRANSIL 
for use with transformers manufactured by them. 


Auxiliaries 
SUSPENSION HOOKS 


All transformers suitable for pole-suspension are provided 
with suspension hooks which may be attached to the transform- 
er by means of bolts engaging lugs cast in the transformer tank. 


CUTOUTS AND FUSES 


GE Distribution Transformers should 
suitable cutouts. 


be protected by 
The type of cutout is determined by the 
voltage of the circuit and the amount of current to be inter- 
rupted. The General Electric Company manufactures two 
types of cutouts for transformers of distribution sizes and 


voltages. These are: the plug type and expulsion type. 


Plug Cutout 
Cat. No. 104227 


Expulsion Type 
Cutout for 
Voltages above 
6600 


Expulsion Type Cut- 
out for 6600 
Volts 


EXPULSION TYPE 

The expulsion type cutout is suitable for installation on 
the cross-arm and is used for voltages and currents higher than 
those for which the plug type cutout is suitable. One type of 
expulsion cutout consists of a box of treated ash with hinged 
door and a tubular fuse holder which is supported on a por- 
celain fastened to the door, making connection with the line 
through springs when the door is closed. Upon opening the door 
the fuse holder is automatically disconnected from the circuit. 

A card holder is provided on the bottom of the box just beneath the 
gas outlet of the fuse holder. When the fuse blows, the expulsion of the 
gas either punctures the card or forces it out of the holder, thus indicating 
a blown fuse. This indication may be seen from the ground, making it 
unnecessary for linemen or inspectors to climb the pole to determine if the 
fuse is blown. 

These cutouts are suitable for use on circuits of 6600 volts and below, 
100 amperes and less. 

A modification of this cutout is made for circuits of 15,000 to 45,000 
volts and currents up to 50 amperes. Although no covering is provided 
with this cutout it is suitable for outdoor installation. 

Details and prices furnished by Pettingell-Andrews Company. 


72 PB PT NG EGG | AGN DORE Wiese CeO a iB ae Ne 


WATTHOUR METERS 


Thomson Direct Current Watthour Meters Direct Current Astatic Watthour Meters 


Types C-6 and C-7 Front-Connected Type CS-3 Front-Connected Metal Cover 
Dull Black Finish Dull Black Finish 
HESE meters are made for direct current cir- The Type CS-3 is an astatic watthour meter for direct 


cuits. They have extremely high torque, light current service and is especially designed by an astatic 

weight moving element, small commutator arrangement of the armature and field coils for operation 

gravity control brushes and adjustable shunt with accuracy in the presence of stray fields. They can 
field coil. They can be furnished with pressed glass covers be furnished back connected; prices on application. — 
and for back connection, prices on application. 


TYPE GC-6, 100 to 105, 106 to 110, TYPE GC-6, 200 to 210, 211 to 220, 
111 to 115, 116 to 120 VOLTS, 221 to 230, 231 to 240 VOLTS, met . 5 
TWO-WIRE TWO-WIRE 100 to 105, 106 to 110, 111 to 200 to 210, 211 to 220, 221 to 230, 
115, 116 to 120 VOLTS 231 to 240 VOLTS 
= ——— —— ——— == ——————— TWO-WIRE TWO-WIRB 
Cat. No. | Amps. | Cat. No. | Amps. | ee ee ——————— —— ——— 
_— =| Cat. Cat. | H. P. | 
| No. Amps. No. | Rating Amps. 
s7594 5 | 37614 | 5 14% cig Abe 
37595 | 10 | 37615 10 2 | 
37596 | 15 | 37616 | 15 3% 195737 | 15 | 195748 4 15 
37597 25 37617 25 7 195738 Q5 | | 195749 Vi 25 
| 195739 50 195750 | 15 50 
37598 50 37618 | 50 15 195740 5 195751 20 5 
37599 | 75 | 37619 75 20 | 
37600 100 37620 100 | 25 195741 | 100 | 195752 | 25 100 
37601 150 | 37621 150 40 195742 150 | 195753 40 | 150 
| | 195743 200 \| 195754 50 200 
37602 | 300 || 37622 300 | 80 195744 | 300 \} 195755 | 80 300 
37603 | 600 37623 600 160 | | 
ati 195745 400 195756 | 100 400 
: j —_ 9 7 195746 600 195757 | 160 600 
TYPE C-6, 200 to 210, 211 to 220, TYPE C-7, 500 to 550, 551 to 600 ae a Bae PDs at lle ies a F al 
221 to 230, 231 to 240 VOLTS VOLTS, TWO-WIRE 
THREE-WIRE 200 to 210, 211 to 220, 221 to 230, 500 to 550, 551 to 600 VOLTS 
— ee ———————— ——————————— 231 to 240 VOLTS : 
] l LP THREE-WIRE TWO-WIRE 
Cat. No. Amps. Cat. No. Amps. Rane ah. ze ew Sees se ee = 4 
- —— = oe 7 7 . ay Cat. No. | Amps. \ Cat. No. | H. P. Rating Amps. 
37604 5 37625 10 5 i 2 | | 
37605 10 37626 15 7% 195759 | 15 196300 10 15 
37606 15 We pate! 25 15 195760 | 25 196301 | 15 25 
ee Be . ee 2 : 195761 50 196302 | 30 | 50 
37607 25 | 37628 50 30 195762 | 15 196303 50 15 
37608 50 | 37629 15 50 | | 
37609 75 37630 100 60 195763 100 | 1963804 | 60 100 
STOO sisi 100 37631 150 100 195764 | 150 196305 100 150 
195765 | 200 196306 | 125 | 200 
37611 150 37632 300 200 195766 | 300 | 196307 200 300 
37612 300 37633 600 400 | | 
a Sa wae = see et 195767 400 | 196308 250 | 400 
: ie A ; 196309 | 400 600 
Note—Always state normal operating voltage of circuit when ordering. | 


Approximate shipping weight, all voltages 5 to 50 amp. inclusive, 1 in a box, 26 lb., —______— . $$ — 
2 in a box, 55 lb.; 75 amp. 1 in a box, 35 lb.; 2 in a box, 69 Ib.; 100 to 600 amp., ; ae 3 
1 in a box, 48 lb. Note—Always state normal operating voltage of circuit when ordering. 


For further information ask Pettingell-Andrews Company for bulletin on this subject. Approximate shipping weight all capacities and voltages, 60 lb. 


CoRENGICRVAT lee Seas OPN CAST AUT OG 73 


Single-Phase Watthour Meters 


Type I-14 (For House Service) 
Front-Connected, Metal or Glass Cover 
Dull Black Finish 


This meter is a distinct advance in the art of design- 
ing and manufacturing watthour meters operating on the 
induction principle. It is of pleasing appearance and 
simple construction and fills the need for a meter of low 
initial cost and small expense of maintenance and testing. 


110 VOLTS 


25-30 Cycles 40-133 Cycles 


Amps. a 7 gt = : a 
Cat. No. Cat. No. 
5 152860 151942 
10 152861 151943 
15 152862 151944 
Q5 | 152863 151945 
50 152864 151946 
75 152865 151947 
100 152866 151948 
150 152867 151949 
200 152868 151950 
300 152869 151951 
220 VOLTS, 2-WIRE 
25-30 Cycles 40-133 Cycles 
Amps. : - == 
| Cat. No. Cat. No. 
5 152870 151952 
10 152871 151953 
15 | 152872 151954 
Q5 152873 151955 
50 152874 151956 
75 152875 151957 
100 152876 151958 
150 152877 151959 
200 | 152878 151960 
300 | 152879 151961 


220 VOLTS, 3-WIRE 


25-30 Cycles 40-133 Cycles 


Amps. ae — 
Cat. No. Cat. No. 
| 
5 152880 151962 
10 152881 151963 
15 | 152882 151964 
25 | 152883 151965 
50 | 152884 | 151966 
75 152885 | 151967 
100 | 152886 151968 
150 | 152887 151969 


Meters listed above are self-contained, that is, require no instrument transformers. 
When the currents to be metered exceed 300 amperes, 2-wire, and 150 amperes, 3-wire, 
current transformers are necessary, or when the voltage of the circuit is more than 600 
volts, both current and potential transformers are required. In such cases meters for use 
on the secondary of transformers should be ordered, designating the meters by catalogue 
numbers and ratings as given below. 


Meters for Use with Instrument 
Transformers 


2-WIRE 


Cat. No \ Amperes Volts Cycles 
| 
188640 5 110 25-30 
188641 5 110 40-133 
188642 255 220 | 25-30 
188643 5 220 | 40-133 


3-WIRE (FOR USE WITH DOUBLE PRIMARY AND SINGLE SECONDARY 
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS, 800 AMPERES AND BELOW) 


Cycles 


Cat. No. Amperes | Volts 
188642 | 5 | 220 25-30 
188643 5 220 40-133 


3-WIRE (FOR USE WITH TWO CURRENT TRANSFORMERS, WHERE 
CAPACITY EXCEEDS 800 AMPERES) 


Volts | 


Cat. No. | Amperes Cycles 
188644 | 5 220 | 25-30 
188645 5 220 40-133 


For 3-wire transformer rated circuits 800 amperes and below, the 2-wire meter, Cat. 
No. 188642 or 188643 is used with a double primary and single secondary 5-ampere wind- 
ing current transformer. For circuits above 800 amperes, the 3-wire meter, Cat. No. 
188644 or 188645 is used with two single primary transformers. 


These catalogue numbers cover the meter only and do not include transformers which 
should be ordered in addition giving complete rating. Unless otherwise specified meters 
when ordered with transformers will be calibrated and furnished with suitable register 
to read directly the primary energy. These meters may be used on circuits the voltage of 
which is not more than 10 per cent. above or below the rated voltage of the meter. When 
ordering meters for voltages outside of these limits the normal operating voltage must be 
specified. 

Approximate shipping weight, all voltages, metal cove 
1 in a box, 15 lb.; 2 in a box, 27 lb.; 4 in a box, 44 lb.; 
amperes, 1 in a box, 17 lb.; 2 in a box, 30 lb.; 4 in a box, 
1 in a box, 32 lb.; 2 in a box, 65 lb. ;4in a box, 95 Ibu 
35 lb.; 2 in a box, 67 Jb. 


These meters may be used on circuits the voltage of whic h is not more than 10 per cent. 
above or below the rated voltage of the meter. When ordering meters for voltages outside 
of these limits specify the normal operating voltage. 


rs, 5 to 25 amperes inclusive, 
in a box, 84 lb.; 50 and 75 
55 lb.; 100 and 150 amperes, 
200 and 300 amperes 2-wire, 1 in a box, 


Note. — Orders cannot be filled unless voltage given above or the operating voltage 
is given; also specify frequency of circuit. 


74 


PE eRe IN Gees ASN DERE ESV =S 


ClO sin ZAWNSY: 


Polyphase Watthour Meters 


Type D-6 (For House Service) 
Front-Connected, Metal or Glass Cover, Dull Black Finish 
25-133 Cycles 


This meter is designed for the specific purpose of 
measuring the energy of a polyphase circuit, the meter- 
ing of which involves the use of two or more single- 
phase or their equivalent. This — so-called 
polyphase meter is a combination of single-phase meters 
in one case, acting on one moving element and recording 
on a single dial. The electrical element is similar to that 
of the I-14 meter having identical electrical character- 
istics but adapted for measuring the energy delivered 
through any of the following circuits: 38-wire, 3-phase; 
3-wire, 2-phase; 4-wire, 2-phase; 4-wire, 3-phase. 


meters 


440 VOLTS 


110 VOLTS 
Car. No. | 
Motor 
= ae = is F Kw. } ne Pp: 
2 Ww; Ree Sapacity ating 
ie! 4-Wire EM OSISS Non-Ind. | 2- and 3- 
3-Wire | DePhase Loads | Phase 
2-Phase | 
| | 
| | 
172255 172307 5 1 1 
172256 172308 10 g Q 
172257 172309 15 3 33 
172258 | 172310 25 5 5 
172259 172311 | 50 10 10 
172260 172812 | 75 15 15 
172261 172313 | 100 20 | 20 
172262 172314 | 150 30 30 
| | 
220 VOLTS 
Cat. No. 
Motor 
7 - Kw. a P 
“Wire A , | Japacity ating 
Riles MeWine mvaperes | Non-Ind. 2- and 3- 
3-Wire 2-Phase | Loads Phase 
2-Phase 
172268 172315 5 2 2 
172269 172316 10 4 | 4 
172270 172317 15 | 6 6 
172271 172318 25 | 10 10 
172272 172319 50 20 20 
172273 172320 GS: 30 30 
172274 172321 100 40 40 
172275 172322 150 60 60 


Cat. No. 
Motor 
7 — “= Kw. HP. 
oie nan Amperes eee Boeke) z 
3-Phase, 4 
3-Wire 2 Phase eeuk ass 
2-Phase 
172281 172323 5 4 4 
172282 172324 10 8 8 
172283 172325 15 12 12 
172284 172326 Q5 20 20 
172285 172327 50 40 40 
172286 172328 75 60 60 
172287 172329 100 80 80 
172288 172330 150 120 120 
550 VOLTS 
Cat. No | | 
Motor 
<= S| | Kw. H.P. 
3.Wire swine | Aimmeres | SemAeny |] Rats 
3- se, 4-Wire > 
3-Wire 2-Phase | ieoads Ehase 
2-Phase | : 
172294 172331 5 5 5 
172295 172332 10 10 10 
172296 172333 | 15 15 15 
172297 172334 | 25 25 25 
172298 172335 50 50 50 
172299 172336 «oe 75 75 
172300 172337 100 100 100 
172301 172338 150 150 150 
220 A 127 Y VOLTS, FOUR-WIRE, THREE-PHASE 
re Pa ie Motor 
Cat. No. : Capacity H.P. 
Seats: ‘4Wire > aera es Nona Bey 
3-Phase Leads Phase 
172625 5 2 2 
172626 10 4 4 
172627 15 | 6 6 
| 
172628 25 10 10 
172629 50 20 20 
172630 75 30 30 
440 A 254 Y VOLTS, FOUR-WIRE, THREE-PHASE 
Cat. No. Motor 
2 Se es Kw. HEP. 
Capacity Rating 
Amperes Non-Ind. 2- and 3- 
4-Wire Loads Phase 
8-Phase 
172631 5 4 4 
172632 10 8 8 
172633 15 12 12 
172634 25 20 20 
172635 50 40 40 
172636 75 60 60 


Meters listed above are self-contained, that is, require no instrument transformers 
When the currents to be metered exceed 150 amperes, 3-wire, 3-phase; 3-wire, 2-phase; 
4-wire, 2-phase; and 75 amperes, .4-wire, 3-phase; current transformers are necessary; 
or when the voltage is more than 600 volts, 3-wire, 3-phase; 3-wire, 2-phase; 4-wire, 2-phase; 
or more than 600 /\ volts, 4-wire, 3-phase, both current and potential transformers are 
required. Insuch cases, meters for use on the secondary of transformers should be ordered, 
designating the meters by catalogue numbers and ratings as given on the following page. 


Watthour Meters of Switchboard Types. Information 
and prices furnished by Pettingell-Andrews Company on 
application. 


Calta NeiGhrAg 2S TeASI TONGA TA LO G 7: 


t 


Polyphase Watthour Meters (Concluded ) 


Type D-6 (For House Service) 
For Use with Instrument Transformers 
Front-Connected, Metal or Glass Cover, Dull Black Finish 
25-133 Cycles 


FOR THREE-PHASE THREE-WIRE, TWO-PHASE THREE- AND 
FOUR- “WIRE CIRCUITS 


Cat. No | Amperes | Volts Cat. No. | Amperes | Volts 
188633 5 110 188635 5 440 
188634 5 220 188636 5 550 


jaa june: janes rae Wire chistes 


FOR USE WITH THREE CURRENT 
AND TWO POTENTIAL 
TRANSFORMERS 


Only 


FOR USE WITH THREE CURRENT 
TRANSFORMERS ONLY 


1 ; : 

Cat. No. Amperes | Volts | Cat. No. | Amperes | Volts 

188637 5 190 / | 188638 | 5 220 A 127 Y 
|) | LOY 188639 | 5 440 A 254 Y 


The catalogue numbers cover the meter only and do not include transformers which 
should be ordered in addition giving complete rating. Unless otherwise specified, meters 
when ordered with transformers will be calibrated and furnished with suitable register 
to read directly the primary energy. These meters may be used on circuits the voltage 
of which is not more than 10 per cent above or below the rated voltage of the meter. When 
adoring: meters for voltages outside of these limits the normal operating voltage must be 
specified 


or cmate shipping weight all voltages, 5 to 25 amperes, 1 in a box, 34 lb.; 2 in a box, 


60 lb.; 50 and 75 amperes, 1 in a box, 45 lb.; 2 in a box, 85 lb.; 100 and 150 amperes, 1 in 
a box, 49 lb.; 2 in a box, 90 lb. 


Always ste ate, nature and frequency of circuit and if for 4-wire, 3-phase, give both 
“Delta” and “Y” voltages. 


To Central Stations 


The Automobile Division of the Pet- 
tingell-Andrews Company has special 


inducements to offer you on 


EVEREADY 


STORAGE BATTERIES 


YALE BULLDOG 
CORD AND FABRIC TIRES 


GE TUNGAR RECTIFIERS 


(For Battery Charging) 


Ask about the Special Offer 


TEST METERS 


HE question of periodical meter testing is of 
vital importance to every central station or 
isolated plant, since the revenue received 
depends upon the accuracy of the meters used. 

The use of the portable testing meter is recognized as the 
best and most efficient way of testing service meters. 
The time and labor saving features which result in 
increased efficiency are obvious. Moreover, the use of 
the portable test meter results in greater accuracy, as 
errors due to fluctuating voltage, load, personal errors, etc., 
are eliminated. The test meter combines in one standard 
several capacities covering a range from light load to 
full load, making possible rapid testing, since no time 
is lost in changing standards. In using the test meter 
constant load is unnecessary, since the only observa- 
tions required are the number of disk revolutions of the 
meter undergoing test, and the pointer indications of 
the meter before and after test. Personal errors of 
observation are practically eliminated. 


Type CB-5 Test Meter Type IB5 


Test Meter 


‘Type CB-5 (For Direct Current ) 


Cat. No. Amperes Volts | a aA 
= ————— _—— Pe 
156643 1/2/10/20/40 100-120 48 
ee Me lapy eee { 100-120 | ov 
156644 1/2/10/20/40 eran 48 
60646 5/10/50/100 100-120 50 
60647 5/10/50/100 ) LOO= 120 50 


) 200-240 § 


IB. 5 (Kor Alternating Current) 


Cat. No. Amperes Volts Cycles Ship. Wt. 
| s in Lb. 

152996 1 and 10 100-120 Q5—125 20 

152997 Land 10 j 100-120} 25-125 20 


7 200-240 5 


in Type IB-6 (For Alternating Current) 


Cat. No. Amperes Volts Cycles Ship. Wt. 
| in Lb. 
174925 | 1/5/10/50/100 100-120 25-125 Q4 
: § 100-120 / Sy FIDE ' 
174926 1/9107 50/100 | ) 200- 240 0s 25-125 24 


Note. — Orders aan give the Se RaTT ae voltage, and if for Alternating eure ine 
frequency of the circuit. 


=f 
o>) 


Poh Ne Ge ele ee eN De tey)\ as 


CeO sMSraAaN | Y. 


STATIONARY MOTORS 


For Alternating and Direct Current Circuits 


Selection of Motors 


N the following pages, space available permits only 
the listing of those stationary belted AC and DC 
motors in most common demand for general purpose 
uses. The standard types shown will meet the larger 

part of power requirements for industrial and miscella- 
neous motor drives. By means of slight mechanical or 


Type KT Riveted Frame 
Constant Speed Induction Motor 


electrical modifications, standard GE motors can be 
adapted to a large variety of machines. When either 
standard or special drives are involved our customers may 
count on satisfactory stock and service facilities backed 
by the designing, engineering and manufacturing resources 
of the General Electric Company. 

Since to secure the best results for motor drives the 
proper selection of starting and control accessories 1s 
indispensable, customers are urged to take advantage of 
our contact with the highly specialized GE Industrial 
Control Department in connection with the 
simpler as well as the more complex applica- 
tions requiring the correct combination of 
motor and accessory devices. 

In placing motor orders, the following information 
should be given: 

Type of Motor required. 

HP—speed and voltage (if motor is to be used on 
alternating circuit, also state frequency and whether for 
single-, two- or three-phase circuits). 

If service is direct current, state winding, i. e., shunt, 
series or compound. 

If motors are to be operated in situations exposed to 
excessive dampness, heat, acid fumes, etc., state con- 
ditions so that special provision may be made for proper 
motor enclosure. 

State accessories; (e.g. standard starting rheostat,) 
if provision should be made for long-distance or auto- 
matic control, push button start and stop, ete. 


Two- and Three- Phase Constant Speed 
Induction Motors 


Further data and prices 
on application covering 
other 60 cycle ratings and 
speeds as well as_ infor- 
mation on complete lines 
of 25, 40 and 50 cycle 
motors. 


60 CYCLES —TYPES * 


Type KT Form B Skeleton Frame 
Constant Speed Induction Motor 


KT” AND KQ” 


SPEED 


H.P. | _R.P.M. 
\ 1200 
34 1200 
34 1800 
1 1200 
1 | -1800 
1% | 1200 
1% | 1800 | 
2 1200 | 
2 | 1800 | 
3 1200 
3 1800 
5 1200 
5 1800 
7.5 1200 
7.5 1800 
10 900 
10 | 1200 
10 1800 
15 | 1800 
15 1200 
15 900 
20 1800 
20 1200 
20 900 
25 | 1200 
25 | 900 
30 | 1200 | 
30 | 900 | 
40 1200 
40 900 
50 1200 
50 900 


600 


FP-10—Oil Circuit Breaker with Con- 
duit Connection to Induction Motor 


VOLTS 


110—-220—44.0—550 
110-220—44.0—550 
110-220—-440—550 
110-220-44.0-550 
110-220-440—550 
110-220-44.0-550 
110-220-440—550 
110-220-440-550 
110-220-440—550 
110-220-44.0-550 
110-220-44.0—550 
110-220-44.0-550 
110-220—44.0-550 
220-440-550, 
220-440-550 
220-440-550 
220-440-550 
220-440-550 
220-440-550 
220-440-550 
220-440-550 
220-440-550 
220440550 
220-440-550, 
220-440-550 -2200 
22() 440-550-2200 
220-440-550-2200 
220)-440-550—-2200 
202-44.0—-550—-2200 
220 -440-550-2200 
2204405502200 
220-440-550-2200 
220 440-550-2200 


CR-1038—Switch with Conduit Connec- 
tion to Induction Motor 


OaHeNe eRe aAels S orAt Te eORN: ECTAY TACO G 


(ig 


Repulsion Induction Single-Phase Motors 
EypeseRl 


The Type “RI” Repulsion Induction Motor is designed for 
either constant or varying speed. “‘RI” motors will start and 
accelerate loads having 24% times full load torque. 

In starting direct from the line, Type “RI’’ motors take 
current approximately in proportion to torque. If desired to 
reduce current values during acceleration, Type CR-1025 
rheostats should be ordered. 

Standard motors may be operated on either 110 or 220 volt 
CR- 
1025 starters reduce the current at starting and are especially 
recommended for sizes 7144 HP and larger. 


circuits, by simply interchanging the lead connections. 


Type RI 4% H. P. Open Motor 


Standard double-pole, single-throw CR-1038 safety enclosed 
switch with two protective plugs provides overload but not 
under-voltage protection. ; 

Standard double-pole, single-throw CR-1035, FP-10 oil 
circuit breaker with overload trips provides overload and 
under-voltage protection. 

Type LM switch and CR-1025 resistance starter provides 
both overload and under-voltage protection. 


TYPE RI MOTORS—60 CYCLES 
110 OR 220 VOLTS CONSTANT SPEED 


HP Speed RPM 
yy 1800 
YY 1200 
\% 1800 
VV 1200 
34 1800 
34 1200 


1800 
1200 
1800 
1200 
1800 
1200 
1800 
1200 
1800 
1200 
1800 
1200 
1800 


CR-1038 Switch Conduit 
Connected to RI Motor 


Type LM Switch and CR-1025 
Resistance Starter with RI Motor. 


Commutating Pole Direct Current Motors 
Type Soh Ge 


Ratings and brief data on the new line of General Electric 
Commutating Pole, Direct Current Motors are given herewith. 
These motors are superior to machines of non-commutating 
pole design in operating characteristics, freedom from sparking, 
and, in general, as possessing a higher degree of all-day service 
efficiency. 

Iron sliding bases and starting rheostats are included with 
standard belted motors. Semi-enclosing or solid enclosing 
covers may be furnished on special order. The use of enclosing 
covers increases the temperature rise of motors to which they 
are applied and therefore modifies the open ratings. Belt 
tightener attachments, consisting of cast iron ring adjustable 
idler on pulley end, may be furnished on order. 


Type RC Open Motor 


Type RC Semi-Enclosed Motor 


TYPE “RC” MOTORS OPEN AND SELF-VENTILATED 
RATINGS 
STANDARD SHUNT OR COMPOUND WINDINGS 


| Speed (RPM) 


Frame | Horse- — —__—— 
No. power 115 & 230 v. 550 v. 
214 | % 1800 2000 
21B 34 1700 2000 
22 | 1 1700 2000 
23B 1 1150 | 1300 


Type RC Motor with CR- 
1000 Rheostat and Enclos- 


Type LM—4 Enclosed é 
ing Cover 


Lever Switch 


TYPE “RC” RATINGS (Continued) 


Speed (RPM) 

Frame Horse- —. — 

No. power 115 & 230 v. | 550 v. 
23B | 1% 1700 2000 
Q4 | Q 1700 2000 
25 | Q 1150 1300 
25 3 1700 | 1900 
26A 3 1100 1300 
26A 5 1700 1900 
Q7TA 5 1150 1300 
Q7A 714 1700 1800 
27B 1% 1150 1300 
27B 10 1700 1800 
Q9A 7% 850 900 
29A 10 1150 1250 
Q9A 15 1700 1800 


78 


PoE Te TeUNGG bs APNE ROE Wes COs vige eae 


TYPE RC RATINGS (Continued from page 77) 


Frame | Horse, = 2 —- pnccd (EM = 
No. Power 115 & 230 v. 550 V 
29 | 10 850 900 
29 | 15 1150 1250 
30 15 850 900 
30 | 20 1150 1250 
31B 20 800 875 
31 25 1150 1250 
32 25 800 925 
31B | 30 1150 1250 
33 | 30 775 900 
32 40 1100 1250 
34 40 750 875 
33 50 1075 1225 
35 | 50 700 825 


The temperature rise of Open, Semi-enclosed and Enclosed 
Self-ventilated Type “RC” motors, operating at full load and 
rated voltage will not exceed 50 deg. C. on any part except the 
commutator, which will not exceed 65 deg. C. For 115 volt 
operation, semi-enclosed and all enclosed non-ventilated ratings 
are slightly reduced in horse-power output (compared to open 
ratings). When such motors are required, application should 
be made to the General Electric Co. All Type “RC” motors 
are capable of 50% momentary overload. 


Industrial Control for Stationary Motors 


Space prevents listing but a limited assortment of GE 
Industrial Control Accessories for stationary motors. Cus- 
tomers should, in any case of doubt regarding proper selection, 
refer inquiry to the GE Industrial Control Department. We 


are ready at all times to assist in such inquiries. 


Control for AC Motor Circuits 


CR-1038 Starting Switch 
(For throwing small AC motors directly on the line) 


Involves excellent safety features, e.g., pulling owt the 
handle closes the switch, therefore accidental closing by push- 
ing or leaning on the handle is impossible. 

For single-phase motors, 60 cycle, 110 volt, 144 HP and below; 
220 volt, 3 HP and below. 

For two- or three-phase motors, 110/220 /440/550 volt, 60, 40 
and 25 cycle, 1/4 to 5 HP. 

The CR-1038 switch consists of a triple or four pole (for 
single-phase motors connections to the middle switch blades 
are omitted) single throw, quick make and break switch, and 
two special receptacles for the protective plugs. The switch is 
mounted upon a base and totally enclosed in a sheet steel case 
with operating handle projecting through the front. Switch is 
arranged for conduit wiring. Padlock can be provided to lock 
switch in open position. 


Small—Compact— 


Inexpensive—Substan- 
tial. Breakers may be 
provided with padlock 


for locking in open posi- 
tion. No exposed live 
parts. 

Type FP-10 oil circuit 
breakers are triple or four 
pole (for single-phase 
motors use triple pole 


breaker, leaving middle 
pole disconnected) single 


Type FP-10 Circuit Breaker 
For starting single or polyphase induction motors 
(Single-phase motors 110 volt, 3 HP and smaller; 
220 volt, 5 HP and smaller; polyphase motors 25 HP 
and under.) 


throw, non-automatic; 
triple or four pole single 
throw automatic, with double series inverse time 
limit overload trip; triple pole, single throw 
plain under voltage circuit breakers; and under 
voltage with provision for protective plugs. 

New Type CR-1034 compensators are designed 
for use in connection with induction motors 5 HP 
and above. This compensator is an advanced 
development of the CR-1034 Forms H and J, 
which have been in successful operation many 
years. The principal refine- 
ments in the new CR-1034 are 
pressed steel covers in place of 
“ast iron covers (a desirable 
feature especially for wall 
mounting), overload relays and 
no voltage-release; enclosed 
inside compensator case; emer- 


CR-1034 Compensator with Conduit 
Connection to Induction Motor 


gency stop button on the outside of compensator case. 


Industrial Control for DC Motor Circuits 


Fig. 9 Fig. 10 
Type CR-1000 Hand-Operated Starting Rheostats 
For DC motors, 4 to 150 HP—all commercial voltages 


Type CR-4015 Starter with Conduit Box 
Automatic Starter for 
DC motors—115 volts. 3 H.P. and smaller 
for 230 volts, 5 H.P., and smaller 


Type CR-3100 Controller—cover 
removed. Typical Drum Controller 
for frequent starting duty, 5 to 75 

H.P., 230 volts 


OeteNMieh Ate to LA Li OoNat GAT AL O-G 79 


FRACTIONAL 
HORSE-POWER MOTORS 


These small power motors combine at once a compact, 
attractive and sturdy mechanical design with high electrical 
efficiency. Both AC and DC types are readily adaptable for 
belted, geared or direct connection to the driven machine. 


TYPE SA MOTORS 

Type SA single-phase in- 
duction motors differ from 
the conventional design of 
induction motors in that 
the squirrel cage or second- 
ary is made the stationary 
member and the rotor the 
primary element. This type 
of design together with the 
skeleton frame design used 
in Type SA motors offer 
many advantages such as minimum weight for maximum 
capacity, better ventilation, hence lower operating temperatures, 
smaller physical dimensions and greater accessibility for inspec- 


Type SA, 325 Frame, 1/20 H. P., 1725 R. P. M., 
60 Cycle Wick-Oiled Bearing Motor 


tion. 

Type SA motors are made in sizes 1-12 HP to 14 HP inclu- 
sive, and are being successfully used for a very large number 
of motor applications requiring a motor of constant speed and 
a starting and maximum torque not in excess of 200% of normal 
full load torque. 


CONSTRUCTION 


The stator or squirrel cage is made up of a number of thin 
laminations of electrical sheet steel firmly riveted together 
between heavy copper end rings. The copper rivets used for 
riveting the laminations together form the electrical circuits 
of the secondary. 

The rotor or primary element is made of thin laminations 
pressed directly on to the shaft under hydraulic pressure— 
the winding is machine wound directly into the slots, and held 
firmly in place with slot wedges. The whole element is thor- 
oughly dipped into insulating compound and carefully baked 


Type SA, 147 Frame, 44 H. P., 1725 R. P. M., 60 Cycle 
Wick-Oiled Bearing Motor 


to insure thorough insulation. The shafts are made of the best 
quality of steel and are carefully ground to accurate size. 

The cast iron end flanges carrying the bearings are carefully 
finished and accurately machined to insure perfect alignment 
of the bearings and uniform air gap. 


The bearings are made of the highest grade phosphor 
bronze bearing metal and are of the straight sleeve type pressed 
into the bearing housings. Bearings are carefully aligned by 
reaming in place, thus securing perfect bearing fits. 

Metal caps and rings fitted tightly in the bearing housings 
make the bearings practically dust-proof. 

Proper lubrication is secured by means of wick-fed grease 
cups on all frames. he cups are filled at the factory before 
shipment. In refilling grease cups use Keystone grease No. 4 
or a good grade of unmedicated vaseline. 

The rotor carrying the primary winding is connected to the 
line circuit through two binding posts carrying brushes which 
bear on a collector ring or disk. On the back of the collector 
ring is mounted the automatic centrifugal switch which 
opens the circuit to the starting winding when the motor is 
nearly up to speed. 

All Type SA motors are carefully tested and inspected before 
shipping and are guaranteed for one year against defects in 
material or labor. 


MECHANICAL INTERCHANGEABILITY 


A feature of advantage to the manufacturer of motor driven 
devices is the fact that the general dimensions of Type SA 
motors and the corresponding Type SD direct current motors 
are the same. his feature enables the manufacturer to fur- 
nish his machines with either AC or DC motors without extra 
machine work or fittings. 


TYPE SA, ALTERNATING CURRENT 
60 CYCLES, SINGLE-PHASE 


| | Standard 


Pall Meas iodel Ship. | i Pulley S 
Full 2) Wt imensions Cat. TA 
eR Load 5 | ain | in In. No. 2 
Speed S Lb. Diam Adap- of 5 
RPM > Clutet (Ap- at ted to Pulley ze 
utch- | prox.) | Belt | Round 
8 | Center Belt | 
| Diam. | 


150 PER CENT. START (i. e., 50 PER CENT. OVERLOAD) 
Continuous Service 1800 R.P.M. Synchronous 


1/20 | 1725 110 20005 20 14% 3 | 191204 || 325 
1/20 | 1725 | 220 20006 20 14 36 | 191204 || 325 
| | 
1/12 | 1725 110 | 20007 Q4 |] 136 | Ye} 191213 |) 135 
1/12 | 1725 220 20008 Q4 | 13¢ | Ye | 191213 || 135 
1/8 1725 110 | 20009 26 1% | ly | 191215 || 137 
1/8 | 1725 220 | 20010 26 1% | Ye | 191215 || 137 
| | 
| | 
1/4 1725 110 20011 36 *Q14 *114 | 204389 || 147 
1/4 1725 220 20012 36 *Q14 | *1l4 | 204389 || 147 


150 PER CENT. START (i. e., 50 PER CENT. OVERLOAD) 
Continuous Service 1200 R.P.M. Synchronous 


| 

| | 
1/12 | 1140 | 110 | 20017 | 26 ! 1% Y% | 191215 || 137 
1/12 | 1140 | 220 | 20018 | 26 | 1% \% | 191215 || 137 
1/6 | 1140 | 110 | 20019 | 36 *216 | *114 | 904389 || 147 
1/6 | 1140 | 220 | 20020 | 36 *Q1e | 147 


*11; | 204389 | 


| 4 | 


*Pulley for Frame 147 has crowned face adapted for flat belt. Dimensions given for 
this frame are Pulley Diam. and Belt Width. 

Feet on 325 frame cast integral with frame. 

Feet on 135, 137 and 147 frames cast integral with end shields. 

Model No. does not include pulley. 


80 


PE TT EN G Bell ARN DIRGE Wes eceO neue Nes 


DIMENSIONS OF TYPE SA MOTORS 


Outline cuts are diagrammatic and do not show exact construction. 


Dimensions in Jnches 


S|InLb.| | Serie ful) at 
3 | SI AA BA) GUN) Moy ney |) ay Se ask Wa | aS |e P |W 
= = ba | | 
325 10144 (634 4% 41546 2% 34 [4 34) 5 | 358) 4 14/56] 1 V6 - .../2 34) 
135| 14 (8346/5346) 5 alee Ye |4 1%) 5546) 3 6] 4 H4e\21611 Ye) 174) 31124 
eraser | 
¢ 537 |Q9” | ly,|93K / 5/,| 15 5K, z } 
187) 1534 [8% 1534) 5 146/224 | 72 413461 5546) S15%61 4 Ve)P%6| 1 Le] 124] 92k 124 
145) 1934 8% 6%6 6134/3144 | 4 |4 % 64) 3146 |5 Y4|o%6) 1 14] 144)\313%6)14 
| | 
147| 22 914 6°46 613% 344|%|4h 64 31% 5 MP4 14) 1y4\4 1% 
149) Q7l6 934 6%6 6134| 314 i) ») 36 64 43% oD) mA %6| 1 Y| 14) 4 vA 1% 
; *Dimension D is approximate. It will never exceed but may be 1/16 in. below that 
given. 


+Dimensions G and H are approximate. They may vary 1/64 in. above or below those 


oo Type RSA Motors 


Type RSA motors are constant speed high torque motors 
and are especially suited for such applications as pumps, com- 
pressors, coffee grinders and meat choppers, and other devices 


Type RSA Motor 


requiring very high starting and maximum torque with low 
starting current. They are built in sizes ranging from 1-12 
HP to 34 HP inclusive. 

The RSA motor starts as a repulsion motor and at a pre- 
determined speed, a centrifugal device short circuits the com- 
mutator and the motor then runs as an induction motor with 
induction motor characteristics. The brushes are fixed, that 
is they are not lifted from the commutator but carry current 
only when the motor is starting. 


Construction 


The frames of all RSA motors are made of high grade cast 
iron and are made in one piece with the feet cast integrally. 
The end flanges carrying the bearings and oil reservoirs are 
held in place by four heavy through bolts. 

The primary core is made up of thin laminations of electrical 
sheet steel punchings securely riveted together and firmly 
fastened within the main casting. The primary winding is 
wound directly into the core slots by automatic winding ma- 
chines, 

The secondary or armature core is made of laminations 
pressed directly on to the shaft under great pressure to insure 
against displacement. The commutator is built up of hard 
drawn copper segments carefully insulated and is of the well- 
known axial type. 


Short Circuiting Mechanism 


This device is very simple and positive in action. A copper 
disk is pressed against the end of the commutator at a pre- 
determined speed, short circuiting it and causing the motor to 
run as an induction motor. 

The end flanges are very strong and rigid and are bolted 
to the main frame casting with four through bolts. 

Ring oil bearings are used on all sizes of RSA motors. 
Four leads are brought out from the motor frame and are 
arranged for interchanging for either 110 or 220 volt operation. 

RSA motors have a starting torque of 200-300% of full 
load torque with full line voltage and a maximum torque of 
200% of full load. The starting current is approximately three 
times full load normal running current. 

RSA motors are fully guaranteed against defects in material 


and labor. 
TYPE RSA OIL RING BEARING 
60 AND 25 CYCLES, SINGLE-PHASE 


| | Standard | 
3 | Pulley a 
3 | Ship. || Dimensions a eh 
a | : Wt. in In. Gate tal fs rs ge BE - 
he , : SS a aaa | oq Poll aaa 
HP 8 Gwe. iu Pee eerie: 
al (Ap- a ZS A Pulley ee Ze RA || FH 
= prox.) A = far) | & 3° 
a 3 a 
—Q 
eb Eat ~ TGONCY. GLE S| mae =e 
1/12 1140) 20081 35 2 +% | % | 191215 | 39 | 56 1.3 435 
i 1725 | 20077 35 Q ti | 4% | 191215 | 47 | 57 | 1 6 || 435 
1/6 | 1140} 20082 | 45 Q24\1 5@ | 191678 | 46 | 53 | 2.3 || 445 
Yy 1725 | 20078 | 45 Q4%)\1 54 | 191678 | 64 | 70 |1.9 445 
1, 1140} 20083 70 3% | 2 SA AMe ee as eee 56 | 58 | 3.5 || 455 
by 1725 | 20079 70 3% | 2 BRN cates 65 | 75 |3.5 || 455 
i) 1140| 20084 | 90 3% | 2 al tw Grattan eis 60 | 63 | 4.2 || 465 
34 1725 | 20080 90 3% | 2 BA Aliant toe 68 | 80 | 4.7 || 465 
— a —— —— = = 
5 = i 25. CxvCL Esa i 
| 
; : | 
1g 1425 | 20085 50 || 2 ti% | 4 | 191215 | 47 | 60 1.5 || 439 
Yy 1425 | 20086 65 || 2144/1 54 | 191678 | 55 | 62 | 2. 4 || 449 
% 1425 | 20087 70 || 3% | 2 34 |e ee | 64 | 68 | 3.9 || 459 
34 1425 | 20088 110 3% | 2 34 | Wraaiee 65 | 72 |5.3 | 469 


~ *Model number does not include pulley. 
+This size has pulley adapted for 5/16-in. round belt, all other sizes have crowned 
face pulley adapted for flat belt. 
TYPE RSA MOTORS 
DIMENSIONS 


Outline cuts are diagrammatic and do not show exact construction. 


Dimensions in Inches 


Frame et | ; ; 
COW Ae ey) Coy Zo Nim Nloma) jaa |} A) Ae aya ae ae wy 
| a8 
435 | 24 | 1024/5 14) 51%6| 3 Vy sll] 614) 4446, 51% 34 |144| 149] 44764)114 
439 | 34 | 1264/5 74) 5146 3 14] 721K4| 614) 644] 514 |36|1)4| M49) 5 61124 
445 | 33 |12 14| 63¢| G13 Y%| 54/6 34] 7 [5 36, 6  |24/124\Q) 5 Ye6)2 
449 | 48 | 1414) 613{6) 62%49|3 146] 96) 72 7 |62%| 6 [14/114 | Hg 6G |2 
455 | 51 | 14 3%6| 7346) 7299/4 34|7 | 734|6 546) 654 |24|114| 9G) 6 F)2 
459 | 69 | 151949] 71346] 7240/4 34| 8234) 734| 71249) 654 24/114) 1349) 64264)2 
465 | 72 |14 34| 815419 3/4 54| 34/8 14) 9 O}4) 7 |3a)2 llg| 6 36/2 
469 | 95 |16 16] 813<61 9 3414 54] 34\9%ol 9 171241 7 3412 | eol7 Vele 


*Dimension D is approximate. I \ nay i 
+Dimensions G and H are approximate. They may vary 1/64 in. above or below those given 


CoheN@ieheA lee = SelwAsll} OrNt C ACT AL OG 


81 


Type RKT and RKQ Motors 


(Three-Phase and Two-Phase) 


RKT and RKQ polyphase motors have been designed to 
meet the demand for fractional HP motors for service on poly- 
phase circuits. They are built in sizes ranging from 1’ HP to 
VY HP inclusive, 25 cycles and 60 cycles. They closely resemble 
the RSA line in general appearance and external construction. 


Type RKT, Oil Ring Bearing Motor 


The main frame casting is made of cast iron and is machined 
to receive the stator core and end flanges carrying the bearings. 

The primary core is made up of a number of thin lamina- 
tions riveted together and securely fastened into the main frame 
casting. 

The primary winding is form wound and is placed into the 
core slots and firmly held in place by fiber slot wedges. The 
whole primary structure is dipped in insulating compound and 
thoroughly baked to insure perfect insulation. 

The rotor is of the squirrel cage type. Copper bars pass 
through the core slots and are securely riveted over at the ends, 
holding the short circuiting rings and laminations together 
firmly. 

The bearing brackets are held in place by four through 
bolts. In frame 335, one bearing bracket is cast integral with 
the main frame casting. 

The bearings are of the well-known oil ring type, except 
frame 335, which has wick oilers. 

Leads are brought out through suitable bushings in the main 
frame for connection to supply circuit. 


Lubrication 


On the frame 335, wick oilers are furnished and non-fluid 
grease should be used, while in the ring oil type only high 
cylinder oil should be used. 


Guarantees 


Type RKQ and RKT motors carry the standard guarantees 
given all G-E Fractional HP Motors of light duty type. 

The temperature rise will not exceed 40 degrees C. on all 
parts based on full load continuously. The motors will carry 
an overload of 25%, for one-half hour without serious injury. 
All temperatures are based on an ambient temperature of 40 
degrees. 


Type RKQ, Oil Ring?Bearing Motor 


TYPE RKT, 3-PHASE AND TYPE RKQ, 2-PHASE 
60 AND 25 CYCLE8 


ey Pulley | | 
oe Dimensions | é 
Full +Model | .£ # in In. | Cat. No.|| 4 
HP, | Load | volts No. 2s = ; of | 3 
Speed Motor a ps Pulley | I 
RPM Only ao Dia. 3s | Bore sea | ees 
60 CYCLES—1725 R.P.M. 
Y% | 1725 | 110 | 20089 | 2 || *1% | 4 | 1% | 191215 || 1335 
YZ | 1725 | 220 | 20090 | 25 || *1% | *% | 1% | 191215 || 1335 
yy | 1725 | 110 | 20091 | 35 Oe 14 16 | 204389 || 435 
Ye | 1725 | 220 | 20092 | 35 24| 14% | % | 204389 || 435 
Yq | 1725 | 440 | 20093 | 35 || 244] 14% | % | 204389 || 435 
| | | 
1 | 1725 | 110 | 20094 | 45 3144] 2 bye ane ete 445 
V6 | 1725 | 220 | 20095 | 45 3144 | 2 Be I sae 445 
lg | 1725 | 440 | 20096 | 45 || 3i¢| 2 aoa es 445 
60 CYCLES—1140 R.P.M. 
1/12 | 1140 | 110 | 20097 | 25 || *17%|*% | 1% | 191215 || $335 
1/12 | 1140 | 220 20098 25 *114 *Yy My | 191215 || $335 
1/6 | 1140 | 110 | 20099 | 35 2%! 1% | % | 204389 || 435 
1/6 1140 | 220 20100 35 Qe 14 ey 204389 435 
1/3 | 1140 | 110 | 20101 45 3144 | 2 OG Mdl ern he: 445 
1/3 | 1140 | 220 | 20102 | 45 314 | 2 al eos 445 
25 CYCLES—1425 R.P.M. 
Ye | 1425°| 110 | 20103 | 35 4) *17%%| *% | % | 191215 |) 435° 
Ve | 1425 | 220 | 20104. 35 ie || AV | 4 | 191215 435 
| | | 
\Yw% | 1425 | 110 | 20105 | 50 || 24| 1344 | % | 204389 || 439 
ly | 1425 | 220 | 20106 | 50 | a4) 1% 14 | 204389 || 439 
Y% | 1425 | 110] 20107 | 60 || 3% | Q | Syd Meola 449 
16 | 1425 | 220 | 20108 60 344 | 2 Siete tae 449 
*Indicates ““V” groove pulley adapted to round belt. 
+Model number does not include pulley and covers open type motor only. 
{Frame 335 has wick-oiled bearings. 
TYPE RKT AND RKQ MOTORS 
DIMENSIONS 
eee 
Outline cuts are diagrammatic and do not show exact construction. 
<=" iSiinansene in Inches ; 
Net - 
Frame | wt. 2 + + 
inLb.| AA | BA| CA] p DA I ek gee ah ae eae a 
ies | 
335 | 15 | 7 KBl5% | 5456/3 | V4) 4156/6164) 3156514) 96/114) NG] 3 561114 
435 | 23 |10%15 Ve! 5156/3 | 14) 516/616) 4161516) 36/114 | Me] 4476|114 
439 | 33 | 127364) 5 74) 519%6/3 Ya 77164614 | 67464|5 16) 36/114 | M401 5 %6 114 
445 | 32 |12 74) 613(6| 6224/3 146 54) 6 34/7 15 36/6 | 1oi1l4| Me) 5 1612 
449 | 47 | 1416) 613 (6) 672491 3 46) 54) 7720/7 |O%Q\6 | Leill4| Yelollg 2 — 


*Dimension D is approximate. 


It will never exceed; but may, 


in. below that given, or on Frames 435 and larger, 1/16 in. below that given. 


}+Dimensions G and H are approximate. 


given. 


on Frame 335, be 1/32 


They may vary 1/64 in. above or below those 


82 


PoE ZI ION Ge Be Geli AEN SDR EW Se eC tO ina Ne) 


Type SD Motors 


Type SD motors have been designed to meet the demands 
for motors to operate on direct current. They are mechanically 
interchangeable with corresponding ratings of the Type SA line, 
and possess all the salient features of design and operation of 
the SA line. 


CONSTRUCTION 
The field frame or core is made up of a number of compara- 
tively thick punchings firmly riveted together; the poles being 
an integral part of the punchings. 


Type SD, 1/8 H.P., 1725 R.P.M. Motor with Wick-Oiled Bearings 


The field coils are form wound and are carefully taped and 
dipped in insulating compound and thoroughly baked. They 
are then put in place and fixed on the pole pieces. 

The end flanges, frames 234 to 256 inclusive have the feet 
cast integrally. Frame 325 has a solid cast iron frame very 
similar to those of the SDA line, while frame 264 has a separable 
base casting which is fastened to the field ring with four heavy 
cap screws. 

Wick oilers are used on all frames, except frame 264, which 
has ring oil bearings. 

The armature core punchings are pressed directly on to the 
shaft under hydraulic pressure insuring very solid construction. 

The bearings are of the highest grade, phosphor bronze 
bearing metal procurable. 

The brushholders on all frames are of the well-known 
cartridge type; on motors rated 4 HP and above, shunted 
brush springs are used. 


STARTING TORQUE AND CURRENT 


SD compound motors, 4% HP and below (without starting 
rheostat) 300-400% of full load torque with four to five times 
full load current. 


Type SD, 1/2 H.P., 1140 R.P.M. Motor with Oil Ring Bearings 


SD shunt motors, 1-12 HP or below (without starting 
rheostat) 200-300% of full load torque, with four to five times 
full load current. The maximum starting torque of SD motors 
of all ratings, when starting rheostats are used which may be 
expected with proper commutating stability, is 250% for shunt 
motors and 300% for compound wound motors. 

Speed regulation is approximately 8-15% for shunt and 


20-25% for compound wound motors. 


HEATING 


Windings of standard direct current SD motors of open 
frame design will not exceed the following rises as measured 
by thermometer in degrees C., based on ambient temperature 
of 40 degrees C., full load continuously 40 degrees, 25% overload 
for one-half hour, 55 degrees. 50% momentary overload with- 
out injurious heating or sparking. 

SD direct current motors will operate satisfactorily without 
excessive heating with line voltage variations not exceeding 
10% above or below normal line voltages. 


TYPE SD CONTINUOUS SERVICE 
SHUNT AND COMPOUND WOUND 


hae 


Standard Pulley 


Ship. Dimensions ° 

Rated tModel | Wt. in In. Cat. a 

Hip, |: Speed |'votts | cNS2 Ee ata a 

ee Motor (Ap- Pe ted ‘e Pulley gE 

prox.) || Bejt | Round | Bore = 

| Center | Belt | = 
, Diam. . 

SHUNT WOUND 
| pee Cee 
1/20 | 1725 | 110 | 20032 | 20 1% | % 34 | 191204 || 325 
1/20 | 1725 | 220 | 20034 | 20 14% | % 3_ | 191204 | 325 
1/12 | 1725 | 110 | 20037 | 24 13%| % | % | 191213 || 234 
1/12 | 1725 | 220 | 20038 24. 134 | A | Y | 191213 || 234 
| 
COMPOUND WOUND 

1/12 | 1140 110 | 20339 6 1%| \% 14 | 191215 | 236 
1/12 1140 220 20040 = 26 1%) \% ¥ | 191215 || 236 
1/8 | 1725 | 110 | 20041 | 26 WA | YK 14 | 191215 | 236 
1/8 | 1725 | 220 | 20042 | 26 1%| \% V4 | 191215 | 236 
1/6 |.1140] 110 | 20043 | 36 || *244 | *144 | 146 | 204889 || 246 
1/6 | 1140 220 | 20044 | 36 || *216 | *1144) 1% | 204389 | 246 
1/4 | 1725 | 110) 20045 | 36 | *2146 | *1144 ) % | 204389 || 246 
1/4 | 1725 | 220 20046 | 36 | *2144  *144 14 204389 | 246 
1/3 | 1140 | 110} 20047 |} 50 || *314 | *2 ae Mt eee 256 
1/3 | 1140 | 220 | 20048 | 50 || *814 | *2 soll tee ean 256 
1/2 | 1725 | 110) 20049 | BO aitS) on “Sune | nonce 256 
1/2 | 1725 | 220 | 20050 |. 50° || *844 | *2: | 5% | ...... 256 
1/2 | 1140] 110 | 20051] 80 || *344 | *2 ee et eee: 264 
1/2 | 1140 | 220 | 20052 | 80 || *314 *2 Site ta woe 264 
3/4 | 1725 | 110 | 20053 | 80 || *3l4 | *2 Bad norte d ose 264. 
3/4 | 1725 | 220 | 20054 | 80 || *3)4 | *2 3 ag Il vere ai 264 


*Pulleys for Frames 246 and larger have crowned face adapted for flat belt. Dimensions 


given for these frames are Pulley Diam. and Belt Width. 
+Model No. does not include pulley. 
AFrames 325 to 256 inclusive have wick-oiled bearings. Frame 264 has oil-ring bear- 
ings and removable foot casting. 


Cal ONe she A cine cole ack [OreN 2 Gra TAGE. OG 


83 


DIMENSIONS OF TYPE SD MOTORS 


Outline cuts are diagrammatic and do not show exact construction. 


wt Dimensions in Inches 
Frame SA im Ok =P ee aie + el 

Lb. AA | BA | CA D | DA; & F G ES) Ker ea Ps ew: 
325 |1014| 6 34| 474) 4154214 3% |434/5 | 3.54]4 14)56).. .|1¥¢) 2 3414 
234 |1314| 8 % 574) 5 He) 2 74| Va | 4 Me) 5 4613 %o| 4 “46/246 14) 114) 31942)14 
236 |1434) 8 %| 524) 5 %| 2 (| V6 | 41346) 5 946) 31946] 4 46)546 14/114) 3224/14 
244 11834] 8 7%) 656) 634/314) 4 14%) 614)3 Vl 5 V4 961114) 114) 31346114 
246 |2034) 914 656 630/38 14 16 |4 1K) 6144/3 Kl 5 W611) 4 14 
256 36 | 11194) 734|7 14/318 54 | O%G|7 34 SIG) 6 14/84 114)114 5614 
264 |63 | 13 34 84/9 4/4 14) %4 734 7 \%'9 |e |5 %l2 


It will never exceed, but may be 1/16 in. below that given. 
They may be 1/64 in. above or below those given. 


*Dimension D is approximate. 
+Dimensions G and H are approximate. 


Type SDA Motors 


Type SDA motors are built in five sizes, 1-200 HP to 1-15 
HP, Speeds 1800 or 2200 RPM, 110 and 220 volts, 60 cycles, 
except frame 300, which is wound for 110 volts only. 


The field laminations are held in a cast iron case, which has 
the feet cast integral with the main frame casting. The pulley 
end bearing bracket is separable, being held in place by two 
stud bolts screwed into the main frame casting, so the motor 
may be readily dismantled for inspection. 

The bearings are the usual straight sleeve phosphor bronze 
type with standard wick oiler on all frames except frame 300 
in which a felt retainer is used. 


The brushes are of the well-known cartridge type and are 


Type SDA-315 Frame, 1/50 h.p.—1800 r.p.m., 
60 Cycles, 110 v. 


placed in a fixed position in the motor frame casting. 

All type SDA motors are furnished with 18-inch leads, 
brought out through a rubber bushing. “V” Groove pulleys, 
suitable for round belts are regularly furnished. 


TYPE SDA, FORM A, ALTERNATING CURRENT 
60 CYCLES, SERIES WOUND 


Std. Pulley | 
Dimensions Bs 
Ship. pO Car emilee lac 
Speed a \*Model| Wt. ° =| No Load § z 
HP. | Full | & | No. | in Lb. eee eile vot Am-|| ‘2 || 8 
Load > (Ap- d3 8 Bue Pulley |peres | 3 a 
RPM prox.) || 3m 5 220 | iS aS 
| AO aes ie 

1/200) 2200 110 20060) 6 44 | % | 190407 |0.2 || 15|| 300 
1/200) 2200 | 220 Mn feeietiera ||" me terete IPs, soll) Sav eee ES, aceaes 

| | 
1/100) 2200 | 110 | 20061, 8 54 | Ye | 190407 |0.36]| 25|| 305 
1/100) 2200 | 220 | 20062, 8 54 | Ye | 190407 |0.18]| 25/| 305 

| | 
1/50 1800 | 110 | 20063) 13 144 | 3% | 190536 |0.8 || 55|| 315 
1/50 | 1800 | 220 | 20064, 13 14% | 3% | 190536 |0.4 55 || 315 
1/25 | 1800 | 110 | 20065| 20 || 114 | 3% | 191204 1.4 | 95|| 325 
1/25 | 1800 | 220 20066| 20 14%} 3% | 191204 |0.7 95|) 325 
1/15 | 1800 | 110 | 20067) 25 14 | % | 191213 |2.0 130|, 335 
1/15 | 1800 | 220 | 20068 25 14 | 3% | 191213 |1.0 | 130) 335 


*Model No. does not include pulley. Use 110-volt motor with proper resistance in series 


TYPE SDA, FORM D, DIRECT CURRENT 
SERIES WOUND 


| Std. 
| | Pulley | | 
| ¥ Dimensions | 2 
| Model | Ship in In. | | a 2 
Speed | 2 No. Wt. 22 = Cat. Full || 6 4 
H.P iw | (Not | in Lb. Le No. of |Load || 2 
Toe > |includ-| (Ap- s2kluos Pulley | Am- || $ = 
M ing prox.) eee! ES peres & 
pulley) ACs B30 ‘ i & 
wy Res 
1/200 2200 110 | 20069 6 58 Vy 190407 0.13 15 | 300 
1/200 2200 220 tf cee Vice | 
1/100 2200 | 110 | 20070 | 8 % mS 190407 0.18 Q5 | 305 
1/100, 2200 220 | iam ieee at INE Sacev IM eet oN eetee 
1/50 1800 110 | 20071 13 14% % 190536 0.37 41) 315 
1/50 | 1800 220 | 20072 13 1% 346 190536 0.19 41) 315 
| | \| 
1/25 | 1800 | 110 | 20073, 20 14 H% 191204 |0.72 80|| 325 
1/25 | 1800 | 220 | 20074| 20 14 3% | 191204 |0.36)} 80)) 325 
| | | | | | | 
1/15 1800 | 110 | 20075 25 14% 3% 191213 0.92 100 335 
1/15 1800 | 220 | 20076! 25 14% Cn 191213 0.46), 100 | 335 


+ Use 110-volt motor with proper resistance in series. 


DIMENSIONS OF TYPE SDA MOTORS 


ise) 
>-— 


tee 


g ae Dimensions in Inches 
| yb. | AA BA|CA|*D |DA| E | F |tG|tH| J Tait Pesley, 
= | | | x | 
j300, 2 | 414/294) 28g 134 1g |2 4lalgl2 14/236 M6 | Yl ING 26 
305) 4 41413 14/3 %@ 36) 1m [3 14/3 %6/2 14) 21346) Ma | 14] 15264) Meo 
S15 534 524 4 4 le 2 l6 % 3 i 4 Vig 3 3 3% 4 1 2 34| i% 
325) 1014 | 634| 4 74) 419%2 14) 34 [43415 13 56/4 4! 6 | 1 Mel 2 34/1 4 
7145 Ys| 5% 3 Vs | 41946) 6 4|313%6)5 Ye) 46 | 1 34) 3 611 4 
| | 


335) 1534 


*Dimension D is approximate. It will never exceed, but may be 1/32 in. below that given. 
+Dimensions G and H are approximate They may vary 1/64 in. above or below those given. 
{Frame 300 furnished with felt oil retainers instead of oil cups as shown. 


84 


P BSD Tela N Gael WAGONS DREW eC ORNs eam Nan). 


TRUMBULL SAFETY SWITCHES 


A Complete Line 


No Fuse 
Double Throw 


Entrance Switch 


125v Porcelain Base 
250v N.E.C.S. 


Compensator 
Switch 


Entrance Switch 
Box Closed 


Motor Reversing 


Switch Motor Starting 


with U.V.R. Coil 


HE outstanding features of these 
Safety Switches are:— 


“A”, machine- 
Punched clip 
] 


I. All switches used are Type 
made, built-up 
switches not used. 


switches. 


II. Box cannot be opened until switch is in 
ee ‘db igo 
off”’ position. 

IIT. Switch cannot be closed until cover is down, 
except as the “catch” is manipulated by 
expert when necessary to examine the switch 
under load with box open. 


Safety Switches represent the modern development of 
the old open switch and eventually will supplant them in 
all installations. 


Fusible 
30-1200 Amp. 


Fusible Switch 
with Shield 


Quick Make and 
Quick Break 


No Fuse 
Single Throw 


Motor Starting 


. : Entrance Switch with 
with Shield 


Meter Trim 


Trumbull general catalog lists a complete line of 
Safety Switches. Pettingell-Andrews Company will send 
catalog upon request, also pocket bulletin of Safety 
Switches can be supplied to all interested. 


Built-up Contact Jaws 


Footblock milled 
Blades sweated and pinned into 
footblocks, giving a mechanical 
and electrical strength that can- 
not be obtained in the Punched 
Clip type of Contact Jaws 


Contact Clip complete | 
Switch Blades are ‘ground in’’ 
where they enter Contact Jaws 


CAL ER alee lerAg GON, eCA: TeAT lL) O'G 85 


NEW ENGLAND DISTRIBUTORS 


ELECTRIC 
WASHING MACHINES, IRONING MACHINES, VACUUM CLEANERS 
AND HURLEY SOAP 


EDISON ELECTRIC APPLIANCE CoO. 


HOTPOINT HUGHES | EDISON 
AUTO HEATERS HEAVY DUTY RANGES SEWING MACHINES 
CURLING IRONS BAKE OVENS ROTARY AND VIBRATORY TYPES 
“HEDLITE” HEATERS BROILERS DOMESTIC RANGES 
GRILLS HOTEL TYPE TOASTERS | IRONS 
IRONS DOMESTIC RANGES | TOASTERS 
HEATING PADS WATER HEATERS FURNACES 
HOLLOW WARE HOT PLATES HOLLOW WARE 
AND OTHER APPLIANCES AND OTHER APPLIANCES AND OTHER APPLIANCES 


86 Poe TWN :Gebels Lb AGN DP Rena. -5 ae Ce Oe viele Nene 


CONSTRUCTION TOOLS 


A Complete Line Always in Stock 
Send for Complete Catalog 


Carrying or Lug Hooks 
Regular Pattern 


Pole Supports 
Western Union Pattern Jenney Type Mule Type Jenney Type 


Tamping and Digging Bar 


Cant Hook 


Crow and Digging Bar 


Malleable Socket Peavies Loy or Slick 


Tamping Bar with Heavy Iron Shoe 


ett i Ta 


Post Hole Shovel, Crooked Handle 


Guarded Pike Pole 


Si rm RCO ATL GH OR 


Pike Pole Post Hole Spoon, Western Union Pattern 


Cll Ne teh AGE = Sele AGioOrN’ 7C AT TVACL. OFG 87 


t 


nT 1) 


Tree Trimmer 


Tree Trimmer with Saw 
Take-up Reel 


While only a few tools are shown here, Pettingell- Andrews Company 
carry in stock a complete line of all tools used in 


Pole Line Construction 


Armor Cutters for BX Linemen’s Shields Splicing Clamps 
Buffalo Grips Melting Pots Speed Indicators 
Come-alongs Pouring Ladles Soldering Irons, GE 
Climbers Pliers Step Ladders 
Climber Straps Pole Counters Torches 

Climber Pads Reamers Vises 

Conduit Benders Rubber Gloves Wire Cutters 

Fire Pots Safety Belts Wire Gauges 


88 P Bebe N Gaels 1 AGN DARE WAV SOs ORV IRE aae Nano 


“DELTABESTON” 


HEATER CORD 
“The Devices That Produce are the Devices in Use’’ 


The Cord Without Rubber—Keeps the Iron in Constant Use 
A Business Builder and Friend Maker 


GOOD connecting cord means juice consumption. 


When the cord breaks there is aleak in gw, 

your money bag— and a disgruntled Qgy 

customer. 

Quite a number of Central Station managers have 

found the way to stop this leak with ‘“Deltabeston” 
Heater Cord. 


What One Big Central Station 
Thinks About ‘‘Deltabeston”’ 


“Our experience has shown a material decrease in the 
number of complaints from our customers due to our 
using this cord. We appreciate very much your calling 
our attention to this wire because we feel that it has 
saved us hundreds of dollars and given our customers 
better satisfaction. 

“We are sending you our order for 10,000 feet of 
‘Deltabeston’ Heater Cord. We use it exclusively in our 
appliance repair department to replace other cords that 
have become worn out. It has been our experience dur- 
ing the past several years that the majority of trouble in 
electrical appliances is with the cords. We have had this 
matter up with manufacturers continuously until we 
started to use the cord manufactured by your Company. 

“We were informed by appliance manufacturers that 
there was no part of the appliance which received as 
thorough testing as the attaching cords. One manufac- 
turer stated that they had a machine in their factory for 
testing the cords to ascertain the number of times appli- 
ances could be connected and disconnected without caus- 
ing cord trouble and also to locate the spot in the cord 
where the trouble developed. 

“On taking this matter up with other Central Stations 
we found their experience with cord troubles to be the 
same as our own, so that we have come to the conclusion 
that there is a tremendous field for the use of “Deltabeston’ 
Heater Cord, especially among Central Stations, and we 
would suggest that you bring the matter before their 
attention.” 

Surely there is every reason for you to investigate 
what ‘‘Deltabeston’’ Heater Cord is—why it is different 
—better—and how it will make money for you. 


Why “‘Deltabeston’’ Is Best 


*“Deltabeston” Heater Cord has won the 
enthusiastic approval of every user. It 
cuts down cord trouble to a minimum and 
keeps heating devices in almost continu- 
ous service. 

Note the distinctive construction of 
“Deltabeston” Cord. The insulation is not 
composed of rubber. A wall of pure as- 
bestos fiber surrounds each conductor— 
this is thoroughly filled with a compound 
which gives it high dielectric strength and 
results in a very tough and pliable insula- 
tion; the outer braided cover is of mer- 
cerized cotton yarn which can be furnished 
in any color desired. Where an all-fire- 
proof cord is desirable the twisted conduc- 
tors are covered with an asbestos braid. 

The back heat from an electric iron or 
other heating device quickly dries out and 
destroys the ordinary rubber insulation, 
but it cannot affect the asbestos insula- 
tion of “Deltabeston.” This is the ideal 
heater cord—it keeps appliances going and 
customers pleased. It will prove a busi- 
ness builder and a friend maker for you. 

We shall be glad to send you a sample 
length of this trouble-proof heater cord 
with our compliments. Send for it and 
prove — in your own shop — that “‘Delta- 
beston”’ is best. 


Cee leheaciews FeAl VON? 9G AUT ALE O G 


89 


WIRING 


PULLEYS 


TABLES 
AND GEARS 


STORAGE BATTERY DATA 
LAMP DATA 


Page 
Alternating Current Formulae............ 95 
ANTI OES Were MWOIETES o5a0 obboo ds esosmonuucs 97 
ENOMUTEOE Coe \WIRes oo opt eo coo gownoues oo cone 90 
Bare: Cop permWite.mciseniecati chicos oi 96 
Brown) Sa Sharpe's) Gaugewen. sees os eee 90 
Busbari Copper!) atameerere tr nee eeeee 98 
ClassiticationvotiGaugespensss sedans 90 
ConductivitiestaacereE ee er eee eee 93 
Comparison of Wire Gauges.............. 94 
Comparative Weights of Wires........... 94 
Conduit Sizes for Different Size Wires.... 99 
Conductors and Insulators in Order of 
eine Val ieger ert He coker coco 99 


Copper for Various Systems of Distribution 92 
Current Required to Fuse Wires of Copper, 


German Silver and Iron ............. 91 
Damp-Proof Office Wire ................. 90 
Data on Solid Wires Larger than 4/0 ... 93 
Decimalebquivalentsmreeceeeeerer eerie 101 
Diameters ot Conduitsam eee eee are 99 
Dimensions, Resistances and Safe Carry- 

ing Capacity of Copper Wires....... 91 
Hlectricalalinitsteesca. eee eee 92 
Electrical Units and Mechanical Equiva- 

LEME See eh eee ee een ie eck 93 
Raivalemtsko imines meaner ce ener. 100 
Equivalents of Wires: B. & S. Gauge .... 90 
Feet Expressed in Decimal Parts of a Mile 101 
ines VMiaonevaainemierr retry neers 93 


Fixture Wire—Heavy and Light Wall... 90 
Galvanized Iron Wire (Standard Grades) 98 
Galvanized Iron Wire— Weight and Re- 


sistance Calculated at 68° F......... 91 
Generalabiquivalentoaseeeee seer arr ree 101 
Generalisusvestionsterrer teenie ce ene ner 98 
General Uses of Various Gauges ......... 90 
ISampalDatawen ssc cr ctr ote ace 105-106 


Melting Point and Relative Electrical 
Conductivity of Different Metals and 
Alloys eer eres fd aye SOA AOR Aste cet ee 98 


Page 
Metric Conversion Tables .<.c42.3.24s05.. 103 
Metric System of Weights and Measures 101 
Mihi eyael Ciivoullené MIMS ssoceooncnscanscooc 92 
Numberof Wires in Strands, B.& S.Gauge 97 
Obie spl a warts sy0e cosy views come aaa een 92 
Poles inerDatamaerrce tic cnons sn ceemakenses 94 
PullevgandaGearliablesereneereteettetre: 104 
eas one hivsemmie herve, diss cio sneitareens 95 
Rubber CoveredsDuplex-e see. -ee eee 91 


Rubber Covered Wire—Solid Conductors 91 
Safe Carrying Capacity of Insulated Wires 93 


Sacha areswracmerec ck tern neds e 100 
Sags and Tensions for Aluminum Cables 100 
Sags and Tensions for Copper Cables .... 100 
Square Millimeters Area to Inches Di- 
EVINS WO toowoen nos ocho tO be OO See een ne 103 
StoravesBatteryaDatamierme cesar Od 
StrandeduConductorseeer es eee eee 90 
StrandeduConductorseeer era ncaa ieee 91 
a bletoteMrulltiplengemee eres eee 101 


Table Showing Difference Between Wire 
Gauges in Decimal Parts of an Inch 92 


RhesMetricsSystem epee eee aes el Oo 
To Determine the Size of Copper Wire for 
diay (Cinnein Sreamitees.bsaopsesesaanunc 91 
dro lesa WVAl Citra nisi vsetai CAcisyeces tsar ear. 90 
Underwriters’ Rules for Spacing of 
Switches—125 Volts or Less........ 98 
MWieatherprootelronmWitcueaa teeter eeetee 90 
Weatherproof Twisted Pairs.............. 90 
Weatherproof Wires— Solid Conductors.. 90 
WY CIEIMY GE CO) DNS? cooocnosooogecuses sacnde 92 
\WTRES: Ol HONS IUMNES sce cedaoccessacauoone 94 
\VHNe——Crhayed AINA Os000 0004 50n000s 50004 96 
UwosPhas Gace. set eee e noe 96 
iihree=Phasevaaencaier eee 95-96 
\Wirabaves /RO TET. o4 6 once oo00 600d coon encoun 95 


Wiring Formula for Direct Current...... 95 


90 


Pole he NEGaEE Le Lr ASN DIRE a s> 


CFO) IVIBESANTY 


WIRING TABLES 


BROWN & SHARPE’S GAUGE 


The B. & S. gauge is standard for copper wire and is understood to apply 
in all cases where size of copper wire is mentioned in any wire gauge number. 

By referring to the table it will be seen that in the B. & S. gauge, to all 
practical purposes, the area in circular mils is doubled for every third size heav- 
ier, by gauge number, and halved for every third size lighter, by gauge number. 

Every tenth size heavier by gauge number has ten times the area in cir- 
cular mils. 

No. 10 B. & S. gauge wire has an area of approximately 10,000 circular 
mils, and from this base the other sizes can be figured, if a table should not be 
at hand. 


CLASSIFICATION OF GAUGES 


In addition to the confusion caused by a multiplicity of wire gauges, sev- 
eral of them are known by various names. 

For example: 

Brown & Sharpe (B. & S.) = American Wire Gauge (A. W. G.). 

New British Standard (N. B. S.)=British Imperial, English Legal Stand- 
ard and Standard Wire Gauge and is variously abbreviated by S. W. G. and 
Ile Vato (Gis 

Birmingham Gauge (B. W. G.) = Stubs’ Old English Standard and Tron 
Wire Gauge. 

Roebling = Washburn Moen, American Steel & Wire Co.’s Iron Wire 
Gauge. 

London = Old English (Not Old English Standard). 

As a further complication: 

Birmingham or Stubs’ Iron Wire Gauge is not the same as Stubs’ Steel 
Wire Gauge. 


GENERAL USES OF VARIOUS GAUGES 
B. & S. G.—AIll forms of round wires used for electrical conductors. Sheet 
Copper, Brass and German Silver. 
U.S. S. G.—Sheet iron and steel. 
1893. 
B. W. G.—Galvanized iron wire. 


Legalized by act of Congress, March 3, 


Norway iron wire. 


American Screw Co.’s Wire Gauge.—Numbered sizes of machine and wood 
screws, particularly up to No. 14 (.2421 inch). 
Stubs’ Steel Wire Gauge.—Drill rod. 
Roebling & Trenton.—Iron and steel wire. Telephone and telegraph 
wire. 
N. B. S.—Hard drawn copper. 


London Gauge.—Brass wire. 


Telephone and telegraph wire. 


EQUIVALENTS OF WIRES: B. & S. GAUGE 


0000 = 2-0 = 43 = 8-6 = 16-9 32-12 = 64-15 
000 = 21 = 44 = 87 = 16-10 = 3213 = 64-16 
00 = 22 = 45 = 8-8 = ala = BSA a Tal 
0 = 23 = 46 = 8-9 = 16-12 = 32-15 
1 = 24 = 47 810) = 16-1 Se ON as 
by = ES = 48 = S-l) 5= 16-14 82a ee 
3 =) 92-6 = 49 = 8-19 = 16159 82-18 es ee 
4 = 27 41105 = 9 SH13 5 = iG One ee eee 
5 = 28 ae ra) It tort ee ee - eowo  |  n ction 
6 = 29 Se AU feel eae Bho BNE wees 
== 9-10" Fase 4S) SH 16 ee A reer) Re etre 
pee) A IY nao 8 dbo, | bodtee 
a EA = aii Eo ihe) Rae | ee 
Ae eee IG ts 8 eo | Oe 
1p (ee ag J ee AO Teer) | hey a ota, | mutica 
ib es Veen eet eke ete | | dt SHO 
ee ey ee IR ae | oa Ce SOS 
{Vet od A ne) es PP anew “She b as 4 Viki 
oN ee Sn Gane | 5 scm codno Pa’ Sodas 9 © -to0l.0' 
VG R=) -2K9 re  ecaeris Anette © = = Shcia6 


WEATHERPROOF WIRES—SOLID CONDUCTORS 


0000 
000 
00 


DanrWwnNreco 


2000000 C.M. 
1750000 C.M. 
1500000 C.M. 
1250000 C.M. 
1000000 C.M. 
900000 C.M. 
800000 C.M. 
700000 C.M. 
600000 C.M. 
500000 C.M. 
450000 C.M. 
400000 C.M. 
350000 C.M. 
300000 C.M. 
250000 C.M. 


0000 
000 
00 


MAankworcd 


Weatherproof Wire 


Wet. 
per 
1000 Ft. 


767 
630 
502 
407 
316 
260 
200 


7000 
6200 
5400 
4500 
3675 
3330 
3000 
2650 
2235 
1900 
1725 
1550 
1345 
1175 
985 
800 
653 
522 
424 
328 
270 
206 
170 
140 
115 
78 


Wet. Diam. 
per Over 
Mile All 
4050 25/32 
3220 47/64 
2650 39 /64 
2150 9/16 
1670 1/2 
1370 15/32 
1050 27/64 
865 25/64 
710 11/32 
590 5/16 
395 17/64 
280 1/4 
185 7/32 
130 3/16 
75 5/32 
58 1/8 


Slow-Burning 


Weatherproof Wire 


Wet. Wet. Diam. 
per per Over 
1000 Ft. Mile All. 
862 4550 3/4 
710 393750 45/64 
562 2970 37/64 
462 2440 17/32 
340 1800 15/32 
280 1480 7/16 
230 1220 13/32 
190 1000 3/8 
155 820 11/32 
127 670 5/16 
85 450 7/64 
60 315 1/4 
42 220 7/32 
30 160 3/16 
15 80 5/32 
12 63 1/8 


STRANDED CONDUCTORS 


37000 
32750 
28500 
23800 
19400 
17600 
15800 
14000 
11800 
10000 
9100 
8200 
7100 
6200 
5200 
4220 
3450 
2760 
2240 
1735 
1425 
1090 
900 
740 
610 
410 


1/8 


7/8 
3/4 


2 
2 
if 
1 
it 
1 39/64 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 


ANNUNCIATOR WIRE 


Size 
B. &S. 
14 


Pounds per 
1000 Ft 


15. 


Diameter 
Over All 


7300 
6550 
5675 
4780 
3860 
3520 
3180 
2820 
2350 
1990 


FIXTURE WIRE—HEAVY WALL 


14 Q7 3/16 
16 17 5/32 
18 12 1/32 
19 11 1/8 
20 10 1/8 
LIGHT WALL 
16 12 1/8 
18 9 7/64 
19 8 7/64 
20 7 3/32 


WEATHERPROOF IRON WIRE 


Pounds per Mile. 


38500 2 
34600 1 7/8 
30000 1 3/4 
25200 1 11/16 
20400 1 39/64 
18600 1 9/16 
16800 1 33/64 
14900 1 27/64 
12400 1 9/32 
10500 1 13/64 
9600 1 9/64 
8700 1 3/32 
7600 3 1/32 
6700 15/16 
5600 7/8 
4750 53/64 
3880 49/64 
3080 41/64 
2530. 37 /64 
1870 33/64 
1540 31/64 
1270 29/64 
1030 27/64 
845 3/8 
695 11/32 
460 9/32 


Slow-Burning Wire 


Wet. 


per is 
1000 Ft. Mile. 


925 
760 
600 
495 
365 


5000 
3980 
3640 
3280 
2920 
2460 
2080 
1900 
1700 
1500 
1310 
1120 
940 
785 
625 
510 
380 
335 
280 
230 
195 
165 
105 


Wet. Diam. 
yer Over 
All. 
4890 3/4 
4020 45/64 
3170 37 /64 
2610 17/32 
1930 15/32 
1690 7/16 
1425 13/32 
1160 3/8 
1000. 11/32 
845 5/16 
530 17/64 
420, 1/4 
290 7/32 
210 3/16 
95 5/32 
75 1/8 
41000 2 
36300 1 7/8 
31300 1 3/4 
26400 1 11/16 
21000 1 39/64 
19200 1 9/16 
17300 1 33/64 
15400 1 27/64 
13000. 1 9/32 
11000 1 13/64 
10000 1 9/64 
9000 1 3/32 
7900 31/32 
6900 15/16 
5900 7/8 
5070 53/64 
4150 49 /64 
3300 41/64 
2700 37/64 
2000 33/64 
1770 31/64 
1480 29/64 
1220 27 /64 
1030 3/8 
870 11/32 
555 9/32 


DAMP-PROOF OFFICE WIRE 


Pounds per 1000 Ft. 


Size B. & 8. 
12 
14 
16 
18 
20 


Q4. 

13.5 

10. 
8. 


TROLLEY WIRE 


0000 


000 
00 
0 


Pounds per Mile. 
3376 
2677 
2123 
1684 


WEATHERPROOF TWISTED PAIRS 


470 
400 
350 
230 
150 


Per 1,000 Ft. 
5833 
32 
23 
20 


CAUMNGIA eA: noosa AMI FOUN. CAT AL O!G 91 


RUBBER COVERED WIRE—SOLID CONDUCTORS 
Double Braid 


Diam. of Capacity Diam. Weight Diam. Weight 
Size Conductors Circular Over er Over er 
B. &S Mils. Mils. All 1,000 Ft. All 1,000 Ft. 
0000 460 211600 47/64 809 55/64 832 
000 410 167803 11/16 666 13/16 690 
00 365 133079 5/8 546 47/64 568 
0 325 105524 19/32 453 45/64 476 
1 289 83695 33/64 355 5/8 376 
2 258 66373 29/64 275 9/16 295 
3 230 52634 27/64 227 33/64 245 
4 204 41743 25/64 186 15/32 200 
5 182 33102 23/64 160 7/16 170 
6 162 26250 5/16 128 25/64 135 
8 129 16510 17/64 80 11/32 86 
10 102 10382 15/64 58 19/64 64 
12 81 6530 7/32 43 9/32 48 
14 64 4107 13/64 32 1/4 37 
16 51 2583 3/16 ZO eee Sone Mus 
18 40 1624 11/64 16 
19 36 1288 5/32 155 WS emus’ 
20 32 1022 9/64 a Os Bernese 
STRANDED CONDUCTORS 
Single Braid Double Braid 
Concentric Strands Diam. of Diam. Weight Diam. Weight 
Size No. Diam. Conductors Over Per Over Per 
B. &S. Wires Each Mils. All 1000 Ft. All 1000 Ft. 
2000000 C.M. 91 148 1650 2 7246 2 9/64 7385 
1750000 C.M. 91 139 1550 1 29/32 6394 2 3/64 6525 
1500000 C.M. 91 128 1430 1 51/64 5539 1 15/16 5658 
1250000 C.M. 91 117 1308 1 43/64 4678 1 13/16 4783 
1000000 C.M. 61 128 1166 1 1/2 3754 1 5/8 3849 
900000 C.M. 61 121 1104 Lt 7/16 3404 1 9/16 3491 
800000 C.M. 61 115 1049 1 3/8 3058 i a 3138 
750000 C.M. 61 111 1013 Ler 32, 2881 1 15/32 2956 
700000 C.M. 61 107 978 1 5/16 2709 WAG 2880 
650000 C.M. 61 103 943 1 17/64 2534 1 25/64 2600 
600000 C.M. 61 99 906 1 1/4 2355 ihe Bi/43} 2418 
550000 C.M. 61 95 870 1 13/64 2182 1 21/64 2240 
500000 C.M. 37 116 821. P 2s 1959 ayes 2010 
450000 C.M. 37 110 779 1 3/32 1791 1 7/32 1840 
400000 C.M. 37 104 738 1 3/64 1608 1 11/64 1650 
350000 C.M. 37 97 688 1 1431 Tl aye} 1468 
300000 C.M. 37 90 639 15/16 1250 1 1/16 1285 
250000 C.M. ot 82 583 7/8 1071 1 1103 
0000 19 105 530 13/16 899 15/16 942 
000 19 .094 475 3/4 740 7/8 782 
00 19 .083 425 45/64 607 13/16 647— 
0 19 O74 380 5/8 492 47/64 526 
1 19 .066 329 9/16 387 43/64 417 
2 19 .059 296 1/2 303 39/64 329 
3 ii 086 263 29/64 249 9/16 272 
4 a O77 233 7/16 204 17/32 227 
5 7 .068 209 13/32 175 1/2 192 
6 if 061 185 3/8 141 29/64 156 
8 ws 048 147 21/64 90 13/32 103 
10 7 039 118 19/64 65 3/8 72 
12 7 031 94 17/64 48 21/64 55 
14 if 024 75 15/64 36 19/64 40 
RUBBER COVERED DUPLEX 
Solid Stranded 
Size Diameter Weight Per Diameter Weight Per 
B. &S. Over All. 1,000 Ft. Over All. 1,000 Ft. 
ee oY aes T/A 810 
Did TOE eee ly/8 638 
em aN ia a Le /32 528 
Ae, WAGE 31/32 442 
Det ee ee ra. 29/32 375 
Cm Bale, Deer 53/64 307 
8 11/16 170 49/64 203 
10 37/64 125 5/8 143 
12 1/2 94 9/16 107 
14 27/64 73 15/32 78 


All Weights are Approximate but are Exact Enough for all Practical Purposes 


GALVANIZED IRON WIRE—WEIGHT 


Iron 
Wire 
Gauge. 


Diameter 
in Mils. 


225 
192 
162 
-148 
135 
120 
105 
080 


Single Braid 


CALCULATED AT 68° F. 


Pounds 
Per Mile. 


730 
540 


E. B. B. 


6.44 

8.70 
12.37 
14.69 
18.08 
21.96 
28.48 
48.98 


Ohms Resistance Per 
B. B. 


7.53 
10.19 
14.47 
17.19 
21.15 
25.70 
33.33 
57.29 


AND RESISTANCE 


Mile 
Steel. 


8.90 
12.04 
17.10 
20.31 
25.00 
30.37 
39.39 
67.71 


DIMENSIONS, RESISTANCES AND SAFE CARRYING CAPACITY OF 
COPPER WIRES 


Diameter 
B.&S. in Mils or Area in Ohms Lbs. Per Safe Amperes 

Gauge Thousandths Circular Per 1,000 Ft. Rubber Weather- 

No. of an Inch Mils 1,000 Ft. Wire knss Covered proof 

1,000 1,000,000 .01038 3,550 650 1,000 

894 800,000 .01297 2,880 550 840 

775 600,000 -0173 2,210 450 680 

707 500,000 .02076 1,875 390 590 

632 400,000 .02596 1,530 330 500 

rie 548 300,000 .0346 1,185 270 400 

0000 460 211,600 -04906 750 210 312 

000 410 167,805 06186 600 ete 262 

00 365 133,079 07801 500 150 220 

0 325 105,592 .0983 400 127 185 

1 289 83,694 .1240 300 107 156 

Q 258 66,373 1564 250 90 131 

3 229 52,633 1972 200 76 110 

4 204 41,742 .2487 160 65 92 

5 182 33,102 -3136 140 54 qe 

6 162 26,250 8955 110 46 65 

8 128 16,509 .6288 75 33 46 

10 102 10,381 1. 50 Q4 32 

12 81 6,530 1.590 35 17 23 

14 ar 4,107 2.591 25 12 16 

16 51 2,583 4.019 16 6 8 

18 40 1,624 6.391 12 3 5 


TO DETERMINE THE SIZE OF COPPER WIRE FOR ANY GIVEN 


SERVICE 
Let C. M. = Cir. Mils. 
Let D. = Distance. 
Let C. = Current. 
Let L. = Loss in Volts. 


21.5 is a “Constant” or figure always used. 


C.XD.X 21.5 
Then a = Cin Mile, 


Ae 


Example.—It is required that 100 amperes be carried 350 feet on a 110 volt 
circuit, with a loss of 2 per cent. in voltage. What is the Cir. Mils required? 

Example.—First, ascertain the loss in volts, or 2 per cent. of 110 = 2.2 
volts. 


100 X 350 X 21.5 
2.2 


= 337.500 Cir. Mils. or two—No. 000 Wires. 


Where a wiring table is not at hand andit is desired to ascertain the weight 
of any bare copper conductor, it can be roughly determined in accordance with 
the following: 

1000 feet of wire having an area of 1000 circular mils weighs approximately 
three pounds, and the weight of any bare conductor can, therefore, be deter- 
mined by multiplying its area in circular mils by .003. 


CURRENT REQUIRED TO FUSE WIRES OF COPPER, GERMAN 
SILVER AND IRON 


B.&S. Copper German Silver — Iron B.&S. Copper German Silver, Iron 

Gauge. Amperes. Amperes. Amperes. Gauge. Amperes. Amperes. Amperes- 
10 333. 169. 101. 26 20.6 10.6 6.22 
11 284. 146. 86. Q7 We fese/ On 5.36 
12 235. 120.7 71.2 28 14.7 7.5 4.45 
13 200. 102.6 63. 29 12.5 6.41 3.79 
14 166. 85.2 50.2 30 10.25 5.26 3.11 
15 139. 71.2 42.1 all 8.75 4.49 2.65 
16 ile 60. 30.0 32 7.26 3.73 22 
Wel 99) 50.4 32.6 33 6.19 3.18 1.88 
18 82.8 42.5 25.1 34 5.12 2.64 1.55 
19 66.7 34.2 20.2 35 4.37 2.24 1.33 
20 58.3 29.9 ie) 36 3.62 1.86 1.09 
Q1 49.3 25.3 14.9 37 3.08 1.58 .93 
22 41.2 21.1 12.5 38 RROD 1.31 Bah 
23 34.5 Ab feE 10.9 39 2.20 TAS .67 
24 28.9 14.8 8.76 40 1.86 95 56 
25 24.6 12.6 7.46 


92 


PE DPT UNG ELE APN TD Ree Se eCrcOR Rr aAaNa 


ELECTRICAL UNITS 


The electrical units are derived from the following mechanical units of the 
metric system: 

Centimeter. Unit of Length—One thousand millionth part of a quadrant 
of the earth’s surface. 

Gramme. Unit of Weight—Weight of a cubic centimeter of water at a 
temperature of 4 degrees centigrade. 
Unit of Time—The time of one swing of a pendulum making 


86,400 swings in a solar day. 


Second. 
The unit of area is the square centimeter. The unit of volume is the cubic 
centimeter. 

Volt—Unit of electro-motive force; pressure of potential. Symbol E. 
Ohm—Unit of resistance. Symbol R. 

M egohm—1,000,000 ohms. 

Ampere—Unit of current. Symbol C. 

Ampere hours—Current in amperes X time in hours. 

Watt—Unit of power. Product of 1 volt X 1 ampere. 
E. C. (746) watts equal one horse power. 

Horse Power—746 watts. 

Kilowatt—1000 watts. Written K. W. 

Kilowatt Hours—Kilowatts X time in hours. 

Farad—Unit of capacity. 

Microfarad—One-millionth of a farad. Written M. F. 
Unit of Quantity—Quantity of current which, impelled by one 


Symbol W. or 


Coulomb. 
volt, would pass through one ohm in one second. 
Joule. Unit of Work—The work done by one watt in one second. 


MILS AND CIRCULAR MILS 


The one-thousandth part of one inch, written .001, and usually called one 
mil, is taken as the unit of diameter, from which one square mil would be the 
unit of area. If you measure the diameter of a round wire in thousandths of 
an inch, or mils, by means of a micrometer, and multiply this number by it- 
self, i.e., square it, you obtain in square mils the cross-sectional area of a square 
wire having four sides, each the same length as the diameter of the round wire 
that you have calipered. 

Circular mil (usually written C. M.) applies to all round wires, and has a 
value .785 times that of the square mil. 

Consequently the square of the diameter of any round wire, measured in 
mils, gives its cross-sectional area in circular mils, without any further multi- 
plication. 

Conversely, if you extract the square root of the number of circular mils 
by which a round wire is listed, you obtain its diameter in mils. 

Let d=diameter of a wire in mils. 
n=the number of wires. 
C.M.=the area of the conductor in cir. mils. 
Then C. M.=d?n 
ya C.M. re /C.M. 


da? n 


A mil is 1-1000 of an inch. 


The diameter of a circle expressed in mils and squared gives its area in circu- 
lar mils. Expressed in millimeters and squared gives its area in circular 
millimeters. 


A Wire Rod, commonly called a Rod, is formed by hot rolling from the copper 
billet and is usually made into wire by cold drawing thru dies. 


A Right Lay Strand is one in which the wires go in the same way as the 
threads of a right-hand screw. A Left Lay Strand is the opposite. 


A Perfect Strand is made by twisting around one wire as a center, six 
wires, around this twelve wires, eighteen, twenty-four, and so on. 


A Lay of a Strand is the length of the helix, measured parallel to the axis of 
the strand, which each wire forms around the center of the strand. 


WEIGHT OF COPPER 
A convenient formula for weight of copper is as follows: 


(miles)? x K.W. X k 
(K.V.)? X % loss 


Lbs. copper in line = 


k = a constant depending on phase, system and power factor; for 100% 
power factor, single or two-phase, k = 363; for three-phase, K = 273. 


OHM’S LAW 


The Electrical Units—volt, ohm and ampere, which are most frequently 
used, have fortunately been established so as to bear simple but important re- 
lations to one another, based upon the current increasing and decreasing with 
the voltage, but increasing when the resistance decreases, and decreasing when 
the resistance increases. 

Using the Symbols mentioned above, this is expressed in the following 
equations: 


E E 
Csa= = GR: == Ge ratts) 12 
R Be Caulk R C DaCav(orwatts):—1C4ns 
E. C. (or watts) = = 
R 
TABLE SHOWING DIFFERENCE BETWEEN WIRE GAUGES IN 
DECIMAL PARTS OF AN INCH 
Old Eng- 
Washburn lish 
& Moen Trenton from 
No. of American or Birming- Mfg. Co., Iron Co., Brass 
Wire Brown & ham or Worcester, Trenton, New Mfrs. No. of 
Gauge Sharpe Stubs Mass. Nid British List Wire 
OOCO00 Rens sata A6 000000 
00000) S2c.58 Ht 43 45 00000 
0000 46 454 393 4 A 0000 
000 40964 425 362 36 372 000 
00 -3648 38 331 100 348 00 
0 32495 34 307 305 324 0 
i 2893 43) 283 285 3 1 
2 25763 284 -263 265 276 2 
3 22942 -259 244 245 stow 3 
4 20431 -238 225 1225 -232 4 
5 18194 ered 207 .205 Lays 5 
6 16202 -203 -192 19 .192 6 
Bi 14428 18 aulefyy A775 176 a 
8 12849 165 162 16 16 8 
9 11443 -148 148 145 144 9 
10 -10189 -134 135 13 128 10 
11 090742 ais Le, Diets: 116 11 
12 -080808 -109 105 105 104 We 
13 071961 -095 -092 .0925 092 ae 13 
14 064084 083 .08 08 -08 083 14 
15 -057068 .072 072 07 072 072 15 
16 -05082 065 -063 061 064 065 16 
17 045257 058 054 -0525 -056 058 17 
18 040303 -049 047 O45 -048 049 18 
19 .03589 -042 O41 .039 04 04 19 
20 .031961 -035 -035 034 -036 035 20 
Q1 .028462 -032 032 03 .032 0315 Q1 
22 .025347 .028 028 eel .028 0295 2 
23 .022571 025 025 O24 -024 027 23 
QA .0201 .022 023, 0215 022 .025 24 
25 0179 .02 02 019 02 .023 25 
26 01594 .018 018 018 .018 0205 26 
QT 014195 O16 017 017 0164 OL875 27 
28 .012641 014 -016 .016 0148 0165 28 
29 -O11257 013 O15 O15 0136 0155 29 
30 .010025 012 014 O14 0124 01375 30 
31 .008928 OL 0135 013 .0116 01225 31 
32 .00795 .009 013 012 0108 OM25ES2 
33, .00708 008 O11 O11 OL 01025 833 
34 .006304 .007 OL OL .0092 0095 34 
35 .005614 005 -0095 009 .0084 009. 35 
36 005 .004 .009 -008 0076 0075 36 
37 004453 0085 -00725 .0068 0065 ot 
38 .003965 .008 .0065 006 00575 = 38 
39 003531 0075 .00575 0052 005 39 
40 .003144 .007 005 0048 0045 40 


COPPER FOR VARIOUS SYSTEMS OF DISTRIBUTION 


Power transmitted, distance, line loss and voltage of lamps constant. All 
wires of each system, same size. 


System. Copper Required. 
9-Wire, single-phase or direct current. ...--... +. .¢--=-+2--s-0-- sae 1.000 
3-Wire, single-phase or direct current. ..........+--1.+.2..-:......5. B75 
AeWire, single-phase on direct Current aman ei yet det tae n de ites 222 
Aa Wires LwWO-pP base aaumversee iene tert eee tne ee eer hei ere tel eee reas 1.000 
4-Wire, three-phase with neutral’. 775.00... senna ores 333 
3-Wirescthree-phase Del tame icpse. tee k ee rt sf crete ae rain een or ot aee 15 


CRP NGe eA me wera al CONC AT Arr; OG 93 
I 


SAFE CARRYING CAPACITY OF INSULATED WIRES 
As given by National Board of Fire Underwriters 


Size Copoclarnviils Carrying Capacity in Amperes 
B. &S. | 

Rubber Covered Weatherproof 

1000000 650 1000 

900000 600 920 

800000 550 840 

700000 500 760 

600000 450 680 

500000 400 600 

| 450000 370 550 

400000 325 500 

350000 300 450 

300000 Q75 400 

250000 240 350 

0000 211600 .00 225 325 

000 167772.16 75 Q75 

00 133079 . 04 150 225 

0 105560.01 125 200 

1 83694 .49 100 150 

Q 66357 . 76 90 125 

3 52624 36 80 100 

4 41738 .49 70 90 

5 33087 . 61 55 80 

6 26244 00 50 70 

8 16512 .25 35 50 

10 10383 .61 25 30 

12 6528 . 64 20 25 

14 4108.81 15 20 

16 2580. 64 6 10 

18 } 1624.09 & 5 


The lower limit is specified for rubber-covered wires to prevent gradual 


deterioration of the rubber from the heat of the wire. 


is not taken into consideration in the table. 


FINE MAGNET WIRE 


No. Ohms, Per Pound 


B. &§&. Single Double 

Gauge. Diameter Cotton Cotton 
20 .0319 3.15) 3.02 
21 .0284 4.97 4.72 
22 .0253 7.87 744 
23 -0225 12.45 Ub srl 
24 -0201 19.65 18.25 
25 0179 30.9 28.45 
26 -0159 48.5 44.3 
Q7 .0142 76.5 68.8 
28 .0126 120. 106.5 
29 .0112 190.5 164. 
30 .0100 294.5 252. 
31 .0089 461. 384.5 
32 .0079 nlite 585. 
33 .0070 1115. 880. 
34 .0063 Lilie 1315. 
35 .0056 2640. 1960. 
36 005 4070. 2890 
37 .0044 6180. 4230. 
38 -0039 9430. 6150. 
39 .0035 14200. 8850 
40 .0031 21300. 12500 


The question of drop 


Feet, Per Pound 


Single 
Cotton 


311 
389 
491 
624 
778 
958 
1188 
1533 
1903 
2461 
2893 
3483 
4414 
5688 
6400 
8393 
9846 
11636 
13848 
18286 
24381 


DATA ON SOLID WIRES LARGER THAN 4/0 


No. B. & S. 


Gauge. Dia. Mils. Circular Mils. 
5/0 515 265,225 
6/0 575 330,625 
7/0 640 409,600 
8/0 710 504,100 
9/0 785 616,225 

10/0 865 748,225 

11/0 950 902,500 


12/0 1040 1,081,600 


1.29 


80 
1.00 
1.24 
1.53 


1.86 
2.25 
2.73 
3.27 


Double 
Cotton 


298 
370 
461 
584 
745 
903 
1118 
1422 
1759 
2207 
2534 
2768 
3737 
4697 
6168 
6737 
7877 
9309 
10666 
11907 
14222 


Ohms, Per 


Feet Per Pound Pounds Per Foot 


Mile 


-206 
165 


‘050 


ELECTRICAL UNITS AND MECHANICAL EQUIVALENTS 


ALTERNATING CURRENT 


At Voltage of 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 
1 Horse Power = = 38/5 3/10 1/5 3/20 1/8 Ampere 
1 Ampere = "92/3 81/38 5 62/3 8 1/3 Horse Power 


AMPERES PER Horse Power 


The following table shows number of amperes required per horse power 
when the percentage of efficiency of the motor is known. 


Efficiency of Motor. 75 Per Cent. 80 Per Cent. 85 Per Cent. 90 Per Cent. 
At 110 Volts. 9 Amp. 8.4 Amp. 7.9 Amp. 7.5 Amp. 
At 220 Volts. 4.5 Amp. 4.2 Amp. 3.95 Amp. 3.75 Amp. 
At 500 Volts. 1.98 Amp. 1.86 Amp. 1.75 Amp. 1.66 Amp. 


AMPERES Perr GENERATOR 


K.W. 125 Vs. 250 Vs. 500 Vs. Appx.H.P. K.W. 125 Vs. 250 Vs. 500 Vs. Appx. H.P. 


1 8 4 Q 1.3 30. 240 120 60 40 
2 16 8 4 2.7 37.5 300 150 75 50 
3. 24 12 6 4.0 40. 320 160 80 53 
5. 40 20 10 6.7 50. 400 200 100 67 
7.5 60 30 15 10. 60. 480 240 120 80 
10. 80 40 20 13. 75. 600 300 150 100 
12,5 100 50 25 Ile 100. 800 400 200 134 
15. 120 60 30 20. 125. 1000 500 250 167 
20. 160 80 40 27. 150. 1200 600 300 201 
25. 200 100 50 34. 200. 1600 800 400 268 


Amperes Per Moror 


H.P. Per Cent. Eff. Watts Input. 50 Volts. 100 Volts. 220 Volts. 500 Volts. 
3 


34 70 800 16 7 4 2 
14 70 1600 32 15 a 3 

3 15 2980 60 Q7 14 6 

5 80 4660 93 42 21 9 
1% 85 6580 132 60 30 13 
10 85 8780 176 80 40 18 
15 85 13200 264 120 60 26 
20 85 17600 352 160 80 35 
25 85 21900 438 199 100 44 
30 90 24900 498 226 113 50 
40 90 33200 664 301 151 66 
50 90 41400 828 376 188 83 
60 90 49700 994 452 226 99 
70 90 58000 1160 527 264 116 
80 90 66300 1330 603 302 133 
90 90 74600 1490 678 339 149 
100 90 82900 1660 155 377 166 
120 90 99500 1990 905 453 199 
150 90 124000 2480 1130 564 248 


C = Current in Amperes. 


HP = Horse Power. 
E = Voltage. 
K = Efficiency of Motor. 
c _ HP x 74600 
| BX 
CONDUCTIVITIES 
At 0° C. At 100° C, 
Metals AGS 22s, At 212° F. 
Silvershardheas erence ae ee ea ee een 100. 71.56 
Gopperivhard Gertatirwtute capes Tmt aoe ne a Me a ree eh 99.95 70.27 
Golds hard. sy cece ek eee aie eee, eee 77.96 55.90 
ZAC MPLESSE yey ciel sice eke RIA on cx cP rere a 29.02 20.67 
@Wadmivimeaty act he Mees Sete ce re we Dl eek PRE) 16.77 
latin AsO tee see RE ee ete oe 18.00 
TirGnsaSOl teeters ee ister eer eines AS iy SMe, le 16.80 
dt DT te cree cel, Seen ac of ley Bas Atala eel Onze MORCRE RCH eRe ae Pra 12.36 8.67 
LA pes tce aa rete wot Mere ARs feces ra aks «poe als 8.32 5.86 
FAT SEIN Core Paar aetna tee ned ey arate sick. | kc ope n= 4.76 3.33 
FANEMNONY peers eee ori © aR terol ae 4.62 3.26 
Mercury puresane mre pirat tice verre cae ent 1.60 
Bismuth eeweerante ay tr ae haan erie te eta: to 1.245 0.878 


94 


PBT isl NIGSE IG lr 7 AWN D RAE WW SP tC Os ing Na 


| Birmingham 


COMPARATIVE WEIGHTS OF WIRES 


ce | eR ee eet | eae Weight in Pounds per 1000 Fee 
= z - . Gauge Copper Aluminum. Iron or Steel Brass” 
0000 .460 0000 454 400 394 0000 640.5 194.5 558.4 605.18 
000 409 6431 | A425 ast . 363 000 507.8 154.3 442.8 479.91 
00 364 7977 | . 380 . 348 BOOM 00 402.8 12273 351.2 380. 67 
0 .324 8617 340 324 . 307 0 319.5 97.04 278.5 301.82 
1 289 2977 | . 300 . 300 . 283 1 953.3 76.93 220.9 239 . 35 
Q .257 6270 . 284 . 276 . 263 Q 200.9 61.02 ilpeay, 189.82 
3 | .229 4235 . 259 diye) 244 3 159.3 48 38 149.5 150.52 
4 | 204 3075 . 238 E282 B225 4 L263, 38.39 110.2 119.38 
5 181 9411 . 220 Seale 207 5 100.2 30.43, 87.40 94.666 
6 162 0232 . 203 192 y192 6 79 44 24.13 70.00 75.075 
fh 144 2858 .180 176 aalreee if 63.03 19.14 55.54 59.545 
8 .128 4902 .165 .160 .162 8 49.98 15.18 44.04 47.219 
| 
9 .114 4238 | 148 144 .148 9 39.61 12.04 34.91 37.437 
10 .101 8973 134 .128 6%) 10 31.43 9.546 27.70 29 . 687 
11 .090 7432 .120 eG 121 ik 24.90 7.569 21.94 23.549 
12 .080 8083 .109 104 106 12 19.76 6.004 17.41 18.676 
ES) .071 9619 095 092 .092 13 15.69 4.762 13.83 14.809 
14 .064 0839 .083 .080 080 14 12.44 Ont to 10.96 | 11.746 
15 .057 0684 .072 072 072 15 9.869 2.994 8.696 | 9.315 
16 .050 8209 065 064 .063 16 7.812 2.374 6.883 (Latsteytl 
17 045 2573 | 058 059 054 ‘We 6.212 1.883 5.473 Onsoul 
18 .040 3028 049 048 048 18 4.916 | 1.493 4.332 4.645 
19 .035 8907 042 040 041 19 3.901 | 1.184 3.438 3.684 
20 .031 9616 035 036 .035 20 3.100 .939 1 Qriol 2.920 
Q1 028 4626 .032 032 .032 Q1 2.459 TAA 7 2.166 | deo) Lo 
QQ 025 3467 028 028 029 22 1,938 .590 7 1.707 | 1,838 
Q3 .022 5719 025 024 026 23, 1.546 468 3 1.362 | 1.457 
24 .020 1009 022 022 . 023 Q4 1223 371 4 1.078 | 11 1s) 
25 .017 9004 .020 020 . 020 25 .969 9 | .294 6 854 6 .916 3 
26 .015 9408 018 .018 .018 26 Hey 2 .233 6 674 3 i 26ma 
Q7 014 1957 016 016 4 O17 QT 610 4 .185 3 .501 8 | 516 3 
28 012 6416 014 .014 8 016 28 480 6 146 9 .423 4 457 0 
29 OM ony .013 013 6 O15 Q9 . 386 5 SLUGS 340 6 362 4 
30 .010 0253 012 012 4 O14 30 eked. yf 092 4 266 7 287 4 
31 | .008 9278 010 O11 6 .013 2 31 239 8 AO omo) PAD We . 228 0 
Ry 007 9504 009 010 8 012 8 oe LOSE .058 1 .168 6 .180 8 
33, .007 0800 .008 010 0 O11 8 33 152 6 046 1 lism 143 4 
34 .006 3049 | .007 009 2 010 4 34 120i 036 5 .105 9 LISai 
35 .005 6147 005 008 4 009 5 35 094 9 .029 0 .083 9 .090 1 
36 .005 0000 004 .007 6 009 0 36 (Oresy ef .023 0 066 6 O71 5 
POLE LINE DATA WIRES ON POLE LINES 


Showing the distance between poles according to the number of poles used 


Also the weight of wire in the suspension between poles, 


allowing for sag, 


per mile calculated on weights of ““O. K.” triple-braided line wires. 
Nina sins pa a Eee Tn =e 1 
Distance between poles in ft. We ee lsi | 188" 117’ 105’ 96 | 88" 81’ 75° 70’ 
ian On Weight e 7 2 ae ao es petra: ake Som a 
Gauge Capacity Lbs. WEIGHT IN POUNDS OF WIRE IN SPAN 
Solid | Stranded Per Mile 
1000000 19400 655 562 491 435 390 356 326 300 Q77 258 
900000 17600 597 51) 446 393 355 324 295 Q72 241 235 
800000 15800 536 459 400 355 318 290 266 244 226 Q11 
700000 14000 473, 405 354 313 280 256 234 Q15 200 186 
| | 
| 600000 11800 405 347 303 268 240 219 201 | 184 171 159 
| 500000 10000 340 281 253 224 200 183 168 154 143 | 133 
| 450000 9100 314 269 235 208 186 170 156 140 132 123 
| 400000 8200 284 243 212 188 168 153 140 129 120 111 
350000 7100 239 204 178 158 141 129 118 109 101 94 
300000 6200 209 179 156 138 124 113 103 95 88 82 
250000 5200 175 150 | 130 115 103 94 86 79 74 69 
0000 4050 136 117 102 89 81 74 68 62 58 
000 3320 11g 96 84 74 67 61 56 51 47 
00 2650 89 77 67 59 53 48 44 41 
0 2150 | 72 62 54 48 43 | 39 36 33 | 
u 1670 56 48 42 37 33 30 28 
2 1370 46 40 35 31 Q7 Q5 23 
3 1050 36 31 Q7 24 21 19 
4 865 29 25 22 19 17 16 
5 710 Q4 20 18 16 14 
6 590 20 17 15 13 12 
| 395 1S y) vali 10 9 
iW | 280 9 8 7 6 : 


Coleen yo AYE YOUNG AT A OG 


95 


WIRING FORMULA FOR DIRECT CURRENT 


The constant 22 is obtained as fol- 
lows: A copper wire with a sectional 
area of 10.7 CM, has a resistance of one 
One ampere through one 


D 


C = current in amperes. 


= distance (one way) in feet. 


CM = circular mils. 
ohm per foot. 


ohm resistance loses one volt. 


D >< 22x C 
Volts lost = CM The distance being measured one 
way, we multiply by 2 to get the total 
D X 22 X ¢ length of the circuit. As 10.7 X 2 = 


CM = —— 


volts lost 21.4 we may use 22 for simplicity, this 


being near enough for practical work. 
oO 


FORMULA 


of wire that should be used to carry a 


WIRING 


From Ohm’s Law the proper size 
current any distance with a given loss in volts can readily be determined, and 


the following is recommended: 


Length of run in feet X amperes X 21.5 a , 
= —— = Circular Mils. 
Volts lost 


In above the number of feet must be measured one way, not both sides of 
the circuit; volts lost should be taken as the drop allowed in volts, and circular 
mils show the size of wire to use. 

Example.—What size wire should be used on a 250 volt circuit where it is 
necessary to carry 200 amperes a distance of 350 feet to a center of distribution 
with a loss of 3 per cent. under full load? 


3 per cent of 250 = 7.5 volts lost. 
350 X 200 X 21.5 


hee 
which is the next size heavier. 


= 200667 circular mils, or No. 0000 B. & S. gauge, 


In using this or any other formula to determine the size of copper to use, 
care should be taken to see that the size adopted is not smaller than allowed 
in the Underwriters’ table of safe carrying capacities, which are fixed without 
considering the loss in line. 

The general practice in balanced 3-wire direct current systems with a cen- 
tral neutral wire is to figure the line loss on the same basis as a 2-wire system 
of the voltage between the two outside wires with the amount of current car- 
ried in the outside wires. The central neutral wire should be made the same 
size as either of the others. 


REASON WHY 
For the benefit of those who care to know the reason why, the above Wir- 
ing Formula is based upon one foot of copper wire, with a cross-sectional area 
of one circular mil, having a resistance of very close to 10.75 ohms, so that the 
resistance of any copper wire = 
Length in feet * 10.75 


Circular mils 


Substituting this expression for R. in Ohm’s Law: 
C X length in feet * 10.75 


Circular mils 


ny 


= 


C X length in feet * 10.75 
E 


and Circular mils = 


In the Wiring Formula, however, the length in feet is considered the “run,” 
one side of the circuit, and the term 10.75 is multiplied by 2. 


WIRING 
Area of Conductor in C. M.=K a Current in Main Conductor= et 
x? j 
Sow. fei : D’xWxKxA 
=k Weight of ¢ pee ue 
P=K Oye ue a PNT MIN See 


W=Total Watts delivered. 

D=Distance of transmission in feet one way. 
E=Voltage between main conductors at consumer’s end. 
P=Loss in line in percentage of power delivered. 


K, T, & A are given in the following table. 


ALTERNATING CURRENT FORMULAE 


WwW 
1= EXPE. for single-phase circuit. 
hie ay 
I= 0:50 x E 3 PF for two-phase circuit. 
1 = 0.58 X E Y Pr for three-phase circuit. 


1 = Current in line in amperes; W = energy delivered in watts; E = 
potential between mains in volts; P.F. = power factor. When power factor 
cannot be accurately determined it may be assumed as follows: Lighting load 
with no motors, 0.95; lighting and motors, 0.85; motors only, 0.80, 

From the above formulae if W., E. and P.F. are the same it will be seen: 

Current in each wire two-phase equals 0.5 current in each wire single- 
phase. 

Current in each wire three-phase equals 0.58 current in each wire single- 
phase. 

Current in each wire three-phase equals 1.16 current in each wire two- 
phase. 

On alternating current systems of wiring, single-phase or 4-wire two-phase, 
that carry non-inductive loads, such as incandescent lamps, the printed wiring 
formula should be used, but where the load is inductive—motors or are lamps— 
an addition of 25 per cent. to the number of circular mils obtained by the wir- 
ing formula is recommended, if the current required has been figured on the 
same basis as used for direct current, to compensate for the power factor. 
Single-phase 3-wire circuits may be figured on the same basis as direct current 
3-wire, if non-conductive. 


THREE-PHASE WIRING 


In a 3-wire balanced three-phase system the current in each wire of pri- 
mary and secondary, to the point where the 3-wire system is divided into 2-wire, 
is 1.732 times the amount it would be if three separate single-phase circuits were 
used, owing to each wire having to carry current for two-phase. 

For instance, in carrying 600 incandescent lamps, or 300 amperes—100 
amperes on each phase—on 3-wire balanced three-phase secondary mains, the 
current in each of the three wires will be 100 X 1.732, or 173.2 amperes, and this 
quantity should be used in the wiring formula. 

In other respects the three-phase 3-wire system may be figured the same 
as a 2-wire system, and each of the three wires made the same size. 

Three-phase motors generally bear the manufacturer’s name plate, showing 
amperes per phase, which represents the total current in each line wire, so that 
the multiplier of 1.732 should not be used to obtain size of copper. 

In general: 
amperes per phase X volts X 1.732 & power factor 

746 
H. P. X 746 
Volts X 1.732 & power factor 


HP. = 


Amperes per phase = 


The term power factor is less than 1, and varies approximately from .65 
for 1 H. P. to .90 for 50 H. P. motors. 
In calculating the total load from switchboard voltmeters and ammeters: 


Watts = amperes per phase X volts X 1.732 « power factor. 
FORMULA 
2) 1 ne ALUE OF k= 
- Value Per Cent. Power Factor 
System of ] 
“ 100 95 90 a Sk 80 
iePhases Dac 6.04 2160 2400 2660 3000 3380 
2 Phase 4 Wire 12.08 1080 1200 1330 | 1500 1690 
3 Phase 3 Wire 9.06 | 1080 1200 1330 | 1500 1690 
saa LS Taro VALUE OF 1) = lie 
Value | Per Cent. Power Factor 
System A | ie 
; | 100 95 90 | feiss 80 
1 Phase D. C. 6.04 | 1.00 1.05 ent Vea bel 125 
2 Phase 4 Wire 12.08 50 153 95) .59 66 
3 Phase 3 Wire 9.06 58 61 64, 68 he 


96 P Berl NEG EL APN DRE RY co ee CaO a eae Nee 


The following tables show the amperes per phase taken by standard speed BARE COPPER WIRE—Resistance Calculated at 20° C. or 68° F. 
alternating current induction motors. Variation in speed will cause a diflerence aaa See ee Ans a a See ee : 
in current consumption of as much as ten per cent. A. W. G. |Ohmsper 1000Ft.| Ohms per Mile |_Feet perOhm | Ohms per Pound 
0000 049 0 259 | 20 440. 000 076 4 
ty —__SINGLE-PHASE oe eee 000 061 8 -326 | 16 210. “000 121 5 
ie ll0v | 220v | 440v |) 550 v | 1100v | 2080v | 2200v 00 077 9 All | 12 850. 000 193 1 
H. P Amps. Amps. Amps. Amps. Amps. Amps. Amps. 0 -098 3 .519 10 190. .000 307 1 
1 12.0 58 2 8 29 1 123 9 654 8 083. .000 488 3 
2 21 6 10.8 5A lie 2 156 3 825 6 410. | 000 776 5 
3 30 6 16 2 8.0 62 3 .197 0 1.040 5 084. | 001 235 
5 52 0 @7 0 126{ 10.0 4 248 5 1.312 4 031. 001 963 
| 
| 72.0 37.8 18.0 14.4 5 .813 8 1.654 3 197. 003 122 
10 100. RONEN wedla||| § 30) 0 6 | 395 1 2.086 2 535. 004 963 
15 144. 72.0 36.0 28 8 7 498 2 2.630 2 001. .007 892 
20 189. 90.0 45.0 36.0 8 .628 2 3.317 1 595. .012 55 
25 239. 113 55.81 45.0 9 792 1 4.182 1 265. 019 95 
30 270. 135 70.0| 54.0} 28.8 | 18.0 | 14.4 7 -998 9 5.274 1 003. | .031 73 
40 360. 184, 92.0] 72.0| 38.0 | 21.6 | 19.8 eT ere | 6.650 | 795.3 -050 45 
50 225. | 115 90.0| 48.6 | 25.2 | 23.4 We 1.588 8.386 630.7 -080 22 
100 450. | 226. | 180. | 90.0 | 48.6 | 50.4 A eee 0! oe 1278 
150 666. | 332. | 266. | 144. 68.4 | 72.0 ae ae ae as fete 
200 864. | 440. | 360. | 176. 95.4 | 88.2 Lee ee duet: ae td 
250 1054. | 528. | 498. | 226. | 117 ul HS eos tse ae ole 
300 1306 648 522. | 270 144. | 133. oe a A 197.8 815 3 
450 972 7710 404 Seg Clliene: 18 6.385 33.71 156.9 1.296 
675 1422. | 1124 608 312. | 304. ae Shy AO: ae 2.061 
1000 | 2124. | 1696 910 450. | 458 a EO 5381 98. 66 3.278 
21 12.80 67.60 | 78.4 5.212 
TWO-PHASE 22 16.14 85.24 62.05 8.287 
~10v | 220v | 440v | 550v | 1100v | 2080v | 2200v 23 20.36 107.5 49.21 13.18 
H. P. ee Teme. | ercee | eee Nhe rer Q4 | 25.67 135.5 39.02 20.95 
1 6.0 2.9 is bal 25 32.37 170.9 30.95 33. 32 
2 10.8 5.4 2.7 21 26 40.81 Q15.5 24.54 52.97 
3 15.3 8.1 4.0 3 1 a7 | 51.47 ee a ters 19.46 84.23 
5 26.0 | 13.5 63 5.0 28 64.90 | 349.7 15.43 133.9 
ip 1% 36.0 18.9 9.0 7.2 29 81.84 432.1 12.24 213.0 
10 50.0 25.2 12.2 10.0 30 NOES 544.9 9.707 338 .6 
15 72.0 | 36.0 is Oe tans 31 130.1 687.0 7.698 538.4 
20 94.5 45.0 29 5 18.0 32 164.1 866.4 — 6.105 856.2 
25 119 56.7 27.9 | 22.5 
toi eine) Ietere. | sae.04| Mesclomimiio.0 si 10 Baler) Pn See 
50 alas 67.6 | 46.0 | 24.9 | 19.6 | 11.7 ERODES 28 
100 295. 113 90.0 45.0 24 3 25 2 An waG in Diameter Mils ie : Circular Mils _ ips per 1000 ft. | Lbs. per Mile 
150 333 166. | 133. 720 | 3421 360 0000 460. 0000 211 600.00 640.5 3 382. 
200 432. 200. | 180. 88.0 | 47.7 | 44.1 000 409.6431 167 772.16 507.8 2 682. 
250 527. 964. | 214. 113. Bo |) 55 8 00 364.7977 133 079.04 402.8 2 127. 
0 324.8617 105 560.01 319.5 1 687. 
300 653. 324. | 261. 135. 72.0 | 66.6 1 289 2977 83 694.49 253.3 1 338. 
450 486. | 385. 202. 114. 103. 2 257.6270 66 357.76 200.9 1 061. 
675 711. | 562. 304. 156. 152. 3 229.4235 | 52 624.36 159.3 841.2 
1000 1062. | 848. | 455. | 925. | 929. 4 204.3075 |__ 41 738.49 126.3 667.1 
5 181.9411 33 087.61 100.2 529.1 
-THREE-PHASE 6 162.0232 26 244.00 79.44 419.6 
~Tiov | 220v| 440v | 550v | 1100v | 2080v | 2200v_ i Leh eee aratocee 65 08 peek 
H. P. Amps. Amps. Amps. Amps. Amps. Amps. 5 Amps. 8 128 4902 16 512.25 49.98 Z 
. 9 114.4238 13 087.36 39.61 209.3 
1 6.5 3.2 1.6 1.3 10 101.8973 10 383.61 31.43 165.9 
2 12.0 6.0 3.0 2.3 11 90.7432 8 226.49 24.90 131.6 
3 17.0 9.0 4.5 3.5 12 | 80.8083 6 528.64 19.76 104.4 
5 29.0 15.0 7.0 5.5 13 71.9619 5 184.00 15.69 82.77 
14 64.0839 4 108.81 12.44 65. 64 
1% 40.0 | 21.0 10.0 8.0 15 | 57.0684 3 260.41 9.869 52.05 
a ane uae ae 11.0 16 50.8209 2 580.64 7.812 41.28 
: ; 16.0 ayy: RT a caG Er 
: 17 45.2573 2 052.09 6.212 32.74 
20 ES 50.0 | 25.0) 20.0 18 40. 3028 1 624.09 4.916 25.96 
¥ ; 19 35.8907 1 288.81 3.901 20.59 
30 150 750 | 890) 30.0 | 16,0] 10.0| 8.0 eS Ls 2 
40 200. | 102. 51.0| 40.0] 21.0 | 12.0] 11.0 p let Stee Beate Tass 
50 195. G4 Ol a50 On eTCO iaiote ia.0 22 25.3467 640.09 1.938 10.27 
a e 23 22.5719 510.76 1.546 8.143 
100 250 195. | 100 FOOL | eezlol laste 24 20.1009 404.01 1.923 6.458 
150 370 185. 148 80.0 38.0 40.0 25 | 17.9004 320.41 . 9699 5.121 
200 480 244. | 200 98.0 | 53.0 | 49.0 26 15.9408 252.81 71652 4.061 
250 586 293. | 238 125 65.0 | 62.0 27 14.1957 201. 64 6104 3.221 
@ «12. 6416 158.76 4806 2.554 
300 725 360. | 290. | '150. 80.0 | 74.0 29 11.2577 127.69 3865 2.026 
450 540. | 428. 225. 116. 114, 30 10, 0253 100.00 3027 1.606 
675 790. | 625. 338. 173. 169. 31 8.9278 79.21 | 2398 1.274 
1000 1180. | 942. | 506. | 250. 254. 32 7.9504 64.00 | 1937 1.010 


Cea Na eee ees LAV COIN CAT ALL, O G 


~ 


( 


; 


AMPERES PER MOTOR 


Direct Current 


% Efficiency 125v 220v 250v 500v 525y | 550v 
% 65 860 fs} 7.5 he 6.9 3.9 3.4 | Wey 1.6 136 
1 65 1 148 10.4 10.0 9.6 9.2 5.2 4.6 2.3 2.2 ae 
2 5 2 295 20.8 20.0 19.1 18.4 10.4 9.2 | 4.6 | 4.4 4.2 
QW 75 2 487 22.6 21.6 20.7 19.9 WS} 10.0 OA0N Boel 4.5 
314 75 3 480 | 31.6 30.3 29.0 27.8 Misses | 13.9 | 7.0 6.6 6.3 
5 80 4 662 | 42.4 | 40.5 38.8 37.3 Pile 18.6 9.3 8.0) 8.5 
7% 80 6 994 63.6 60.8 58.3 56.0 31.8 28.0 14.0 13.3 LOG 

10 | 85 8 776 79.8 Kier; (ey 70.2 39.9 35.1 Wa 16.7 16.0 

15 85 13 165 120. 114. 110. 105. 59.8 52.6 26.3 25.1 | 23.9 

20 90 16 578 151. 144, 138. 133. 75.4 66.3 33.2 31.6 30.1 

25 90 20) 722 188. 180. 173). 166. 94.2 82.9 41.4 39.5 erat 

30 | 90 24 867 | 226. 216. 207. 199. 113 99.4 AO | AT 4 45 2 

— | | 

40 | 90 33 155 | 301. 288. 276. 265. 151. 133. 66.3 63.2 60.3 

50 90 41 444 377. 360 B45. 332, 188. 166. 82.9 79.0 75 4 

70 90 58° 022 528. 505 484. 464. 264. 232. 116. wail 106. 

90 90 74 600 678. 649 622 Doe 339. | 298. 149. 142. 136. 
100 93 80 215 729. 697. 668. 642. 365 321. | 160. 153. | 146. 
125 93 100 269 912. 872. | 836. 802. 456. 401, 200. pole | 182. 
150 93 120 323 1094. 1046. : 1003. 963. 5AT i 481 : 241. 229 5 ae 219. 

NUMBER OF WIRES IN STRANDS, B. & S. GAUGE 
cas =F ae aa eS ee ee a = 
Mils 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 £G- i BG 18 19 | 20 21 22 23 24 
| | 
2000000 | 121 153 193 | 243 | 306 386 | 487 614 774 976 1231 15538 | 1958 2469 3113 3926 4950 
1750000 106 134 | 169 213 | 268 338 4.26 | 537 678 854 1077 1359 1713 2160 2724 3435 4331 
1500000 91 115 144 182 230 290 | 365 461 581 732 923 1164 1468 1852 2335 2944 3712 
1250000 76 95 120 152 | 191 241 | 304 384 484 610 770 970 1224 | 1543 | = 1946 2453 3094 
| | | 
1000000 61 76 96 121 153 193 Q44 307 | 387 488 616 776 979 | 1234 | 1557 | 1963 Q475 
950000 58 73 91 115 145 183 231 292 368 464 585 738 930 | 1173 1479 1865 | 2351 
900000 55 69 | 87 109 138 174 219 | 276 348 439 554 699 881 1111 1401 1766 | 2227 
850000 51 65 82 103 130 164. UY | Exar 329 415 523 660 832 1049 1323 1668 2104 
800000 48 61 77 97 123 154 195 246 310 391 493 621 783 988 | 1245 1570 1980 
750000 45 57 72 91 115 145 183 230 290 366 462 582 734 926 1167 1472 | 1856 
700000 42 53 Cf) 85 107 135 170 215 Q71 342 431 543 685 864 1090 1374 1732 
650000 39 50 63 79 100 126 158 200 252 317 | 400 505 636 802 1012 1276 | 1609 
600000 | 36 46 58 73 92 116 146 | 184 232 293, 369 466 587 TAL 934 1178 1485 
550000 33 42 53 | 67 84 106 134 | 169 213 269 339 4.27 538 679 856 1080 1361 
500000 - 30 38 48 | 61 aa 97 | 122 | 154 194 244 308 388 489 617 778 981 1237 
450000 27 34 43 55 69 sy |) TM) 138 174 220 | Q77 349 AU Gti 700 883 | 1114 
| | 
400000 24 31 39 49 61 UT 97 123 155 195 246 311 | 392 | 494 623, 785 990 
350000 21 Q7 34 43, 54 68 85 107 136 171 Q15 272 | = 343 432 545 687 866 
300000 | 18 23 | 29 36 46 58 73 92 116 146 185 233 | 294 370 467 589 742 
250000] 15 | 19 | 94 | 30 | 38 aC Pale ls Veet?” 97 | 192 154 Jo4_ | 245 | 309 | 389 491 | 619° 
NUMBER OF WIRES IN STRANDS, B. & S. GAUGE 
————= Sina, == — = ——— — —— = | ——— — SS ——_ _————— — —- 
Strand 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 | 34 35 36 
| | | | | 
4-0 207 261 330 415 524 660 833 1050 | 1324 1670 2106 2655 | 3348 | 4220 | 5324 | 6712 | 8464 
3-0 164 207 261 330 415 524 660 833 | 1050 1324 1670 2106 | 2655 | 3348 | 4220 | 5324 | 6712 
2-0 130 164 207 =| 261 330 | 415 524 COO S33) 1050 1324 | 1670 | 2106 | 2655 | 3348 | 4220 | 5324 
1-0 103 130 164 207 261 330 415 524 660 833 1050 1324 | 1670 | 2106 | 2655 | 3348 | 4220 
| | | | | | | | 
1 82 103 130 164 207 261 330 415 524 660 833 1050 | 1324 | 1670 | 2106 | 2655 | 3348 
2 65 | 82 103 130 164 207 261 330 415 524 660 833 | 1050 | 1324 | 1670 | 2106 | 2655 
3 52 65 82 103 130 164 207 261 | 330 415 524 660 833 | 1050 | 1324 | 1670 | 2106 
4 41 52 65 82 103 130 164 207 261 330 415 524 660 833 | 1050 | 1324 | 1670 
5 32 41 52 65 82 | 103 130 164 207 261 330 415 524 660 833 | 1050 | 1324 
6 26 32 4] Bl) Gi |) ER Il T1083 130 164 207 261 330 415 524 660 | 833 1050 
8 16 20 26 32 41 52 65 82 | 103 130 164 207 261 330 | 415 524 660 
9 13 16 20 26 32 4] 52 Col Se 108 130 164 207 26] 330) 415 524 
10 10 13 16 20 26 32 41 52 65 82 103 130 164 207 261 330 415 
12 6.4 8 10 13 16 20 26 32 4] 52 65 82 103 130 164 207 261 
14 4.0 5.1 6.4 8 10 13 16 20 26 32 41 52 65 82 103. 130 164 
16 2.5 3.2} 4.0 5.1 6.4 8 10 13 16 20 26 32 41 52 | 65! 82 103 
pas aso | | | | | 
18 UGA 2.0.1 (295). -S2| 450 Ny BAN 6s 8 10,9] 218 16 | 20/ 26] 382] 41] 52] 65 
20 1.0 TES a ae ela 2) || Boks 3.2] 4.0 5.1 6.4 8 10 13 LCT 200 26a Se 41 
22 ad) 1.0 1.3 1.6 2.0 le 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.1 6.4 & 10 13 16), 20 26 


98 


Poe Peis NY Gate bes AmNe Dah ayy aS 


CLOT Vig Ney! 


UNDERWRITERS’ RULES FOR SPACING OF SWITCHES—125 VOLTS 
OR LESS 


For Swrrcn aNd PANet Boarps 


Separation of Nearest Minimum 
Metal Parts of Break 

Opposite Polarity. Distance. 

lOvarnperes OF lessee crc earners 34 inch Vs inch 
WOE mitloVkoskunoe oor cco Adee oOo hae 1 inch 34 inch 
96-50) aIMmpeLese an eee caer ter etal = efabrey eee 114 inch 1 inch 

For INpIvipUAL SWITCHES 

TOsampencs Omlesspyer eee eke eect nae inch 34 inch 
ES Eis ESA d pee eo goo sane om SA Dm IOse. 14% inch 1 inch 
36-100;aMpCres pee eee etn mien tent 11% inch 114 inch 
OWES O00Famperestrrser erie tas) sb ier 214 inch 2 inch 
MECN ener KARE 5 du cla ceo eo on pu e Aes 234 inch 21% inch 
GOS 000ampenes see eee ries centre re 3 inch 234 inch 


FOR ALL SWITCHES 


125 ro 250 Vouts 


1 Oramperes OF less, ase 1s see eee 11% inch 114 inch 
TIESbramp eres ae ane cae sae etl screenees tients 134 inch 11% inch 
SMO eI a owns s sogdeoagwede sas 24 inch 2 inch 


TOTES OOD eres Meet ee eer rien 2% inch 214 inch 
MMAR ain Vath nacnadhsannarsooswo sc 234 inch 216 inch 
(AVIS OOM GH NSLS, on casoan an onaoeear ses 3 inch 234 inch 


250 to 600 Voirs 


TOvamperes Onilesse ciate iat as era 31% inch 3 inch 
MESbyamperesaa vie ape see eee 4 inch 31% inch 
CPI Chisi Toe San gern co oory ape clbioe me 6 41% inch 4 inch 


Auxiliary breaks or equivalent are recommended for switches designed 
for over 300 volts, and less than 100 amperes, and will be required on switches 
designed for use in breaking currents over 100 amperes, at a pressure of more 
than 300 volts. 

On switchboards, the above spacings for 250 volts direct current are also 
approved for 440 volts alternating current. Switches on switchboards with 
these spacings, intended for use on alternating-current systems with voltage 
above 250 volts, must be stamped with the voltage for which they are designed, 
followed by the letters “A. C.” 

For three-wire systems, switches must have the break distance required 
for circuits of the potential of the outside wires. 


GALVANIZED IRON WIRE 


Weight and Resistance Calculated at 68°F. 


Ohms Resistance per Mile 


B.W. Diameter Approx. Ni Ns 
Gauge in Mils. Pounds 
| per Mile E.B.B. B.B. Steel 
4 238 811 5.80 6.91 8.01 
6 203 | 590 | 7.97 9.49 11.02 
8 165 390 12.05 14.36 16.71 
9 148 314 14.97 17.84 20.70 
10 134 258 18.22 AISA D5a29 
11 120 206 22 82 27.19 Sillspo 
12 109 170 Q7 65 32.94 | 38 . 23 
14 083 99 47.48 56.56 65.66 


The breaking weight of any size of iron or steel wire, annealed and galvanized, 
is about equal to the weight per mile in pounds, multiplied for E. B. B.. by 3; 
for B. B., by 3.33; and for steel, by 3.75. 


STANDARD GRADES 
There are three standards of extra galvanized telephone and _ telegraph wire 
in general commercial use: 
“BEXTRA BEST BEST” (E. B. B.) stands highest in conductivity of any 
telegraph wire with a weight per mile ohm of from 4700 to 5000 pounds. 


“BEST BEST” (B. B.) is superior to the E. B. B. in mechanical qualities 


and equal in galvanizing, but of somewhat lower electrical value. Weight per 
mile ohm, 5600 to 6000 pounds. 


“STEEL” (or homogeneous metal) has a very high tensile strength, and a 
weight per mile ohm of 6500 to 7000 pounds. 


MELTING POINT AND RELATIVE ELECTRICAL CONDUCTIVITY 
OF DIFFERENT METALS AND ALLOYS 


Metals. Cue poe 
ity bd 

Pure’ silvers tracetthccanpsttgetaee 1 ses mearnsii eres 100. 1873 
Pures COPpene ciel tus cy ot cence oerages ces Sena an see weed a Renee 100. 2550 
Refined and crystallized copper..................-- 99.9 
Melegraphicisilicious bronzer ws. on eee eee 98. 
Alloy of copper and silver (50%) ................--- 86.65 
Pure cold ORs acto ee eee cea seek 07 eere mn eattetee 78. 2016 
Silicideof copper), AGG iol meee eon nee erelarevcesiene tr atiee Woe 
Siliciderofmcopperpl 27 yolh eer anerine ner rae 54.7 
IPurevaluminimal Siro cee erie eres oe ovo Sra ANE 54.2 1160 
Avia yan NOIZE i Sotelhin, «2g avoaskecououesobnauwaos 46.9 
Melephonicysilictows) bromZecwepetee cia.) eae 35. 
Copper with LOS, tots leadnpnrar erie ieee eerie 30. 
One Zin Oi agen yea Ee a ccle ee wnve sous eo 29.9 773 
Telephonic phosphor-bronze................+.+--5- 29. 
Silicious) brasss2b 0/75 Zan eee ee uence ter areas cures aie 26.49 
IBSPCC A PLANO ANOS ¢ cue comeane dn reo eck Eb oue oe Q1.5 
Phosphor tingeetes.5 oe ee eee cee ey 17.7 
Alloyzot coldraridisilvern(o 09) emretcce cee ainer een 16.12 
Swedishtirompcapne Sse ee ane er ga are 16. 4000 
Pure) Banca Dineen terete ener rast te Grae 15.45 442 
‘Antimonialicopperae cere maces eter aac ite ok ear eee UPR7 
Alumimiumebronzes (00/3) ere aera 12.6 
Siemens ‘steel’, shh sesh oe ere rust een oe 12: 
Pure. platinum cenceaice es ortdeee ee eee Tee 10.6 4100 
Copper with 109 ¢ of mickelle ens eer ee ee 10.6 
CadmiumtAmal gam (15975) sere eeree eee ener 10.2 
DroniersmercurialebronZzehy cease eee 10.14 
Arsenical copper (09%) see mmace: nares Oncle ennnaeren: 9.1 
Pitre lead Tee ite conn tae sta eee eave cack maces 8.88 630 
Bronze swith 209 Of uinwens aera iets eee 8.4 
Puresmickels aise: icine sonra ere teste te extiotec omens 7.89 2800 
Rhosphor-bronzes LOU setlist ae ie eee nate: 6.5 
Ehosphor-coppern 99/4) pnhOs-- seine) see eae 4.9 
Anti ONY ss tet aces eld ayer ae ea ee ere 3.88 840 


BUSBAR COPPER DATA 


Carrying Capacity. 


Thickness Width Weight per @ 1000 @ 800 
Inches. Inches. Lineal Ft Amp Amp. 
1/16 Vy SHOAL Sil 25 
1/16 34 181 AT 38 
1/16 1 241 63 50 
1/8 V% 241 63 50 
1/8 34 362 94 75 
1/8 1 A82 125 100 
1/8 14 603 156 125 
1/8 1% wh2o 188 150 
1/8 134 B44 219 175 
1/8 Q 964 250 200 
1/8 Q4 1.21 315 250 
1/8 3 1.45 375 300 
1/4 WO) A82 125 100 
1/4 3 123: 188 150 
1/4 1 964 250 200 
1/4 14 1.21 313 250 
1/4 1% 1.45 375 300 
1/4 13 1.69 438 350 
1/4 Q 1.93 500 400 
1/4 Qe 2.41 625 500 
1/4 3 2.89 750 600 
3/8 1 1.45 375 300 
3/8 1% 1.81 469 375 
3/8 14 QAT. 563 450 
3/8 134 Doe 657 525 
3/8 2 2.89 750 600 
3/8 Qe 3.62 938 750 
3/8 3 4.34 1125 900 


GENERAL SUGGESTIONS 

In all electric work, conductors, however well insulated, should always be 
treated as bare to the end that under no conditions, existing or likely to exist, 
can a ground or short cireuit occur, and so that all leakage from conductor to 
conductor, or between conductor and ground, may be reduced to the minimum. 

In all wiring special attention must be paid to the mechanical execution 
of the work. Careful and neat running, connecting, soldering, taping of con- 
ductors, and securing and attaching of fittings, are specially conducive to secur- 
ity and efficiency, and will be strongly insisted on. 

In laying out an installation, except for constant current systems, every 
reasonable effort should be made to secure distribution centers located in easily 
accessible places, at which points the cutouts and switches controlling the 
several branch circuits can be grouped for convenience and safety of operation. 
The load should be divided as evenly as possible among the branches, and all 
complicated and unnecessary wiring avoided. 


CEtRNe the A elin Sel re lOeNs eC AT AVL OlG 99 


DIAMETERS OF CONDUITS 


Conduit and Wire Diagram 
Various Sizes Required for One, Two and Three Wires 


wt. 2 Showing actual relation of various sizes double braid 


= Size of Pipe rubber covered wire to conduit 
B.&S. | Circular Amps. | a | ; 
Gauge | Mils Rubber | 4 Wire 2Wire | 3 Wire 
14 4108.81 15 i lg Y% 
12 6528 . 64 20 6 34 34 
10 10383.61 25 i 34 34 
a] 16512 25 | 35 op | at 1 
6 2624400 50 Ve 1 1% 
5 | 33087.61 | 55 | 34 | 144 114 
4 41738.49 | 70 34 14 14 
3 52624 36 80 34 14 14 
2 66357 .76 90 34 14 14 
1 83694. 49 100 Wa AS ea 
| | 
0 | 10556001 | 125 | 1 he eta 8 
00 | 133079 04 150 1 2 2 
000 167772 .16 175 1 | @ 2 
0000 211600.00 200 Be | 26 
250000 240 14 24 Q4 
300000 Q75 134 el, IW 
350000 300 Bye 98} 3 
4.00000 | 325 | 1% 3 | 3 
/ 4.50000 370 1% 3 3 
500000 4.00 14% 3 3 
600000 450 14 3 3% 
700000 500 Q 3% 3% 
800000 550 2 tee ee 
900000 600 2 314 4 
1000000 | 650 | 2 | 4 4 
1250000 750 Ql4 | 414 414 
1500000 850 9% | 4% 5 
1750000 950 3 5 5 
2000000 1050 3 as 6 


In laying out a conduit job, first ascertain the size and number of wires 
required, then take the sizes of conduit from the above table. One-half inch 


is usually used for branch conduits and is the smallest size permitted by the 
National Electric Code. In running several conduits together, a pull box will 
be found more economical than elbows for making turns, as one pull box will 
take the place of several elbows. 


800000 
Do not pull wires through conduits with a block and tackle, as it will not 


only injure the insulation, but wedge the wires in such shape that they cannot 
-be removed readily if desired. 400000} so0009 


Be careful to ream out the end when conduit is cut, as the burr may other- 
wise cut through the insulation. 


Conduits should be securely fastened to walls and ceiling by use of pipe 
straps or hooks. 


Plug all exposed ends of conduit in new buildings to prevent plaster and 
dirt from falling into it. 


CONDUCTORS AND INSULATORS IN ORDER OF THEIR VALUE 


Conpucrors Insutarors (Non-Conpucrors) Write Pettingell-Andrews Com pany 
All metals Dry air Ebonite 


Well-burned charcoal Shellac Gutta-percha for into rm ation on everyt hing 
Plumbago Paraffin India-rubber f 

Acid solutions Amber Silk l ° ] 

Saline solutions Resins Dry paper e€ ectrica 

Metallic ores Sulphur Parchment 

Animal fluids Wax Dry leather 

Living vegetable substances Jet Porcelain 

Moist earth Glass Oils 

Water Mica 


According to Culley the resistance of distilled water is 6,754 million times 
as great as that of copper. 


100 


P BT bel N, GOR AGN DARED Wiese C20 yinE soa 


eee {mre ''= 


SAG IN WIRES 


In the following tables are given the sags and tensions for copper and alum- 
inum cables of various sizes. If the cables are strung with the sag and tension 
and at the temperature indicated without wind, then with the worst condi- 
tions of sleet, wind and temperature given at the head of each table, the tension 
will just equal the elastic limit of the cable. It will be noted that definite spans 
have been chosen for each size of conductors. This has been an arbitrary choice 
based on reasonable values of sag. The matter of economy would in many 
cases demand that other spans be used, but it has not been practicable to give, 
in these tables, the sags corresponding to a great number of spans. The scope of 
these tables is, therefore, more or less limited, being useful when accurate values 
are wanted only for the spans indicated. To determine roughly what the sag 
would be at other spans, for the purpose say of approximating the height of 


the towers, the following equation may be used 


Span’, 


Span’, 


When going from a smaller span to a larger span this equation gives too 
small a sag and vice versa, when going from a larger to a smaller span the equa- 
tion will give too large a sag. Even for the determination of approximate 
sags this equation cannot be used in changing from one span to another over a 
very great range, such as from 600 ft. to 1000 ft. spans. The error for such a 
change is entirely too great. 

If it is desired to obtain approximately the tension corresponding to a given 


sag the following equation can be used 


Span? weight per ft. of conductor 
8 Xsag 


Tension = 


SAGS AND TENSIONS FOR COPPER CABLES 
(Worst Condition: 0° F., 4 in. Ice, 8 lb. Wind) 


# CONDITIONS WITHOUT ICE OR WIND 
Allow- 
Size Span | able SAG IN FEET STRESS IN LB. (TOTAL) 

(B. & 8.) | Ft.) | Stress 

in Lb.} 0° 60° 80° 130° 0° 60° | 80° 130° 

300,000 600 | 6900 9.37 | 11.57 | 12.40 | 14,25 | 4560 | 3700 | 3455 3010 

250,000 600 | 5810 9.96 | 12.22 | 13.02 | 14.82 | 3530 | 2890 | 2705 | 2375 

0000 600 | 4850 | 11.32 | 13.58 | 14.31 | 16.02 | 2637 | 2205 | 2090 | 1867 

000 600 | 3870 | 13.20 | 15.37 | 16.18 | 17.72 | 1795 | 1547 | 1480 | 1337 

00 600 | 3100 | 16.03 | 17.95 | 18.55 | 20.05 | 1179 | 1049 | 1016 941 

0 600 | 2460 | 19.63 | 21.33 | 21.90 | 23.30 764 | 701 685 645 

0 500 | 2460 | 12.10 | 14.10 | 14.65 | 15.95 837 733 708 652 

1 500 | 1953 | 15.60 | 17.10 | 17.55 | 18.75 527 481 463 | 440 

2 500 | 1523 | 20.20 | 21.50 | 21.85 | 22.85 325 307 301 | 288 

3 300 | 1223 7.02 8.20 8.56 9.36 266 | 229 219 200 

4 300 972 9.48 | 10.29 | 10.56 | 11.34 157 143 140 130 

5 300 774 \ 12.36 | 13.12 |) 13.85 |) 38.94 95 90 | 88] §85 

6 200 614 6.00 6.64 6.84 7.34 69 62 | 61 56 


*Allowable stress—one-half ultimate strength. Sags and tensions calculated to give 
allowable stress under worst conditions specified above. Coeff. of expansion—0.0000096. 
Modulus of elasticity—16,000,000. 


SAGS AND TENSIONS FOR COPPER CABLES 
(Worst Condition: 20° F., no Ice, 15 Ib. Wind) 


CONDITIONS WITHOUT ICE OR WIND 
*Allow- 
Size Span able SAG IN FEET STRESS IN LB. (TOTAL) 
(B. & 8.) (Ft.) Stress — 
| in Lb. 100° | 130° 20° 70° 100° | 130° 
300,000 600 6900 9.36 |10.51 | 6340 | 5160 | 4580 | 4085 
250,000 600 5810 9.30 |10.44 | 5260 | 4270 | 3790 | 3380 
0000 | 600 4850 9.6 |10.72 | 4310 | 3515 | 3125 | 2790 
000 600 3870 9.78 |10.89 | 3330 | 2710 | 2410 | 2175 
00 600 3100 9.99 |11.10 | 2570 | 2110 | 1882 | 1695 
0) 500 2460 7.20 | 8.182) 2065 | 1635 | 1433 | 1264 
1 500 1953 7.55 | 8.50 1557 | 1244 | 1087 961 
2 500 1523 8.075) 9.10 | 1147 914 803 Tis 
3 300 1223 2.82 | 3.49 | 1004 793 652 536 
4 300 972 2.97 | 3.60 811 603 | 493 399 


*Allowable stress—onec-half ultimate strength. Sags and tensions calculated to give 
allowable stress under worst conditions specified above. Coeff. of expansion—0.0000096. 
Modulus of elasticity—16,000,000. 


SAGS AND TENSIONS FOR ALUMINUM CABLES 
(Worst Condition: 0° F., 1% in. Ice, 8 Ib. Wind) 


Size CONDITIONS WITHOUT ICE OR WIND 
(Cop- +Allow- 
per Span} able SAG IN FEET STRESS IN LB. (TOTAL) 
Equiv- | (Ft.) | Stress - 
alent) in Lb. 0° 60° 80° 130° 2 60° 80?) "130° 
350,000 | 600 | 6120 8.28 | 11.98 | 18.12 | 15.81 | 2775 | 1923 | 1752 | 1465 
300,000 | 600 | 5250 9.63 | 13.28 | 14.35 | 16.86 | 2053 | 1495 | 1383 | 1183 
250,000 | 600 | 4380 11.71 | 14.95 | 16.02 | 18.31 | 1412 | 1105 | 1032 | 903 
0000 | 600 | 3705 13.94 | 16.87 | 17.83 | 20.05 | 1006 834 791 709 
000 | 600 | 2932 17.77 }-20.40 | 21.12 | 23.04 629 551 530 487 
00 | 500 | 2330 14.10 | 16.40 | 17.12 | 18.67 435 377 361 331 
0 | 500 | 1843 18.45 | 20.10 | 20.62 | 22.15 266 245 238 223 
1 | 500 | 1466 22.90 | 24.50 | 25.05 | 26.25 170 160 157 150 
1 | 400 | 1466 13:69) |, 15.12 | 15.60 | 16.73 183 164 159 149 
2 | 400 | 1159 17.32) ) 13-58) | 19.06 | 20.12 114 106 104 99 
3} 400 | 921 22.00 | 23.05 | 23.50 | 24.30 72 69 68 66 
3 | 3800 921 11.40 | 12.40 | 12.73 | 13.51 Ze: 71 69 65 
4 | 300 730 14.78 | 15.70 | 15.93 | 16.68 47 45 44 43 


+Allowable stress based on 14,000 lbs. per square inch. 


to give allowable stress under worst conditions specified above. 


0.0000128. 


Modulus of elasticity—9,000,000. 


Sags and tensions calculated 


SAGS AND TENSIONS FOR ALUMINUM CABLES 
(Worst Condition: 20° F., no Ice, 15 lb. Wind) 


Coeff. expansion— 


Size +Allow- CONDITIONS WITHOUT WIND OR ICE 
(Cop- Span| able - 
per (Ft.) | Stress SAG IN FEET TENSION—LB. 
Equivy- Lb. —__—_— —$———= == $$ ——$__—— —— 
alent) | 20 70° 100° | 130° 20° 70° 100° | 130° 
350,000 | 600 6120 4.95 7.63 9.45 | 10.70 | 4550 | 3015 | 2430 | 2066 
300,000 | 600 é 6.1: 7.95 9.78 | 11.60 | 3800 | 2500 | 2025 | 1710 
250,000 | 600 38 5.5! 8.40 | 10.30 | 12.10 | 2940 | 1960 | 1603 | 1365 
0000 | 600 370! oe 8.90 | 10.80 | 12.50 | 2310 | 1550 | 1290 | 1120 
000 600 29° Di 10.00 | 11.76 | 13.43 | 1597 | 1115 945 | 827 
00 500 3: 4. 7.10 8.75 10.30 | 1340 860 699 | 593 
0 | 500 : Sy. 8.30 | 9.85 | 11.25 | 872) 588 | 494) 431 
1 | 500 46 yea! 9.20 | 10.65 | 12.05 595 419 362 | 320 
2 400 1159 3.84 6.12 7.48 | 8.70) 507 318 260 224 
3 | 400 921 | 4.82 7.16 8.40 9.52 | 320 200 184 | 162 
4 | 300 730 2.10 4.00 5.13 6.12 316 172 1349) Pate 


+Allowable stress based on 14,000 Ibs. per sq. in. 


allowable stress under worst conditions specified above. 
Modulus of elasticity—9,000,000. 


Sags and tensions calculated to give 


Coeff. of expansion—0.0000128. 


EQUIVALENTS OF WIRES 


Showing Approximately Equal Capacities in the Use of C onductors of Different 
Sizes 


Bqualled by using the number of smaller conductors shown, or 
by the combinations. 
Totals 
Capacity | l 
2 Bot 5 6 Combinations 
GoMe 
1000000 | 46 30 
800000 46 36 26 
600000 46 | 40 26 16 
500000 |. # | 1 
4.00000 “%| %| wii 2 
350900 | 36 hes 2 46 & % 
300000 | Wy | 2 ‘ 36 & 46 46 & 1 
250000 a a | 3 4 36 & 1 4 & 4 
Bacco a | 
Gauge 
0000 V6 2 3) 4 5 26 & 1 36 & 3 
(0100 ne | 3 4 5 6 1 & 2 26 & 5 
00 2 4 5 6 1&3 4 & 6 
0 ¢ 5 6 8 2&4 
1 4 6 8 3&5 
2 ) 8 4&6 
83 6 8 | 10 = 
4 10 6&8 
5 8 10 12 
6 | 12 14 8 & 10 
8 14 16 10 & 12 
10 16 18 12 & 14 


For the same rise in temperature a greater amount of current can be carried 


in two or more circuits, and the greater the number of circuits, the 


greater the 


amount of current that can be carried in any given cross-section, as shown by 
table of carrying capacities on Page 93. 


Cae Neh ReAG ees Ae Da) OeN COA Agi OL 


101 


DECIMAL EQUIVALENTS 


Of eighths, sixteenths, thirty-seconds and sixty-fourths of an inch. 


Fractions Decimals Fractions Decimals Fractions Decimals Fractions Decimals 
to) of of oO of of of of 
an Inch an Inch an Inch an Inch an Inch an Inch an Inch an Inch 
1/64 = .015625 17/64 = .265625 33/64 = .515625 49/64 = .765625 
1/32 = .03125 9/32 = .28125 17/32 = .58125 25/32 = .78125 
3/64 = .046875 19/64 = .296875 35/64 = 546875 51/64 = .796875 
1/16 = .0625 5/16 = .3125 9/16 = .5625 13/16 = .8125 
5/64 = .078125 21/64 = .328125 37/64 = .578125 53/64 = .828125 
3/32 = .09375 11/32 = 34375 19/32 = 59375 27/32 = 84375 
7/64 = 109375 23/64 = .359375 39/64 = .609375 55/64 = .859375 

1/8 = 125 3/8) = 826 5/8 = .625 7/8 = 875 
9/64 = .140625 25/64 = 390625 41/64 = 640625 57/64 = .890625 
5/32 = .15625 13/32 = .40625 21/32 = 65625 29/32 = .90625 
11/64 = .171875 27/64 = .421895 43/64 = .671875 59/64 = .921875 
3/16 = .1875 7/16 = .4375 11/16 = .6875 15/16 = .9375 
13/64 = .203125 29/64 = 453125 45/64 = .703125 61/64 = .953125 
7/32 = 21875 15/32 = 46875 23/32 = 71875 31/32 = .96875 
15/64 = .234375 31/64 = .484375 47/64 = .734375 63/64 = .984375 
1/4 = .25 V2 3/4 = 75 


© HO WO Or B 69 1 


FEET EXPRESSED IN DECIMAL PARTS OF A MILE 


Units Tens Hundreds Thousands 
-000189 .001893 -01893 .1893 
.000378 .003787 .03787 3787 
-000568 -005681 05681 5681 
.000757 007574 O7574 T574 
.000946 -009468 .09468 9468 
-001136 011362 .11362 
-001325 -013255 3255 
001514 -015148 15148 
-OO1L704 -017042 -17042 


GENERAL EQUIVALENTS 


CM = Circular mils. 1 Sq in. = 1,273,200 CM. 
SqM = = Square mils. 1 Sq in. = area of a circle 1.128” diam. 
1CM = .7854 SqM. Area of circle 1” diam. = 1,000,000 CM. 


1SqM. = 1.2732 CM. 
1 Sq in. = 1,000,000 SqM. 


Area of circle 1” diam. =785,400 SqM. 


TABLE OF MULTIPLES 


Diameter of a circle X 3.1416 = Circumference. 

Radius of a circle X 6.283185 = Circumference. 

Square of the radius of a circle X 3.1416 = Area. 

Square of the diameter of a circle X 0.7854 = Area. 

Square of the circumference of a circle X 0.07958 = Area. 

Half the circumference of a circle X by half its diameter = Area. 
Circumference of a circle X 0.159155 = Radius. 

Square root of the area of a circle X 0.56419 = Radius. 
Circumference of a circle X 0.31831 = Diameter, 

Square root of the area of a circle X 1.12838 = Diameter. 
Diameter of a circle X 0.86 = Side of inscribed equilateral triangle. 
Diameter of a circle X 0.7071 = Side of an inscribed square. 
Circumference of a circle X 0.225 = Side of an inscribed square. 
Circumference of a circle X 0.282 = Side of an equal square. 
Diameter of a circle X 0.8862 = Side of an equal square, 

Base of a triangle X by 1% the altitude = Area. 

Multiplying both diameters and .7854 together = Area of an eclipse. 
Surface of a sphere X by 1/6 of its diameter = Solidity. 
Circumference of a sphere X by its diameter = Surface. 

Square of the diameter of a sphere X 3.1416 = Surface. 

Square of the circumference of a sphere X 0.3183 = Surface. 

Cube of the diameter of a sphere X 0.5236 = Solidity. 

Cube of the radius of a sphere X 4.1888 = Solidity. 

Cube of the circumference of a sphere X 0.016887 = Solidity. 
Square root of the surface of a sphere X 0.56419 = Diameter. 
Square root of the surface of a sphere X 1.772454 = Circumference. 
Cube root of the solidity of a sphere X 1.2407 = Diameter. 

Cube root of the solidity of a sphere X 3.8978 = Circumference. 
Radius of a sphere X 1.1547 = Side of inscribed cube. 

Square root of (1/3 of the square of) the diameter of a sphere = Side of 


inscribed cube. 


Area of its base X by 1/3 of its altitude = Solidity of a cone or pyramid, 


whether round, square or triangular. 


Area of one of its sides X 6 = the surface of a cube. 
Altitude of trapezoid & 14 the sum of its parallel sides = Area. 


METRIC SYSTEM OF WEIGHTS AND MEASURES 


LINEAR MEASURES 


10 Millimeters (mm) =1 Centimeter = 3937 Inch. 

10 Centimeters (em) =1 Decimeter = .3281 Feet. 

10 Decimeters (dm)  =1 Meter =1.0936 Yards. 
10 Meters (m) =1 Dekameter =1.988 Rods. 

10 Dekameters (Dm) =1 Hectometer = .497 Furlongs. 
10 Hectometers (Hm) =1 Kilometer = .621 Miles. 

10 Kilometers (Km) =1 Myriameter =6.21 Miles. 


SQUARE MEASURES 
*) =1 Sq. Centimeter =.155 Sq. In. 

(em?) =1 Sq. Decimeter =.10764 Sq. Ft. 

(dm?) =1 Sq. Meter (m2) =1.196 Sq. Yds. 
LAND MEASURES 

10000 Sq. Meters =1 Hectare =2.471 Acres. 

100 Hectares =1 Sq. Kilometer = .3861 Sq. Miles. 
CUBIC MEASURES 
OGIRGuleln: 


100 Sq. mms. (mm2 
100 Sq. ems. 
100 Sq. dms. 


1000 Cu. mms. (mm) =1 Cu. em 
1000 Cu. ems. (em? or ce) =1 Cu. dm .0353 Cu. Ft. 
1000 Cu. dms. (dm*) =1 Cu. M. (m’) =1.308 Cu. Yd. 


DRY MEASURES 
10 Millisteres =1 Centistere =1.135 U.S. Peck. 
10 Centisteres =1 Decistere = 2.83783 U.S. Bush. 
10 Decisteres =1 Stere =1 Cubic Meter. 


I fl 


LIQUID MEASURES 
10 Milliliters =1 Centiliter . 084537 U.S. Gills. 
10 Centiliters =1 Deciliter .21134 U.S. Pints. 
10 Deciliters =1 Liter 1.05671 U.S. Quarts. 
MEASURES OF WEIGHT 

10 Milligrams (mg) =1 Centigram = .15432 Grains. 

10 Centigrams (es) Sil Decigram =1.5432 Grains. 

10 Decigrams (dg) =1 Gram = .56437 Drams. 

10 Grams (g) =1Dekagram = .35273 Ounces. 

10 Dekagrams (Dg) =1 Hectogram =3.5273 Ounces. 

10 Hectograms (Hg) =1 Kilogram =2 2046 Lbs. Avoir. 
1000 Kilograms (Kg) =1 Metric Ton=2204 6 Lbs. Avoir. 


lowe dl 


METRIC CONVERSION FACTORS 


Equivalents of metric measures not given in the preceding tables, are readily 


found by the following factors: 
Millimeters + 25.4 = Inches. 
Meters x 39.37 = Inches, 
Meters x 3.281 = Feet. 
Meters per sec. x 2.237 = Miles per hour. 
Meters per sec. x 53.686 = Miles per day. 
Kilometers x .62137 = Miles. 
Kilometers x 3280.83 = Feet. 
Kilometers per hour + 1.097 = Feet per second. 
Kilometers per hour-+96.58 = Miles per minute. 
Square Millimeters+ 645.16 =Square Inches. 
Square Millimeters x 1973= Circular Mils. 
Square Meters x 10.764=Square Feet. 
Square Kilometers x 247.1 = Acres. 
Cubic Centimeters + 16.387 = Cubic Inches. 
Cubic Centimeters+ 29.574 = Fluid Ounces. 
Cubic Meters x 35.315 =Cubie Feet. 
Cubic Meters+.76456=Cubic Yards. 
Cubic Meters x 264.17 = Gallons. 
Liters x 61.0234 = Cubic Inches. 
Liters x 33.84= Fluid Ounces. 
Liters + 3.785 = Gallons. 
Liters per sec. x 127.132 =Cubie Feet per hour. 
Hectoliters x 3.5314= Cubic Feet. 
Hectoliters x 26.42 =Gallons. 
Grams x 15.432= Grains. 
Grams ~+ 29.57 = Fluid Ounces. 
Grams + 28.35 = Ounces Avoirdupois. 
Grams per meter=Kilograms per Kilometer. 
Grams per meter+1.488= Lbs. per 1000 feet, 
Grams per meter x 3.548 =Lbs. per mile. 
Grams per cu. em.-+27.68=Lbs. per cubic inch. 
Kilograms x 2.2046 = Pounds. 
Kilograms 907.2 =Short Tons (2000 Ibs.). 
Kilograms + 1016.2= Long Tons (2240 lbs.). 
Kilograms per sq. em. x 14.2234=Lbs. per sq. in. 
Kilograms per meter x .672= Pounds per foot. 
Kilograms per cu. Meter x .06243= Lbs. per cu. ft. 
Kilograms per Cheval x 2.235 = Lbs. per Horse Power. 
Kilogrammeters x 7.233 = Foot Pounds. 
Watts +746 = Horse Power. 
Watts +.7373 = Foot Pounds per second. 
Kilowatts x 1.34= Horse Power. 
Calorie x 3.968=B. T. U. 
Cheval vapeur x .9863= Horse Power. 
(Centigrade x 1.80) +32= Degrees Fahrenheit. 


102 


PEePa? ] N GAEL L -cAeN D ReEIW-S 3 CeOevigia ag Ne 


THE METRIC SYSTEM Unrr. Eaqurvatent VALur In Orner Units 
WEIGHTS Pass ; 1,000 watts. 
5 aes, 2 : Equivalents in 1.34 H. P 
Mectrie Denominations and Values Denominations in use. hae 
Weight of what 2,654,200 ft.-lbs. per hour. 
; } No. quantity of water 44,240 ft.-lbs. per minute. 
Name. Grams. at maximum density. ty 737 3 ft.-lbs. per second. 
Millier or tonneau = 1,000,000 = 1 cubic meter. 1 Kilowatt 3,412 heat-units per hour. 
Quintal = 100,000 = 1 hectoliter. 56.9 heat-units per minute. 
Myriagram B 10,000 = 10 liters. .948 heat-unit per second. 
Kilogram or Kilo = 1,000 = 1 liter. .2275 \b. carbon oxidized per hour. 
Hectogram = 100 = 1 deciliter. 3.53 lbs. water evaporated per hour from and 
Dekagram = 10 = 10 cu. centimeters. at 212° F. 
Gram = 1 = 1 cu. centimeter. 
Decigram = ail = 1 cu. centimeter. 
Centigram = 01 = 10 cu. millimeters. : 8.19 heat units per sq. ft. per minute. 
Miliecan a 001 fe 1 cu. millimeter. 1 Watt per sq. in. = 4 6371 ft.-lbs. per sq. ft. per minute. 
.193 H. P. per sq. ft. 
No. Avoirdupois 
Name. Grams. Weight. 
Millier or tonneau = 1,000,000 ae 2,204.6 pounds. 1 Kilogram Meter = SP HOORBE H P. hour 
Quintal = 100,000 = 220.46 pounds. “00000272 K. W. hour 
Myriagram = 10,000 = 22.046 pounds. (Nes aecarrincy oe 
Kilogram or Kilo = 1,000 = 2.2046 pounds. : 
Hectogram = 100 = 3.5274 ounces. 
Dekagram = 10 = Cope QuUne’s .283 K. W. hour. 
Gram = 1 = 15.432 grains. 379 H. P. } 2, 
Decigram _ ail = 1.5432 grains. MlpeWateckvane Pore are ele 
Cele a AE aaa >. Water Evap 965.7 heat-units. 
Centigram = OL = 0.1543 grain. loratadine = { 103,900 k. g 
Milligram = 001 = 0.0154 grain. and at 219°F l 019.000 nab ae 
, | and ¢ Rake ,019, joules. 
| 751,300 ft.-lbs. 
Measures or LenatTu .0664 lb. of carbon oxidized. 
Myriameter = 10,000 meters = 6.2137 miles. 
Kilometer = 1,000 meters = 0.62137 m. or 3,280 ft. 10 in. 1,055 watt seconds. 
Hectometer = 100 meters = 328 ft. and 1 inch. Hs Ane ‘ 
Dekameter == 10 meters = 393.7 inches. ‘ OP SU OSTATIC LSS: 
Meter = 1 meter = 39.87 inches. 1 Heat-unit = .000293 K. W. hour. 
Decimeter == .1 of a meter = 3.937 inches. .000393 H. P. hour, 
Centimeter = 01 of a meter = 0.3937 inch. 0000688 Ib. carbon oxidized. 
Millimeter es 001 of a meter = 0.0394 inch. .001036 Ib. water evaporated from and at 212° F. 
Merasurbs OF SURFACE 1 Heat-unit per .122 watts per sq. in. 
sq. ft. per min. = { .0176 K. W. per sq. ft. 
Hectare = 10,000 sq. meters = 2.471 acres. .0236 H. P. per sq. ft. 
Are = 100 sq. meters = 119.6 sq. yards. 
Centare = {esqauneters— 1,550 square inches. 
1 joule per second. 
Measures OF CAPACITY .00134 H. P. 
3,412 heat-units per hour. 
Name. No. Liters. Cubic Measure. Dry Measure 1 Watt = 4 .7373 ft.-lb. per second. 
Kiloliter = 1,000 = 1 cubic meter = 1.308 cu. yds. .0035 Ib. water evaporated per hour. 
Hectoliter = 100 = 1 cubic meter = 2bu. 3.35 pks. 44.24 ft.-lbs. per minute. 
Decaliter = 10 = 10 cu. decimeters = 9.08 quarts. 
Liter = 1 = 1 cu. decimeter = 0.908 quart. 
Deciliter = sl = .1 cu. decimeter = 6.1022 cu. ins. 
Centiliter = O01 = 10 cu. centimeters = 0.6102 cu. in. 1,000 watt hours. 
Milliliter _ 001 = 1 cu. centimeter = 0.061 cu. in. 1.34 H. P. hours. 
2,654,200 ft.-lbs. 
Name. ‘ No. Liters. Cubic Measure. Wine Measure. aaeeaen rs 
Kiloliter = 1,000 = 1 cubic meter = 264.17 gals. 1 Kk. W. Hour = { 367,000 kilogram meters. 
Hectoliter = 100 = .1 cubic meter = 6.417 gals. .235 lb. carbon oxidized with perfect efficiency. 
Decaliter = 10 = 10 cu. decimeters = 2.6417 gals. 3.53 lbs. water evaporated from and at 212° F. 
Liter = 1 = 1 cu. decimeter = 1.0567 quarts. 22.75 lbs. of water raised from 62° to 212° FB. 
Deciliter = al = .1 cu. decimeter = 0.845 gill. 
Centiliter = OL = 10 cu. centimeters = 0.388 fluid oz. 
Milliliter = 001 = 1cu.centimeter = 0.27 fluid oz. 
1 watt second. 
: tes .000000278 Kk. W. hour. 
Tae Teme ay AVY GIL Ona UN UTS 1 Joule =) ORs ey it 
Unir. Eourvavent VaLur In OTHER Units ‘0009477 heat-units. 
746 watts. -7373 ft.-lb. 
746 K. W. 
33,000 ft.-lbs. per minute. 
550 ft.-lbs. per second. 1.356 joules. 
2,545 heat-units per hour. .1383 k. g. m. 
Teel Le = 4 42.4 heat-units per minute. 1 ft.-lb. = 4  .000000377 K. W. hours. 
707 heat-unit per second. .001285 heat-units. 
175 lb. carbon oxidized per hour. .0000005 H. P. hour. 
2.64 Ibs. water evaporated per hour from and at 
212° F. 
( 14,544 heat-units. 
746 Kk. W. hours. 1.11 lb. anthracite coal ox. 
1,980,000 ft.-lbs. : “ 2.5 lbs. dry wood oxidized. 
2.545 heat-units. ie esters 4. 21 cu. ft. illuminating gas. 
1 H. P. Hour = 4 273,740 K. G. M. Macone 4.26 K. W. hours. 
175 Ib. carbon oxidized with perfect efficiency. yf 5.71 H. P. hours. 
2.64 Ibs. water evaporated from and at 212° F. 11,315,000 ft.-lbs. 
17.0 lbs. water raised from 62° to 212° F. 15 lbs. of water evaporated from and at 212° F. 


CALSNEI Reagan Adel.O Ne CA TAT, OG 103 


METRIC CONVERSION TABLES METRIC CONVERSION TABLES 
Properties of Copper Wire Expressed in the Metric System Millimeters to Mils 
PP n , 
are 7 S = x ‘ False ~ f ir = ae. oS: | = fer 7 mms. | Mils | mms. | Mils {| mms. Mils {| mms. Mils 
5 1g rea ir el, er esiste — C : 2@eqli «i | oa a . 9 9 19 
Be «Ss. in Milli- Sanare Klomioter, pet, Kilometer 1 39.37 26 1 023.60 ol 2 007.87 76 | 2 992.12 
Gauge meters Millimeters in Kilograms Int’n’l Ohms. 2 | 78.74 Q7 1 063.00 52 2 047.24 77 | 3 0381.49 
3 118.11 |} 28 | 1 102.40 || 53 | 2 086.61 | 78 | 8 070.86 
ooo aD jem A | HES |B tah Ta | Se | 2 tes 98 | te | 3 tio a 
000 10.404. 85.03 755.9 2028 e wee : cbisl| lee ee aE 
00 9 266 | 67.48 599.5 2557 6 236 .22 31 | 1 220.50 || 56 | 2 204.72 81 | 3 188.97 
0 8.252 53.48 AT5 4 3224 v 275.59 |; 32 1 259.80 o7 z 244 09 82 | 3 228 34 
1 7.348 42.41 377.0 4066 8 314.96 33 ya 299.20 | 58 2 283.46 83) 3) 267071 
9 6 543 33 63 299 0 5127 9 | 354.33 34 | 1 398.60) 59 | 2 322.83 | 84 | 8 307.08 
3 5.827 26.67 237.1 6465 10 393.70 35 1 378 .00 60 2 362.20 || 85 | 3 346.45 
2 5.189 21.15 188.0 8152 11 433.07 36 | 1 417.30 || 61 | 2 401.57 || 86 | 3 385.82 
5 4.620 16.77 149.1 1.028 12 472.44 37 | 1 456.70 || 62 | 2 440.94 87 | 3 425.19 
6 4.115 13.30 118.2 1.296 13 511.81 38 | 1 496.10 || 63 | 2 480.31 88 | 3 464.56 
"7 3.665 10.55 93.8 1.634 14. 551.18 39 | 1 535.40 || 64 | 2 519.68 89 | 3 503.93 
8 3.264. 8.366 TAA 2.061 15 590.55 || 40 | 1 574.80 || 65 | 2 559.05 90 | 3 543.30 
9 2.906 6. 634 59.0 2.599 16 629.92 || 41 | 1 614.17 || 66 | 2 598.42 || 91 | 3 582.67 
10 2.588 5.261 46.8 3.277 17 | 669.29 42 | 1 653.54 || 67 | 2 637.79 | 92 | 3 622.04 
11 2.304 el: 37.1 4.132 18 | 708.66 43 | 1 692.91 || 68 | 2 677.16 | 93 | 3 661.41 
12 2.052 3.309 29.4 5.211 19 748.03 44 | 1732.28 || 69 | 2716.53 || 94 | 3 700.78 
13 1.829 oe 23.3 6.571 20 | 787.40 45_ | 1771.65 || 70 | 2755.90 || 95 | 3 740.15 
iS ee pen oe ne 21 | 826.77 || 46 | 1 811.02 || 71 | @ 795.97 | .96 | 3779.52 
2, ose pes oe : 22 866.14 47 | 1 850.39 || 72 | 2 934.64 97 | 3 818.89 
- ee fos aaa eed 23 | 905.51 |/ 48 | 1 889.76 || 73 | 2 874.01 || 98 | 3 858.96 
ia Gea | Sos Ses | ance Q4 944.88 49 | 1 929.13 || 74 | 2 913.38 | 99 | 3 897.63 
: sehen : 2 5 5 968.5 5 | 2 952.75 || 3 98 
ig i ae ee enue 2 984.25 50_| 1 968.50 || 7% | 2 952.75 || 100 | 8 937.00. 
20 8128 5176 4.60 33.31 
21 7229 4105 3.65 42.00 Nils to Mill: ra 
22 6426 3255 2.89 | 52.96 - Sy so. ine ee as ae 
23; 5740 2582 2.30 66.79 _ Mils — __ mms. || Mils mms. Mils mms. ' Mils | | mms. : 
24 5105 2047 1.82 84.21 1 .025 4 || 26 660 4 51 1.295 4 76 | 1.930 4 
25 4546 1624 1.44 106.2 2 | .0508 || 27 .685 8 52 | 1.320 8 77 | 1.955 8 
26 4049 1288 1.15 133.9 3 076 2 28 Hill @ 53 | 1.346 2 || 78 | 1.981 2 
Q7 3605 -1021 908 168.9 4 101 6 29 736 6 5A Beal Be || 8) 2.006 6 
28 3211 0810 720 212.9 5 127 0 30 762 0 55 1.397 0 || 80 | 2.032 0 
5 9 5 39 x = = = nS aan GP SEE ee 
29 2859 - 0642 571 268.5 6 | .152 4 31 | .787 4 || 56 | 1.4224 || 81 | 2.0574 
30 2540 0509 453 338.6 Wives) Ieses |) sie8 | sy | Laare 82 | 2.082 8 
31 2268 0404 359 426.9 8 2032 || 33 | 8382 || 58 | 1.4732 || 983 | 2108 2 
32 2019 0320 285 538.3 9 | .2286 || 34 863 6 || 59 | 1.4986 || 84 | 2.133 6 
ee ae om ee 10) .2540 || 35 | .8890 || 60 | 1.5240 || 85 | 2.1590 
35 1495 0160 149 1079. 11 279 4 36 | 9144 61 | 1.549 4 86 | 2.184 4 
36 1970 ie 113 1361. 12 304 8 37 939 8 62 | 1.574 8 87 | 2.209 8 
ee ae a Jae ee 13 330 2 38 965 2 63 | 1.600 2 || 88 | 2.935 2 
14 355 6 39 | 990 6 64 | 1.625 6 89 | 2.260 6 
; : : : aa aes 15 en) 40 | 1.016 0 65 | 1.6510 || 90 | 2.286 0 
Fractions and Their Equivalents in Decimals of an Tnch and in Millimeters 16 “406 4 ai 71.0414 66 1.676 4 91 2 311 4 
Frac’ns Demls mms. ~ Frac’ns — ~Demls | mms. 17 AB8L 8 42 1.066 8 67 OES 92 | 2.336 8 
| 18 A5T 2 43 1,092 2 68 | 1.727 2 93 | 2.362 2 
; 44 | 0156 den | ee 64 OTRO a gls 0r 19 | .4826 || 44 | 1.1176 || 69 | 1.7526 || 94 | 2.387 6 
e ane ae aie ey pare a 20 | 5080 || 45 | 1.1430 || 70 | 1.7780 || 95 | 2.413 0 
\y G 0695 1588 y AN Sas 14.288 | MEL 46 | 1.1684 || 71 | 1.803 4 || 96 | 2.438 4 
u : |e 22 .558 8 || 47 | 1.1938 || 72 | 1.8288 || 97 | 2.463 8 
loys | 9 re > (p 9g 
5, vel 1 984 314, 5781 14684 23 584 2 48 | 1.219 2 73 | 1.8542 || 98 2.489 2 
3 : “6 ae z Q4 609 6 49 | 1.244 6 74 | 1.8796 |} 99 | 2.5146 
782 0008 ee 82 spent Peel 25 635 0 || 50 | 1.2700 75 | 1.905 0 || 100 | 2.540 0 
Ve 1094 2.778 || | 39% 6094 15.478 URS Mie Boel Hee, eel EEE 
\% 1250 3.175 || 5% | .6250 | 15.875 
| % | 1406 3.572 || 4 6406 16.272 SQUARE MILLIMETERS AREA TO INCHES DIAMETER 
5 ¢ } 2 SERA = = a ——— == = = 
2 1 oe poe! Y6 -6563 IG . 66 mm? { Inches mm? Inches mm? Inches | mm2 Inches 
v4 1719 4.366 | 13, 6719 17.066 eee a a eee oar 
3% 1875 4.763 A 6875 | 17.463 1 O44 26 227 5 | < 
i | 2 063 27281 52 820 TH 390 
eam fs 235 5é 323 78 392 
134 | 2031 5.159 454 | 7081 17.859 3 a wee ee aS pe Gs 
% 2188 | 5.556 3% | .7188 18.256 4 |_.089 es 2 ee 8 | 
15, 2344 5.953 | 4%, 13.44 18.653 5.099 | 30 | .243 55 329 80 | .397 
A 2500 6.350 34 | | 7500 19.050 6 | .109 31 | 47 56 332 81 oy 
| vi 118 32 251 57 835 82 402 
1%, | 2656 6.747 || 496, 1656 19.447 8 126 33 | Les ES 838 | 83 405 
2 | .2813 7.144 6 .7813 19. 844 9 133 34. | .259 ae 407 
1% . 2969 7.541 Ne . 7969 20.241 10 140 35 263 60 344 85 410 
% 3125 7.938 || 13% 8125 20.638 ll 147 36 OH || Gil | 847 86 412 
21 | iy a ae 12 154 37 270 | 62 350 87 414 
A 3438 8.731 || % “8438 21.431 u a16h) = nie os oe ; 
9 ee : 14. 166 39 | On 64 355 89 419 
4 | -8504 | 9.128 "74 | 8504 | 21.828 15 172 | 40 281 65 | .358 | .90 421 
as eee | 4% ee 16 ays a 41 284 | 66 | .361 91 424 
%% | .3906 9.922 || | 5% | .8906 22 622 17 183 42 eo 67 364 Me re 
134 4063 10.319 29% | 9063 | 23.019 18 189 43 291 68 366 42 
216, 4219 10.716 || 59%, | 9219 | 23.416 19 7193 44 .295 69 369 94 431 
VY A375 11.113 || 6 | | 9375 | 23.813 20 . 199 45 | .298 70 372 95 433 
21 204 46 | .301 71 374. 96 435 
2% 4531 11.509 614, | 9531 24.209 22 208 47 | 805 72 1377 97 .438 
69 4688 11.906 319 . 9688 24.606 23 .213 48.308 73 380 98 440 
31, | 4844 12.303 636, | 9844 25.003 24 218 49 | (311 74 | .382 | 99 | 442 
Ye \s 5000 12.700. 1 1.0000 25.400 5 222 | eae || 385 100 444. 


104 


PETTIN GEL L “AN D°R°E WS) C10: MepaAgnay 


PULLEY AND 


For single reduction or increase of speed by means of belting where the 
speed at which each shaft should run is known, and one pulley is in place: 


Multiply the diameter of the pulley which you have by the number of 
revolutions per minute that its shaft makes; divide this product by the speed 
in R. P. M. at which the second shaft should run. The result is the diameter 
of pulley to use. 


Where both shafts with pulleys are in operation and the speed of one is 
known: 

Multiply the speed of shaft by diameter of its pulley and divide this prod- 
uct by diameter of pulley on the other shaft. The result is the speed of the 
second shaft. 


Where a countershaft is used, to obtain size of main driving or driven 
pulley, or speed of main driving or driven shaft, it is necessary to calculate 


GEAR TABLE—DIAMETRAL PITCH. 


GEAR TABLES 


between the known end of the transmission and the countershaft, then repeat 
this calculation between the countershaft and the unknown end. 

A set of gears of the same pitch transmit speeds in proportion to the num- 
ber of teeth they contain. Count the number of teeth in the gear wheel and 
use this quantity instead of the diameter of pulley mentioned, to obtain number 


of teeth cut in unknown gear, or speed of second shaft. 


RULE FOR FINDING SIZE OF PULLEYS 


DxXS5S des 
d= = 
Sy Ss 
d = diameter of driven pulley. 


Il 


D 
S 
S’ = number of revolutions per minute of driven pulley. 


diameter of driving pulley. 
number of revolutions per minute of driving pulley. 


ll 


(NUTTALL) 


DraAMeTRAL Prrcn 1s THE Numper or Trern to Eacu Incu or tur Precw DIAMETER 


To Get 
The Diametral Pitch 
The Diametral Pitch 
The Diametral Pitch 
Pitch Diameter 
Pitch Diameter 


Having 
The Circular Pitch 
The Pitch Diameter and the Number of Teeth 


The Number of Teeth and the Diametral Pitch 
The Number of Teeth and Outside Diameter 


Pitch Diameter........... The Outside Diameter and the Diametral Pitch... . 
Pitch Diameter...........Addendum and the Number of Teeth............. 


The Number of Teeth and the Diametral Pitch... . 
The Pitch Diameter and the Diametral Pitch...... 
The Pitch Diameter and the Number of Teeth 


Outside Diameter 
Outside Diameter 
Outside Diameter 


The Number of Teeth and Addendum 
The Pitch Diameter and the Diametral Pitch...... 
The Outside Diameter and the Diametral Pitch. . . 
The Diametral Pitch 


Outside Diameter 
Number of Teeth 
Number of Teeth 
Thickness of Tooth 


dcendum seine ees ees The Diametral Pitch 

IRGODMR ice ere er MhemDrametrale Pitch pemuece acess rcs: cence ere eee 

Working Depthiv..s.4..--nr the Diametralghitch memes sctte tte ewe ene 

WiholesDepthmrerse ene DTheWDjametralebitchiepers nase seer 
Glearances,auiecer a cer aoe iThesDiametrallertchtee steer eee ona 

@learancess ae cece ete ThicknesstofeToothrrm case ac neocon tener: 


The Outside Diameter and the Number of Teeth. . . 


_Multiply Outside Diameter by the Diametral Pitch and subtract 2 


Rule 


Divide 3.1416 by the Circular Pitch 
Divide Number of Teeth by Pitch Diameter 
Divide Number of Teeth plus 2 by Outside Diameter 
Divide Number of Teeth by the Diametral Pitch 
Divide the product of Outside Diam. and No. of Teeth by No. of Teeth plus 2.. 
Subtract from Outside Diam. the quotient of 2 divided by the Diam’t'l Pitch .... 
Multiply Addendum by the Number of Teeth 
Divide Number of Teeth plus 2 by the Diametral Pitch 
Add to the Pitch Diameter the quotient of 2 divided by the Diametral Pitch... . 
Divide Product of Number of Teeth plus 2 and Pitch Diameter by the Number of 

Teeth 
Multiply the Number of Teeth plus 2 by Addendum 
Multiply Pitch Diameter by the Diametral Pitch 


Divide 1.5708 by the Diametral Pitch 
Divide 1 by the Diametral Pitch, or s = dy 


1 


Divide 1.157 by the Diametral Pitch 
Divide 2 by the Diametral Pitch 
Divide 2.157 by the Diametral Pitch 
Divide .157 by the Diametral Pitch 
Divide Thickness of Tooth at pitch line by 10 


STORAGE BATTERY DATA 


Storage batteries are made for either stationary or portable service. Both 
positive and negative plates are of pure lead, so that local action is reduced 
toa minimum. This feature results in high efficiency, long life and ability 
to hold charge through a long period of open circuit. 

The mechanical design of the plate is such that the active material is in 
a thin layer supported by a conductor, and accessible to the current and 
electrolyte. Provision is made within the positive plate itself to accom- 
modate any distortion of the active portions. 

The approximate discharge voltage of a cell is two volts. Therefore, the 
battery discharge voltage is the number of cells in series multiplied by two. 
The ampere hour capacity, the rate of discharge and the rate of charge of 
a battery are determined by the size and number of plates in a cell. 

The voltage required to charge a cell varies from 2.1 volts at the begin- 
ning to as high as 2.8 volts at the end, the cell charging at a constant cur- 
rent, usually the 8-hour discharge rate. The charging current is usually 
controlled by a rheostat in series with the battery, booster generator, or 
generator field control. 

The maximum line voltage to be provided for charging a given number 
of cells in series is the number of cells multiplied by 2.8. The charging 
current will depend upon the size of the cell. 

When acell discharges, the electrolyte (sulphuric acid solution) forms the 
active material into lead sulphite and becomes weaker in acid with an increas- 
ing per cent. of water, and conversely, on charge the sulphate is changed 
back to acid. A definite amount of sulphate is formed for each ampere- 
hour discharge, therefore the density or specific gravity of the electrolyte 
changes a given amount. 

This change in specific gravity of the electrolyte is proportional to the 
ampere-hours output and is practically independent of the rate of discharge. 
A very convenient and accurate method of charging is available by using a 
hydrometer to measure the change in specific gravity between the conditions 
of full charge and full discharge, and then charging until the original specific 
gravity of the electrolyte is reached. 

The energy remaining in a cell at any time during a discharge can be 
found by noting the change in specific gravity of the electrolyte from the 
value at the beginning of the discharge and comparing it with the total 
range for the given discharge rate. 

The range in density of specific gravity of the electrolyte between full 


charge and discharge, at the 8-hour rate, is approximately from 1,200 to 
1,160 for a standard cell in a glass jar, the temperature being 70° F. The 
range will be approximately from 1,200 to 1,180 for a discharge at the one- 
hour rate. 

The exact change in gravity should be determined for each particular 
size of cell, as it varies with the size of jar and the number of plates. 

The normal ampere-hour capacity of a cell is based upon the 8-hour rate 
of discharge and is arbitrarily taken at 100%. When taken at other rates, 
the ampere-hour capacity varies. 

The available ampere-hour capacity varies with the temperature and rate 
of discharge. For a limited range of temperature at the 8-hour rate of dis- 
charge, the capacity varies approximately one-half of one per cent. for 
each degree Fahrenheit change in temperature above or below 70° F. An 
increase in temperature will raise the capacity and a reduction will lower 
it. The lower the rate of discharge, the less will be the variation due to 
temperature. 

Storage batteries may be used to great advantage in maintaining a con- 
stant load on a generating system when the load factor is poor. A sample 
of such regulation is shown in reproduction from recording ammeter records 
of a battery and regulator maintaining a constant load upon the generating 
system with an exceedingly variable external load. 

When it is desired to maintain a constant alternating current load, the 
same degree of regulation may be obtained as in direct current work, by 
connecting the battery across the direct current side of a boosted rotary 
converter controlled by the regulator. 


RULES FOR CARE OF BATTERY 


1. Do not over discharge battery. 

2. Use only distilled water and chemically pure acid. 

3. Never adjust specific gravity of solution by adding acid until cause of 
the change in specific gravity is found and remedied. 

4. Maintain the solution at standard level and at standard strength by test- 
ing and adjusting once in two weeks. 

5. Keep the cells clean, all wood work well painted, and metal work pro- 


tected by acid-proof varnish or vaseline. 


Cae NG laheag beer Selene lel OuNge se (AP APT, OG 


105 


~ LAMP 


OPERATING PRINCIPLES OF MAZDA B LAMPS 


Until about 1913 the filaments of all commercial electric incandescent lamps 
were operated in bulbs from which practically all air and gases had been re- 
moved. The evacuation of the bulb accomplishes two purposes: First, it 
prevents the filament being consumed by the oxygen of the air; second, it pre- 
vents the loss of heat from the filament by convection. As the temperature 
of the filament of a lamp is raised the light given out increases much more 
rapidly than the energy consumed but, on the other hand, the rate of evapora- 
tion of the filament is increased. It is, therefore, desirable from the standpoint 
of efficient transformation of electric energy into light to operate the filament 
at the highest temperature that it can withstand without causing it to evaporate 
at any excessively rapid rate. The rate of evaporation of a given filament at a 
certain temperature, and consequently the life of the lamp, depends upon the 
ability of the filament to withstand evaporation. There is a great difference 
in this respect in the various materials which may be used as filaments, and 
this is one reason why it is possible for the metallic-filament lamps to produce 
so much more light for a given consumption of energy than the older carbon- 
filament lamps, and give at the same time a more satisfactory life performance. 
It would be possible to operate the ordinary carbon lamps at an efficiency as 
high as that of the metallic-filament lamps but the life would be so short as to 
preclude their use commercially at such an efficiency. 


OPERATING PRINCIPLES OF MAZDA C LAMPS 


It is seen, then, that if the rate of evaporation can be reduced, the filaments 
can be operated at a higher temperature and, other things being equal, at a 
higher efficiency. Inert gases introduced into the bulb increase the pressure 
bearing upon the filament, and the practicable operating temperature can there- 
by be increased. However, with lamps where the filaments of ordinary size were 
mounted in the regular way, the loss due to heat being conducted away by the 
gas is great enough to more than offset the advantages obtained by operating 
the filament at a higher temperature. The development of the helically coiled 
tungsten filament permitted mounting in a small space near the center of the 
bulb, and the percentage loss through the gas was greatly reduced, with the 
result that these Mazpa C lamps became at once commercially practical in the 
higher wattages. 


LIFE DATA 


The performance which a group of lamps may be expected to give in service 
varies with the character of the service and the method of installation. A group 
of lamps which under the tests prescribed in the standard specifications may be 
expected to have an average life of 1000 hours could not be expected to give 
a similar performance under unsatisfactory service conditions. 

It is expected that where the regulation of the circuit voltage or current 
is good, and where the average value of the voltage or current while the lamps 
are burning is the same as that of the lamp label, a performance of approximately 
that given in the following table for the various lamps may be expected. 


} | | 
Hours | 


Burned 0 200 | 400 | 600 | 800 a | 1200 ee | 1600 | 1800 


| ie 


Number l¢ 
aber demies 00 97° | 94 | 89 | 77 | 60 | 


remaining 


The above statement includes the necessity of proper installation as Mazpa 
lamps cannot be expected to give their full rated life unless the service is as 
good as that given above and the lamps protected from excessive vibration 
or excessive handling. Lamps when fitted with reflectors or enclosed in housings 
of any kind can only be expected to give full average service life when these 
reflectors, enclosing mediums or housings are properly designed so as not to 
overheat any part of the lamp. 

In considering average service life it must be remembered that although 
some lamps show a shorter life than the average, others will show a life corre- 
spondingly longer. 

To illustrate this further the above figures may be given as representing 
the number of lamps out of an original lot of 100 60-watt Mazpa B lamps 
which might be expected to be burning at the end of various periods of service 
as indicated above. It should be remembered in considering this table that the 
data are typical of 60-watt Mazpa B lamps of the standard voltage range. 


DATA 


Other sizes and types of lamps have different characteristics: small lamps, for 
example, having a larger number of early burnouts than some of the larger sizes. 

The table, therefore, will serve to illustrate only the more usual standard 
types of multiple lamps and is not necessarily representative of lamps for 
stereopticon service, locomotive headlight service, street railway service, flood 
lighting service, round bulb lamps, tubular lamps, or the Mazpa C lamps of 
any of the various sizes. 

In the lot of 100 lamps represented 40 lamps failed before the end of the 
rated life period, while 60 lamps burned beyond. The average life of all lamps, 
however, is slightly in excess of 1000 hours. 

The rated average total life of most of the usual sizes of large Mazpa lamps 
listed on the regular schedules is 1000 hours. Following are some of the 
exceptions: 


Mazpa B lamps for ornamental lighting service: round bulb lamps, 750 
hours; 25-watt T-10 bulb lamps, 500 hours; 40-watt T-8 bulb lamps, 600 hours. 

Mazpa B lamps for sign lighting service, 1500 hours. 

Mazpa B lamps for electric street railway service, 1500 hours. 

Mazpa C lamps for street lighting service, 1350 hours. 

Mazpa C lamps for locomotive headlight service, 30-34 volts, 500 hours. 

Mazpa Daylight lamps, 700 hours. 

Mazpa C lamps for stereopticon and motion picture projection service, 
100 hours. Mazpa C lamps for floodlighting service, 800 hours. 


Vortacr Ranew is the total range of voltage for which lamps may be 
ordered. Lamps are manufactured for each individual voltage included 
within this range. Some lamps, for operation in connection with standardized 
equipment having a limited voltage variation, are manufactured at one voltage 
rating only. Such lamps are designed to meet the average voltage conditions 
of the intended service and are labeled according to the voltage limits which 
have been found characteristic of that service. Thus lamps for standard 
lighting service are listed under the voltage range of “110 to 125 volts” and 
lamps for any individual voltage between these limits may be ordered, while 
lamps for country home lighting service are manufactured at one voltage and 
labeled at “28-32 volts” which indicates the limited variation of voltage of 
such circuits. 


Bases are designated by a name, such as “Medium Screw,” “Mogul Screw,” 
Bases on 
lamps having bulbs with large necks, may be fitted with an insulated shell 


ete., which indicates the type of socket in which the base will fit. 


known as a skirt. Such bases are designated as skirted. 


Mogul Screw Base 
(Unskirted) 


Medium Screw Base 
(Unskirted) 


Burs. The diameter of a bulb is expressed in eighths of an inch and is 
always used in conjunction with the letter designating the type of bulb, such 
as the S-19; “S” 
indicating that the bulb is 19/8ths of an inch in diameter: or the G-25 bulb, 


indicating that the bulb is a straight-side bulb and “19” 


the “G” indicating a round (globular) bulb and the “25” indicating that 
the bulb is 25/8ths of an inch in diameter. The bulb designation “PS” 
indicates ‘‘pear shape.’ These bulbs are generally used for Mazpa C lamps. 
The letter “T” indicates a tubular bulb. 


106 P ETE N-GeEe EL. - AGN ED RS EAW- Si CeOsyVig Een 


As the heat carried away by the gas from a thin filament of low wattage It is advisable that the labeled voltage on a lamp be the same or at least 
is proportionately greater than from a thick filament of high wattage, there no higher than the actual average voltage at the lamp socket in which the lamp 
is, therefore, a wattage below which Mazpa B lamps become more efficient is used. 


Frostep Lamps have the outside surface of the bulb treated by a sand- 
blast or acid process to soften the light and make it less glaring. ‘‘All frosted”’ 


WU) 


| 
| 
) 
, lamps are those which have the bulb entirely frosted. “‘Bowl frosted” lamps 
S-19 Bulb G-25 Bulb T.10 Bulb PS-30 Bulb are those which have the bulb frosted from the tip to the maximum diameter of 
Tig. 8 the bulb. 


Bowl Frosted Lamp All Frosted Lamp 


pa et 


BULB CLASSIFICATION (Lamps Illustrated 14 Scale) 


than Mazpa C lamps of the same voltage and rated life. At present Mazpa 
C lamps are not manufactured below 50 watts in 110 to 125 volts for the reason 
that they would not be as efficient as the Mazpa B lamps under 50 watts now 
made. 


LTHOUGH no attempt has 
Ligut Center Luncrn is the distance from the center of the filament to been made in this catalog to 
bhererg contece point.o1 Resin cover our department which 
handles Electric Lighting Fixtures, 
it should be remembered that we 
specialize on the installation of elec- 
tric lighting equipment for Resi- 
dences, Public Buildings, Hospitals, 
Churches, Theatres, etc. 


The services of our Electric [Jumina- 


ting Engineers and Fixture Designers 


are always at the command of those 


ay who desire assistance of a thoroughly 
Mazpa C Lampe—6-1n. 
LIGHT CENTER LENGTH competent character. 


Those interested in lighting facilities 

THE EFFECT OF LAMP VOLTAGE UPON even ; 
for the home will find it extremely in- 

LIGHTING SERVICE ; oe ‘ ; 
teresting to visit our Fixture Studios. 


Lamp users will occasionally complain of “dim lights.” The user gen- Our showing of attractive designs 
erally assumes that dim lights are an indication that he is not getting the : . 
proper service, but this assumption may not be justified by the facts. includes types appropriate to any 


It may be that he has tried to use an inferior grade of lamp in which case 
the reason for complaint will not be hard to find, or more likely, he may be 
using lamps of wrong voltage for his circuit. Sometimes this is due to a 
mistake or to carelessness, but more often it is due to a lack of knowledge as to 
the actual voltage at the sockets in which the lamps are to be operated. 


scheme of interior treatment. 


In some cases the user will advise that the lights are all right until he turns 
on additional lights and then they grow dim. This indicates that its circuits 
are overloaded and steps should be taken to remedy this condition. 


Ce Nelen ATI (Ss PeAT 1-O Ne C A*T AOL OG 


107 


VARIATION OF CANDLE-POWER WITH VOLTAGE FOR MAZDA LAMPS 


A Mazpa lamp gives its rated candle-power only when operated on a cir- 
cuit of a voltage equal to the rated voltage of the lamp. If the rated voltage 
is less than the circuit voltage, the candle-power will be increased and 
vice versa. The following table shows the relations between circuit voltage, 


lamp voltage and candle-power produced. 


To illustrate the use of the table: Suppose a customer to have a circuit of 
voltage 112. If he burns 108-volt Mazpa lamps on this circuit then candle- 
power will be 113.6 per cent. of their normal rating (found in the column headed 
112 and in the row opposite 108). Similarly, if the customer burns 116-volt 
Mazpa lamps, their candle-power will be 88.4 per cent. of normal. 


e of Cireuit 


Voltag 
Voltage | | : = re : | 
of Lamp 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 12 LAS 114 115 116 Alil7/ 118 119 120 121 122 | 123 | 124 125 
| | | 

105 129.1 | 133.1 | 137.2 | 
106 125.0 | 128.8 | 132.8 | 136.9 | 
107 121.0 | 124.7 | 128.5 | 132.5 | 136.5 | | 
108 117.1 | 12058 | 124:5./ 12812") 132-2 | 136.1 
109 113.5 | 117.0 | 120.6 | 124.2 | 128.0 | 131.8 | 135.7 | 
110 109.9 | 113.3 | 116.8 | 120.4 | 124.0 | 127.7 | 131.5 | 135.4 | | 
ill 106.5 | 109.8 | 113.2 | 116.6 | 120.2 | 123'8 | 127.4.| 131.2 | 135.0 | 
112 103.2 | 106.4 | 109.7 | 113.1 | 116.5 | 120.0 | 123.6 | 127.2 | 130.9 | 134.7 | 
113 100.0 | 103.2 | 106.4 | 109.6 | 113.0 | 116.3 | 119.8 | 123.3 | 126.9 | 130.6 | 134.3 | | 
114 97.0 | 100.0 | 103.1 | 106.3 | 109.5 | 112.9 | 116.2 | 119.6 | 123.1 | 126.7 | 130.3 | 134.0 
115 | 94.0] 97.0 : 9.5 3, 9.5 | 122.9 | 126.4 | 130.0 | 133.7 
116 91.2 | 94.1 | 3.3 5 122.7 | 126.2 | 129.7 
117 88.5 91.3 PLO 22%) 26.0 
118 85.8 | 88.5 5.6 118.9 | 122.3 
119 83.3 | 85.9 2.3 | 115.5 | 118.7 
120 80.8 | 83.4 1 15.3 
121 73.5 | 81.0 120 
199 76.2 | 78.7 | 108.9 
123 74.0 | 76.4 | 105.9 
Bx. «Ie AITeG aks allicceecenaeal le Nezeson| eee a ecard lai ra eI 74.2 102.9 
125 Jabteoa|asenealloasoed 100.0 


VARIATION OF WATTS WITH V 


A Mazpa lamp consumes its rated watts only when operated on a circuit 
of a voltage equal to the rated voltage of the lamp. If the rated lamp voltage 
is less than the circuit voltage, the watts will be increased and vice versa. 
The following table shows the relations between circuit voltage, lamp voltage, 
and watts consumed. 


OLTAGE FOR MAZDA LAMPS 


To illustrate the use of the table: Suppose a customer to have a circuit of 
voltage 112. If he burns 108-volt Mazpa lamps on this circuit their wattage 
will be 105.9 per cent. of their normal rating (found in the column headed 112 
and in the row opposite 108). Similarly if the customer burns 116-volt Mazpa 
lamps, their watts will be 94.6 per cent. of normal. 


aS we Voltage of Circuit, 


Voltage | | | | | 
of ees 105 106 107 108 | 109 ieay |) alata 112 113 114 LST) 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 
| | 
| | | | | 
| | 

105 100.0 | 101.5 | 103.0 | 104.6 | 106.1 | 107.6 | 109.2 | 110.7 | 112.3 | 113.9 | 115.5 | 

106 98.5 | 100.0 | 101.5 | 103.0 | 104.5 | 106.0 | 107.6 | 109.1 | 110.6 | 112.2 | 113.7 | 115.3 | 

107 97.1 98.5 | 100.0 | 101.5 | 103.0 | 104.5 | 106.0 | 107.5 | 109.0 | 110.5 | 112.1 | 113.6 | 115.2 

108 95.7 OL 98.5 | 100.0 | 101.5 | 103.0 | 104.4 | 105.9 | 107.4 | 108.9 | 110.4 | 112.0 | 113.5.| 115.0 

109 94.3 95.7 97.1 98.6 | 100.0 | 101.5 | 102.9 | 104.4 | 105.8 | 107.3 | 108.8 | 110.3 | 111.8 | 113.4 | 114.9 

110 92.9 94.3 95.7 97.1 98.6 | 100.0 | 101.5 | 102.9 | 104.4 | 105.8 | 107.3 | 108.8 | 110.2 | 111.7 | 113.2 | 114.8 | 

stk 91.6 93.0 94.4 95.8 97.2 98.6 | 100.0 | 101.4 | 102.9 | 104.3 | 105.7 | 107.2 | 108.7 | 110.1 | 131.6 | 113.1 | 114.7 

112 90.3 91.7 93.0 94.4 95.8 97.2 98.6 | 100.0 | 101.4 | 102.9 | 104.3 | 105.7 | 107.2 | 108.6 | 110.0 | 111.5 113.0 | 114.5 

113 89.0 90.4 91.7 93.1 94.4 95.8 er 98.6 | 100.0 | 101.4 | 102.8 | 104.2 | 105.7 | 107.1 | 108.5 | 109.9 | 111.4 | 112.9 | 114.3 | 

114 87.8 89.1 | 90.5] 91.8 93.2 94.5 95.9 97.2 98.6 | 100.0 | 101.4 | 102.8 | 104.2 | 105.6 | 107.0 | 108.4 | 109.8 | 111.3 | 112.8 |} 114.2 | 

115 86.6 87.9 89.2 90.5 91.8 | 93.2 94.5 95.9 97.3 98.6 | 100.0 | 101.4 | 102.8 | 104.2 | 105.6 | 107.0 | 108.4 | 109.8 | 111.2 } 112.7 | 114.1 
Ge ieee, 86.7 88.0 89.3 90.6 91.9 | 93.3 94.6 96.0 97.3 98.6 | 100.0 | 101.4 | 102.7 | 104.1 | 105.5 | 106.9 | 108.3 TOE ey) shila) ala bess 
Som ee nme Wa linoec de nets 86.8 88.1 89.4 90.7 | 92.0 93.3 94.6 96.0 97.3 98.6 | 100.0 | 101.4 | 102.7 | 104.1 | 105.5 | 106.8 | 108.2 | 109.6 | 111.0 
EES a me Ama eset iy etic all eemiataae 86.9 88.2 89.5 90.8 | 92.1 93.4 94.7 | 96.1 97.4 98.7 | 100.0 | 101.4 | 102.7 | 104.1 | 105.4 | 106.8 | 108.2 | 109.5 
Oe ee Rr a MCR PUI ci on dalla wemsese 87.0 88.3 89.6 90.8 92.1 93.4 94.7 96.1 97.4 98.7 | 100.0 | 101.4 | 102.7 | 104.0 | 105.4 | 106.7 | 108.1 
TO OR ret ercua. 4] ete eae cere conte vail tavrebe ieee | (oN 87.1 88.4 89.7 90.9 92.2 93.5 94.8 96.1 97.4 98.7 | 100.0 | 101.4 | 102.7 | 103.9 | 105.3 | 106.7 
121 [etic ese conc | ls renrstraio a Isom went ss | sh ecmeich eked lesanshiatatell esse Fery 87.2 88.5 89.7 91.0 92.2 93.5 94.8 96.1 97.4 98.7 | 100.0 | 101.3 | 102.7 | 103.9 | 105.3 
LE esyarercay airs] etace sot aay I Stetaarare ot lor ene setae | eae nana, opet|lertetar heat] etene Gerais 87.3 88.6 89.8 91.1 92.3 93.6 94.9 | 96.1 97.4 98.7 | 100.0 | 101.3 | 102.6 | 103.9 
1 | eSeetion oral seers lero er one ||pececeeeren heccth cao || erteatea sees] 87.4 88.7 89.9 91.2 | 92.4 93.7 | 94.9 96.2 97.5 98.7 | 100.0 | 101.3 | 102.6 
124  oeeeone na hee eranreeee | | Sam ear gH PER coe Peet Lier Aneel | Steir ery Meee yee a eccisiteicre 87.5 | 88.8 90.0 | 91.3 92.5 93.7 | 94.9 | 96.2] 97.5 98.7 | 100.0 | 101.3 
ZO Peters cyotch| esearch erate ch ctall see tcpats cal [fe-ccaswecova ills wrayanactel [Ivica er ereiitiors «ve rea lpaumnrnasaealie ate wicks 87.6 88.9 | 90.1 91.3 92.5 93.7 95.0 96.2 | 97.5 | 98.7 | 100.0 


THE STETSON 
BOSTON 


PRESS 


ae, bie 
Vai eR 
Ae 
i ‘ 


